JP7429958B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with performance control means for controlling execution of performances.

For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters the starting slot, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and after the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the result of the above determination is displayed. The special symbol will be stopped and displayed. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, based on the result of the above-mentioned judgment, an effect that makes people expect a jackpot is executed during the variable display of special symbols, and if the right of the above-mentioned judgment is withheld, the judgment A so-called pre-read effect is executed based on the result of the preliminary judgment regarding the rights of the user.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-90853

By the way, it cannot be said that the effects performed on conventional gaming machines are necessarily sufficiently entertaining, and there is a need for further improvement in the entertainment.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is as follows:
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, symbol display control means causes a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a symbol and then stop and display a symbol indicating the result of the determination;
a reservation means capable of suspending the right of judgment up to a predetermined number;
prior determination means for making a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made on the rights reserved by the reservation means;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
Based on the result of the determination, a winning notification effect that notifies that the special game will be executed or that the special game is Execute a failure notification effect to notify that it will not be executed,
Before the start of the specific variation, an expectation effect that makes the user expect that the winning notification effect will be executed in the specific variation based on the result of the preliminary judgment regarding the right of judgment corresponding to the specific variation. As such, it is possible to perform the first expected performance or the second expected performance,
When the first expected performance is executed, a first suggestion performance indicating that the possibility of the winning notification performance being executed is a first degree, and a first suggestion performance indicating that the probability is higher than the first degree. executing at least one of the following in the specific variation;
When the second expectation effect is executed, a third suggestion effect indicating that the possibility is a third degree higher than the second degree, and a third suggestion effect indicating that the possibility is higher than the first degree. executing either one of the following in the specific variation;
The second expected performance is a change performance that changes the background image being displayed to another background image,
The performance control means is
When the third suggestion effect is executed in the specific variation, there is a time when the win notification effect is executed and a time when the loss notification effect is executed during the execution of the specific variation. It is something to do.

According to this invention, it is possible to perform highly entertaining performances.

Front view of gaming machine 1 Front view of game board 2 Enlarged view of main display 40 in FIG. 2 Explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing control of the second big prize opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 A block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1 Explanatory diagram to explain jackpot random numbers and pattern random numbers Time chart to explain jackpot games Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1 Explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of reach production Explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of special symbols in the normal gaming state Screen diagram illustrating the performance of the first normal mode in the normal gaming state (Part 1) Screen diagram illustrating the performance of the first normal mode in the normal gaming state (Part 2) A screen diagram showing an example of production when a V winning is announced during a jackpot game Screen diagram showing an example of performance when V winning is not announced during jackpot game Explanatory diagram for explaining staged suggestion production Explanatory diagram for explaining a table used in the process of determining the number of performances during the period suggested by the stage suggestion production Detailed flowchart of step S172 step S172 in FIG. 57 Screen diagram showing a specific example of staged suggestion production A screen diagram illustrating the effect that is performed after the stage suggestion effect ends. Explanatory diagram illustrating the characteristics of each confirmed notification performance that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the pending icon (and the icon) and the expected image Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the combination of the pending icon and the expected image Screen diagram showing a specific example of reliability suggestion pair display performance Screen diagram showing a specific example of the first expected performance and the second expected performance (Part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of the first expected performance and the second expected performance (Part 2) Time chart for explaining the first expected performance, the second expected performance, and the third expected performance Time chart for explaining modified examples of the first expected performance and the second expected performance Schematic diagram for explaining the arrangement of the first starting port 21 and each light emitting group Time chart to explain the lighting effects Explanatory diagram for explaining each effect suggestion image displayed in advance suggestion effect Screen diagram showing a specific example of advance suggestion production A screen diagram illustrating the effect after the preliminary suggestion effect has been performed. Time chart for explaining advance suggestion performance Explanatory diagram for explaining two types of omen effects (expected effects) and four types of suggestion effects. Explanatory diagram for explaining each icon displayed during the third normal mode A screen diagram illustrating an icon multiplication effect in which effect images related to a hold suggestion display proliferate. A screen diagram illustrating an icon multiplication effect in which the effect images related to the variation suggestion display proliferate. Explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80 Detailed flowchart of sensor detection processing in step S2 of FIG. 39 Detailed flowchart of preliminary determination processing in steps S211 and 219 in FIG. 40 Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 39 Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42 Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. 42 Detailed flowchart of special figure stop processing in step S317 of FIG. 42 Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39 (Part 1) Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39 (Part 3) Flowchart illustrating main processing executed in sub-control board 90 Detailed flowchart of the first interrupt processing in step S51 of FIG. 49 Detailed flowchart of icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of expected image change effect pattern setting process in step S518 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the expected performance pattern setting process in step S519 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the portent effect pattern setting process in step S521 of FIG. 50 Detailed flowchart of second interrupt processing in step S53 of FIG. 49 Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. 55 Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. 56 Detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 57 Detailed flowchart of the preview effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 57 Detailed flowchart of the basic preview performance pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. 59 Detailed flowchart of the final notification effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of advance suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. 59 Detailed flowchart of the round game start command reception process in step S23 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the V winning command reception process in step S26 of FIG. 56 Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 100 Detailed flowchart of image display control processing in step S71 of FIG. 32 Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in lamp control board 120

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a configuration example of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 2. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 30 and a gaming board 2 attached within the gaming machine frame 30. The gaming machine frame 30 includes a front frame 31 having a decorative surface, a main body frame for attaching the gaming board 2, etc., and an outer frame for fixing the gaming machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. There is. The front frame 31 supports a glass plate arranged parallel to the game board 2 at a predetermined distance, and this glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 3 in which game balls can flow down. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 includes a firing handle 32 for firing game balls, an upper tray 33 for storing game balls to be supplied to a firing device (not shown), and an upper tray. 33 is provided with a lower tray 34 for storing game balls that cannot be stored. When the player grips the firing handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 33 are guided to the firing device and are fired with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32. After the launched game ball moves along the rail member 4 located on the left side of the game area 3, it is guided to the upper position of the game area 3, and comes into contact with game nails, windmills, etc. provided in the game area 3. As a result, it flows down the game area 3 along the game board 2 while changing its direction of movement.

A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4, and this ball return prevention piece 6 prevents the game ball that has once entered the game area 3 from returning to the firing device side. Further, a stop button is provided in a position close to the firing handle 32, and by operating this stop button, the player can temporarily stop firing the game ball without returning the firing handle 32 to its initial position. It is possible to stop it.

When the player performs "left hitting" by rotating the firing handle 32 by a small rotation angle, the game ball is fired with a relatively weak firing strength, and this game ball flows down the left game area 3L. On the other hand, when the player performs a "right-handed hit" in which the firing handle 32 is rotated by a large rotation angle, the game ball is fired with a relatively strong firing strength, and this game ball is positioned at the upper right of the center decoration 10. After moving along the rail member 4, it flows down the right gaming area 3R.

A first starting port 21, a second starting port 22, an opening/closing member 23, and three general winning ports 24 are provided in the passage path of the game ball in the left gaming area 3L as accessories related to winning and determination. (see Figure 2). In addition, in the passage route of the game ball in the right gaming area 3R, there are the second starting opening 22, the opening/closing member 23, one general winning opening 24, the gate 25, and the first big winning opening as accessories related to winning and judgment. 26, an opening/closing member 27, a second big prize opening 28, and an opening/closing member 29 are provided (see FIG. 2).

In the process of flowing down the game area 3 along the game board 2, the game ball fired from the launcher enters the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22, the general winning port 24, the first big winning port 26, and There is a possibility that a prize will be won in any of the second grand prize openings 28. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34 according to the winning spot. For example, each time one game ball enters the first starting port 21, four prize balls are paid out, and each time one game ball enters the second starting port 22, one prize ball is paid out. Five prize balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the general winning hole 24. In addition, 15 prize balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the first grand prize opening 26, and 15 prizes are paid out every time one game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28. The ball is paid out. Note that the game balls that do not win any prizes are discharged from the game area 3 through the discharge port formed at the lower end of the game board 2.

Note that a center decoration body 10 is provided in an opening formed in the center of the game board 2. This center decoration body 10 includes a stage part 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll, and a warp part 12 having warp entrances and warp exits as both ends. A game ball flowing down the left game area 3L may enter the warp section 12 from the warp entrance, and this game ball is discharged from the warp exit and guided to the stage section 11. A guide groove is formed at the center of the left and right sides of the stage section 11 to allow the game balls rolling on the stage section 11 to fall toward the first starting port 21. Therefore, the game ball guided to the stage part 11 via the warp part 12 is more likely to enter the first starting port 21 than the game ball which flows down the left game area 3L without passing through the warp part 12. easy.

The first starting port 21 is a starting area that is always open. The second starting port 22 is a starting area that is normally closed when the opening/closing member 23 as an electric accessory is not operating, and is opened when the opening/closing member 23 is operated. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22), it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Then, on a first special symbol display 41 (or a second special symbol display 42), which will be described later, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a symbol (a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) indicating the result of the above determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed in which the first jackpot 26 and the second jackpot 28 are opened.

In addition, in the following explanation, the determination executed in response to the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening 21 will be referred to as the "first special symbol determination", and the determination executed in response to the winning of a gaming ball in the second starting opening 22 as "first special symbol determination". The judgment made by the player will be referred to as the "second special symbol determination," and these will be collectively referred to as the "special symbol determination."

The first big winning hole 26 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the second special symbol determination. An opening/closing member 27, which is a plate for opening and closing the first large winning hole 26, is provided at the opening of the first large winning hole 26. The first big prize opening 26 is normally closed by this opening/closing member 27. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, a jackpot game is executed in which the opening/closing member 27 is operated to open the first jackpot opening 26. During this jackpot game, there are a plurality of long open round games in which the opening/closing member 27 maintains the open position (see FIG. 2) in which it opens the first jackpot 26 and then returns to the closed position in which it closes the first jackpot 26. It will be held twice. In addition, in this embodiment, each length open round game in which the first grand prize opening 26 is opened is played when 10 game balls enter the first grand prize opening 26 or the first grand prize opening 26 is opened. This continues until 25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the game (without 10 game balls entering the first big prize opening 26). In this way, during a jackpot game, a plurality of long open round games are performed in which the first jackpot 26 (or second jackpot 28) is opened long, so the player can play right-handed during a jackpot game. By playing the jackpot game, you can get more prize balls than when the jackpot game is not played.

The second big winning hole 28 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination). An opening/closing member 29, which is a blade member that opens and closes the second big winning hole 28, is provided at the opening of the second big winning hole 28. The second big prize opening 28 is normally closed by this opening/closing member 29. On the other hand, when the predetermined jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the opening/closing member 29 is operated to open the second major prize opening 28. A jackpot game is executed. During this jackpot game, a round game is played multiple times in which the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position (see FIG. 2) in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened and then returns to the closed position in which the second big prize opening 28 is closed. be exposed. The round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 7.

For convenience of explanation, FIG. 2 shows an example in which the opening/closing members 27 and 29 are in an open position to open the big prize openings 26 and 28 when the effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. Although the opening/closing members 27 and 29 are not in the open position during the fluctuating display of the performance symbols. In addition, in each round game in the jackpot game, either the first big winning hole 26 or the second big winning hole 28 is used, so in reality, these big winning holes are used at the same time as shown in FIG. It will never be released. Also, whether to play a jackpot game using both the first big winning hole 26 and the second big winning hole 28, or whether to play a jackpot game using only the second big winning hole 28 depends on the type of jackpot. are set in advance (see FIGS. 6(B) and (C)).

An opening/closing member 23 (see FIG. 2) is arranged close to the second starting port 22. The opening/closing member 23 can change its posture between a closed position in which the opening/closing member 23 closes the second starting port 22 and an open position (see FIG. 2) in which the opening/closing member 23 opens the second starting port 22.

The second starting port 22 is normally closed by an opening/closing member 23. On the other hand, when a game ball hit right by the player passes through the gate 25, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the second starting port 22, although the prize ball is not paid out. Here, if it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened, the opening/closing member 23 maintains the open position for a predetermined period of time and then returns to the closed position a specified number of times. In this way, when the opening/closing member 23 is not operating, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting port 22, but when the opening/closing member 23 is activated, the second starting port 22 is in a state where it is easy for the game ball to pass through. Become.

In addition, in the following explanation, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 25 will be referred to as "normal symbol determination."

The general winning hole 24 is always open like the first starting hole 21, and is a winning hole from which a predetermined number (5 in this embodiment) of prize balls are paid out when game balls win. However, unlike the first starting hole 21 and the like, even if a game ball wins in the general winning hole 24, no judgment is made.

[Example of configuration of main display 40]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. 2. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol pending display 44, and a second special symbol display 42. It is configured with a hold display 45, a normal figure hold display 46, a round display 47, a game status display 48, a firing direction indicator 49, and the like.

The first special symbol display 41 is configured with eight LEDs indicated by "i to p", and when the first special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the first special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the first special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, by sequentially lighting up the eight LEDs described above, a variable display of symbols is performed, and each LED is activated for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 The pattern is stopped and displayed by turning it on (seconds).

The second special symbol display 42 is configured with eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and when the second special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the second special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the second special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, by sequentially lighting up the eight LEDs mentioned above, a variable display of symbols is performed, and each LED is activated for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 The pattern is stopped and displayed by turning it on (seconds).

The first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol 42) displays a "jackpot" symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination). ``Symbols'' or ``Loss patterns'' that notify you of a loss are stopped and displayed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, a plurality of different jackpot symbols are prepared depending on the type of jackpot, and when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol is opened in the first jackpot 26 or A jackpot game is played in which the second jackpot opening 28 is opened.

The normal symbol display 43 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "s to t", and when a normal symbol determination is performed, it displays the symbols in a variable manner and then displays the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The determination result of the normal symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol. Specifically, for example, the above two LEDs are alternately lit to display a variable pattern, and each LED is turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a lighting mode according to the determination result of the normal symbol determination. By lighting it up, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state. Here, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 22 is opened by operating the opening/closing member 23 in an opening pattern according to the current game state.

In the following explanation, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 will be referred to as "special symbols," and the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 43 will be referred to as "normal symbols." shall be called. In addition, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as the "second special symbol". There may be a distinction.

The first special symbol reservation display 44 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "uv", and displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination according to the lighting mode of these LEDs. The second special symbol reservation display 45 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "w~x", and displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination according to the lighting mode of these LEDs. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reservations is set to "4". The normal symbol holding display 46 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "qr", and displays the number of pending normal symbol determinations depending on the lighting mode of these LEDs.

The round display 47 is used when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and in a jackpot game that is executed according to a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol. Displays the number of rounds indicating how many round games will be executed. In this embodiment, the round indicator 47 includes a 5R LED, a 7R LED, and a 9R LED, and the number of rounds is notified when any of these LEDs lights up. be done.

The gaming status display 48 is configured with three LEDs indicated by "a1 to a3", and displays the gaming status of the gaming machine 1 according to the lighting manner of these LEDs. The firing direction indicator 49 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "y to z", and displays the firing direction of the game ball depending on the lighting mode of these LEDs. That is, it displays whether the player should be hitting left-handed or right-handed.

[Example of configuration of presentation means included in gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game board 2 and the front frame 31 include a decorative member 13, a movable decorative member 14, a frame lamp 37, a speaker 38, a performance display device 125, A first performance special figure reservation display 126, a second performance special figure reservation display 127, etc. are provided. Further, an image display device 7 is provided behind the game board 2.

The decorative member 13 has a built-in panel lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) that includes a plurality of LEDs, and can change the lighting or blinking pattern of each LED, or change the emitted color of each LED. Various effects are created using light.

The movable decorative member 14 is arranged in front of the image display device 7 and behind the decorative member 13. This movable decorative member 14 has a plurality of LEDs built in, and the movable decorative member 14 performs a predetermined effect by the movement of the movable decorative member 14 itself and/or by light. In this embodiment, a predetermined space in which the movable decorative member 14 can operate is provided between the game board 2 and the display screen 70 of the image display device 7, and the movable decorative member 14 moves along the display screen 70. It is configured to be able to move up and down. The movable decorative member 14 is normally placed at an initial position (see FIG. 2), where most of the movable decorative member 14 is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the lower end of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. On the other hand, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern and displays the display screen 70 when the image display device 7 or the speaker 38 is used to execute a preview performance with relatively high jackpot reliability. It falls into a working position that covers most of the area.

The frame lamp 37 is configured with a plurality of LEDs built into various parts of the front frame 31, and the lighting and blinking pattern of each LED can be changed, and the emitted light color of each LED can be changed. Various effects are performed using light.

The image display device 7 is a liquid crystal display device that displays an effect image on its display screen 70, and the player can view the display screen 70 through an opening formed in the center of the game board 2. This display screen 70 includes performance symbols, characters and items that notify the judgment result of the special symbol judgment, and pending images (pending A performance image including various display objects such as a variation suggestion image (the icon) indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed. Note that the image display device 7 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another image display device such as an EL display device as long as it is capable of displaying an effect image.

The speaker 38 outputs performance sounds such as music, voices, and sound effects in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display performance performed on the display screen 70 to perform sound performance.

The performance display device 125 is configured with two LEDs, and displays the symbols in a variable manner as the special symbols and production symbols are displayed, and performs special symbol judgment as the special symbols and production symbols stop displaying. A symbol notifying the judgment result is displayed in a stopped state. This effect display 125 notifies the judgment result of the special symbol judgment by the combination of lighting/unlighting of each LED and the lighting color.

The performance first special figure holding display 126 is configured with two LEDs, and depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED, the same number as that displayed on the first special figure holding display 44 is displayed. 1 Displays the number of pending special symbol judgments. The production second special figure holding display 127 is configured with two LEDs, and depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED, the same number as that displayed on the second special figure holding display 45 is displayed. 2 Displays the number of pending special symbol judgments.

[Example of configuration of input means included in gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a first performance button 35 and a second performance button 36 as input means through which input can be made by the player. The first performance button 35 is a push button that is pressed by the player to input operation information. The second performance button 36 is a push button for the player to input operation information by grasping the grip part of the second performance button 36 and pushing the second performance button 36. In the gaming machine 1, a performance may be performed depending on the operation of the first performance button 35 or the second performance button 36.

Further, the first performance button 35 has a built-in first performance button lamp (not shown) configured with a plurality of color LEDs that cause the first performance button 35 to emit light, and the second performance button 36 has a built-in first performance button lamp (not shown) that causes the first performance button 35 to emit light. A second effect button lamp (not shown) configured with a plurality of color LEDs that causes the second effect button 36 to emit light is built-in. In the gaming machine 1, in order to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 35 during the valid period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid, the first effect button lamp changes to one of a plurality of emitting colors. It emits light in a luminous color. Further, the first performance button 35 has a built-in vibration motor 128 that is composed of an eccentric motor that vibrates the first performance button 35, and in the gaming machine 1, a performance pattern in a manner to notify a jackpot is displayed on the display screen 70. The jackpot is notified by the first effect button 35 vibrating as the first effect button 35 is displayed. In addition, the first production button 35 may vibrate during the above-mentioned validity period, immediately before the validity period starts, or immediately after the start of variable display of special symbols and production symbols. When the performance button 35 vibrates, the jackpot reliability is higher (the hit notification performance is more likely to be executed) than when the first performance button 35 does not vibrate. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1, in order to prompt the player to operate the second performance button 36 during the valid period in which the operation of the second performance button 36 is valid, the second performance button lamp 362 selects one of the plurality of emitting colors. Emit light in one of the following colors.

Note that the configuration of the input means is not limited to that exemplified in this embodiment, and may be other configurations. That is, for example, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the gaming machine 1 includes two input means, but the number of input means may be one or three or more. In addition, the input means is not limited to pushbuttons, but also includes touch panels that can detect the player's touch operations, optical sensors that can detect the player's hand held up against the display screen 70, and positions that can be adjusted by moving forward, backward, left, and right. Other input means may be used, such as a joystick for specifying a direction, or an operation means that can be held by the player to change the posture.

[Example of internal configuration of second prize opening 28]
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing control of the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287. An opening/closing member 29 (an example of a first opening/closing member) that opens and closes the second major winning opening 28 is provided at the opening of the second major winning opening 28 (an example of a special winning area) (FIGS. 1 and 4). (See (A)). In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 4(A) to (C), inside the second big winning hole 28, a second big winning hole sensor 281, a V winning hole sensor 283, a discharge sensor 284, a slide member 285 (an example of a second opening/closing member), etc. are provided.

The second big prize opening sensor 281 detects the game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 28, and in this embodiment, every time a game ball passes through the second big prize opening switch 281, 15 game balls are detected. The prize ball is paid out. The V winning hole switch 283 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 287 (an example of a specific area) divided by the V winning hole switch 283. The ejection switch 284 detects passage of the game ball to the ejection port defined by the ejection switch 284. The slide member 285 guides the game ball that has passed through the second large winning hole sensor 281 to the V winning hole 287 or the discharge port, and is configured to be slidable in the left and right direction in FIG. 4(A) and (B) illustrate a state in which the slide member 285 is placed at the right position that closes the V winning hole 287, and FIGS. A state where it is placed at the left position where the V winning opening 287 is opened is illustrated.

When a jackpot game is not being played or during a long open round game in which the first jackpot 26 is opened long, the second jackpot 28 is closed by the opening/closing member 29, and the V winning slot 287 is closed. It is closed by a slide member 285 (see FIG. 4(A)). On the other hand, in a round game in which the second big winning hole 28 is opened and closed, the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 can be in the following state.

Specifically, in a round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIG. In addition, the slide member 285 may be placed in the right position and the V winning opening 287 may be in a closed state. In this case, although the second grand prize opening 28 has changed from the difficult-to-enter state where it is difficult for game balls to enter to the easy-to-enter state where it is easy for the game ball to enter, since the V winning opening 287 is blocked by the slide member 285, The game ball that has entered the second large winning hole 28 does not pass through the V winning hole 287, but passes through the discharge sensor 284.

In addition, in a round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIG. , the slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position, and the V winning opening 287 may be in an open state. In this case, since the second grand prize opening 28 has changed to the easy-to-enter state and the V prize opening 287 is open, the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 28 is (that is, detected by the V winning a prize opening sensor 283).

The V winning hole sensor 283 functions as a so-called probability change switch, and as mentioned above, when the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are both open, the game ball wins a V prize. In the case (the game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283), after the jackpot game in which the V winning prize has been completed, the game will be controlled in a "probability variable gaming state" which will be described later. On the other hand, if the game ball does not win a V prize when both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are in the open state, after the jackpot game ends, the "time saving game state" described later is entered. The game will be controlled by In addition, when either the second big winning hole 28 or the V winning hole 287 is in a closed state (in the state illustrated in FIG. 4(B) or FIG. 4(D)), Basically, the game ball will not win a V prize, so similarly, after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in the "time-saving game state".

In addition, in a round game in which both the second grand prize opening 28 and the V winning hole 287 are opened for a long time for the game ball to easily enter the second grand prize opening 28 and pass through the V winning hole 287. There are valid round games in which a validity period is set during which V winnings are valid, and non-valid round games in which V winnings are not valid (validity period is not set). Therefore, if the V-winning hole sensor 283 detects a game ball during a valid round game, the game is controlled in the "probable variable gaming state" after the jackpot game ends, but the V-winning hole sensor 283 detects a game ball during a valid round game. Even if the mouth sensor 283 detects a game ball, the game will not be controlled in the "probability-variable game state" after the jackpot game ends, subject to this detection.

In addition, in a round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIG. 4(D), the opening/closing member 29 is not operating, so the second big prize opening 28 is in a closed state. , and the slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position and the V winning opening 287 may be in an open state. In this case, although the V winning hole 287 is open, the second big winning hole 28 is in a state where it is difficult to enter, so the game ball does not enter into the second big winning hole 28.

In addition, in the transparent member provided at the position corresponding to the area in which the second big winning hole sensor 281, V winning hole sensor 283, discharge port sensor 284, slide member 285, etc. are included, it corresponds to the V winning hole sensor 283. The letter "V" is written in the position shown in Figure 2. Therefore, the player can easily identify the position of the V winning hole sensor 283 (the position of the V winning hole 287) by looking at the letter "V".

[Configuration of control device included in gaming machine 1]
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.
A control device for controlling the operation of the gaming machine 1 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2. As illustrated in FIG. 5, the control device of the gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 that controls the progress of games using game balls, and a subsystem that centrally controls the performance based on information from the main control board 80. It is comprised of a control board 90, an image and sound control board 100 that controls effects using images and sounds, a lamp control board 120 that controls effects using various lamps and movable members, and the like. In this embodiment, the main control board 80 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 90, the image and sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 function as a performance control unit that controls the performance. . Note that the configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-control board 90, the image-acoustic control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 may be configured as one board.

<Example of configuration of main control board 80>
The main control board 80 includes a main CPU 81, a main ROM 82, and a main RAM 83. The main CPU 81 performs various calculation processes related to determination and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on programs stored in the main ROM 82 and the like. The main RAM 83 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 81 executes the above programs, and as a work area for data processing.

The main control board 80 includes a first starting hole sensor 211, a second starting hole sensor 221, a gate sensor 251, a first big winning hole sensor 261, a second big winning hole sensor 281, a V winning hole sensor 283, and a discharge port sensor. 284, general winning hole sensor 241, second starting hole solenoid 222, first big winning hole solenoid 262, second big winning hole solenoid 282, and V winning hole solenoid 286 are connected. Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes four general winning opening sensors 241 corresponding to the four general winning openings 24, but in FIG. 5, for convenience of explanation, only one general winning opening sensor 241 is provided. It is written.

The first starting port sensor 211 detects that a game ball has entered the first starting port 21 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The second starting port sensor 221 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 22 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The gate sensor 251 detects passage of a game ball to the gate 25 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The first big winning hole sensor 261 detects that a game ball has won in the first big winning hole 26, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The second big winning hole sensor 281 detects that a game ball has won in the second big winning hole 28, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The V winning hole sensor 283 detects passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 287 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The discharge port sensor 284 detects passage of a game ball to the discharge port and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The general winning hole sensor 241 detects that a game ball has won in the general winning hole 24, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80.

The second starting port solenoid 222 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 23 so as to be able to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 23 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to perform the second starting. The mouth 22 is opened and closed. The first big prize opening solenoid 262 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 27 so as to be able to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 27 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to The big prize opening 26 is opened and closed. The second big prize opening solenoid 282 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 29 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 29 based on the control signal from the main control board 80. The grand prize opening 28 is opened and closed. The V winning opening solenoid 286 is an electric solenoid connected to the sliding member 285 so as to be able to transmit driving force, and operates the sliding member 285 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to open the V winning opening 287. Open and close.

Although not shown in the figure, the game machine 1 supplies game balls to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34 by controlling a drive motor that sends game balls from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2. Equipped with a payout control board. When the main CPU 81 receives a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 211, the second starting hole sensor 221, the first big winning hole sensor 261, the second big winning hole sensor 281, or the general winning hole sensor 241, The payout control board is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game balls have won, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on information from the payout control board.

Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 211 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 221 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Here, the various random numbers are specifically jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuating pattern random numbers.

The jackpot random number is a random number for determining jackpot or loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game, etc.) when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform a reach effect or a no reach effect when it is determined that the game is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The main CPU 81 acquires these random numbers at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22), and first, the acquired jackpot random number is converted into a predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not the value matches the numerical value (winning value), it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Here, if it is determined to execute a jackpot game based on the jackpot random number matching the winning value, the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82 (compared with the symbol random number). ) The type of jackpot is determined based on which random number of predetermined random numbers matches. The types of jackpots will be detailed later based on FIGS. 6(B) and (C).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines not to execute the jackpot game based on the fact that the obtained jackpot random number does not match the winning value, the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not the random number matches a predetermined random number (compared with a reach random number), it is determined whether to perform a reach effect or a no reach effect. In addition, the main CPU 81 determines a variation pattern of the special symbol when displaying the special symbol in a variable manner, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, regardless of the result of the determination based on the jackpot random number. This will determine the variation time of the special symbol.

When the main CPU 81 determines to execute the jackpot game and determines the type of jackpot, the main CPU 81 controls the opening and closing of the first jackpot 26 via the first jackpot solenoid 262 according to the jackpot type; By controlling the opening and closing of the second big winning hole 28 via the second big winning hole solenoid 282 and controlling the opening and closing of the V winning hole 287 via the V winning hole solenoid 286, a jackpot game according to the type of jackpot can be played. Execute.

Further, the main CPU 81 acquires a random number (normal symbol random number) at the timing when the detection signal from the gate sensor 251 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired normal symbol random number. If it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened as a result of this normal symbol determination, the second starting port 22 is opened by controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 22 via the second starting port solenoid 222. Execute the auxiliary game.

The main control board 80 also includes a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol pending display 44, a second special symbol pending display 45, and a normal symbol display 43. A figure holding display 46, a round display 47, a game status display 48, and a firing direction display 49 are connected.

The main CPU 81 controls these displays 41 to 49 forming the main display 40 to execute the display processing described above based on FIG. 3.

<Configuration example of sub-control board 90>
The sub control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91 , a sub ROM 92 , a sub RAM 93 , and an RTC (real time clock) 94 . The sub CPU 91 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effects based on a program stored in the sub ROM 92. The sub RAM 93 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 91 executes the above programs, and as a work area for data processing. The RTC 94 measures the current date and time (date and time).

A first effect button detection sensor 96 and a second effect button detection sensor 97 are connected to the sub control board 90. The first performance button detection sensor 96 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating this to the sub-control board 90 when the first performance button 35 (see FIG. 1) is operated. The second performance button detection sensor 97 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating this to the sub-control board 90 when the second performance button 36 (see FIG. 1) is operated.

The sub CPU 91 sets performance contents based on game information regarding special symbol determination, normal symbol determination, jackpot game, etc. transmitted from the main control board 80. At this time, input of operation information from the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 may be accepted, and the effect contents may be set in accordance with the operation information. The sub CPU 91 transmits a command to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 to instruct execution of the set performance contents.

<Configuration example of image sound control board 100>
The image and sound control board 100 controls the image display by the image display device 7 and the output of sound effects by the speaker 38. In this embodiment, the image and sound control board 100 includes an image and sound control CPU 101, a control ROM 102, a control RAM 103, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 104, a CGROM 105, a VRAM 106, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 107, Audio ROM108, SDRAM109, and an amplifier 110.

The control ROM 102 is composed of a mask ROM, and stores various tables such as a control program for the image-acoustic control CPU 101, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and a display list generation table used in the process of generating a display list. is memorized. Here, the display list consists of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing in frame units, including the type of image to draw, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The control RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the image-acoustic control CPU 101 executes the control program, and as a work area for data processing.

The image sound control CPU 101 transmits the image data stored in the CGROM 105 to the VDP 104 to the image display device 7 based on the control program, various tables such as the display list creation table, commands received from the sub-control board 90, etc. Give instructions to display on the screen. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list. Further, the image sound control CPU 101 instructs the sound DSP 107 to output sound data stored in the sound ROM 108 from the speaker 38.

The CGROM 105 stores performance data necessary for executing variable performances associated with variable display of special symbols, performances associated with jackpot games, and the like. This CGROM 105 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and includes sprite data (one image data) consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 x 32 pixels), and a plurality of image data. It compresses and stores movie data, etc. consisting of a collection of files. Note that the pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 105 stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying the color.

Note that only part of the image data stored in the CGROM 105 may be compressed. Further, as a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 106 is composed of an SRAM that can write and read image data at high speed, and although not shown in the figure, it is composed of a display list storage area, an expansion storage area, a frame buffer, etc. ing.

The display list storage area is for temporarily storing the display list output from the image and sound control CPU 101. The expansion storage area stores image data that has been read out from the CGROM 105 and expanded. The frame buffer is used for drawing and displaying image data displayed on the display screen 70.

The VDP 104 expands the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 105 and stores the expanded image data in an expanded storage area. Further, the VDP 104 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer based on the display list stored in the display list storage area, using the image data stored in the expansion storage area. Further, the VDP 104 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the image display device 7.

An audio ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110 are connected to the audio DSP 107. The audio ROM 108 stores various types of audio data regarding songs, voices, sound effects, warning sounds, and the like. The SDRAM 109 is used as a work area for data processing, etc. by the audio DSP 107. The audio DSP 107 reads audio data corresponding to an instruction from the image audio control CPU 101 from the audio ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109, executes data processing, and outputs the audio data after data processing to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). The amplifier 110 adjusts the volume according to an instruction regarding the volume obtained from the image sound control CPU 101 via the audio DSP 107 and causes the speaker 38 to output audio data.

Note that in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the audio DSP is responsible for sound management, but in other embodiments, a configuration in which the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management is adopted. You may. In this case, there is no need to separately provide an audio DSP.

<Configuration example of lamp control board 120>
The lamp control board 120 includes a lamp CPU 121, a lamp ROM 122, and a lamp RAM 123. A figure hold display 127 and a vibration motor 128 are connected. The lamp ROM 122 stores programs executed by the lamp CPU 121, light emission pattern data, operation pattern data, and the like. Here, the light emitting pattern data is built in the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5 (including a first light emitting group 511, a second light emitting group 512, and a third light emitting group 523, which will be described later based on FIG. 28), and the movable decorative member 14. This is data showing the respective light emission patterns of the LED, the first effect button lamp built into the first effect button 35, the second effect button lamp built into the second effect button 36, etc. The motion pattern data is data indicating a motion pattern of the movable decorative member 14 and the like. The vibration pattern data is data indicating the vibration pattern of the first effect button 35 that vibrates due to the driving force of the vibration motor 128 (the drive pattern of the vibration motor 128).

Based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 122, the lamp CPU 121 displays the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the production display 125, the production first special figure reservation display 126, and the production second special figure reservation. Performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operations of the display 127, vibration motor 128, etc.

The lamp CPU 121 reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from among the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 to the lamp RAM 123, and reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 to the lamp RAM 123, and reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub control board 90, It controls the light emission of an LED built into the LED 14, a first effect button lamp built into the first effect button 35, a second effect button lamp built into the second effect button 36, etc. The lamp CPU 121 also reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from among the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 to the lamp RAM 123, and controls the motor for operating the movable decorative member 14. Control the drive. Further, the lamp CPU 121 reads vibration pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from among the vibration pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 to the lamp RAM 123, and controls the drive of the vibration motor 128.

Further, the lamp CPU 121 controls the variable display and static display of symbols on the effect display 125 based on commands from the sub-control board 90. In addition, based on the command from the sub-control board 90, the lamp CPU 121 displays the number of reservations related to the first special symbol determination on the performance first special symbol reservation display 126, and displays the number of reservations related to the first special symbol determination on the performance second special symbol reservation display 127. 2. Controls the display of the number of reservations related to special symbol determination.

[About gaming status]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is controlled in one of three gaming states: "normal gaming state", "variable probability gaming state", and "time-saving gaming state".

In the "normal game state", special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state where the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively low, and a support function (so-called This is a gaming state (low-probability, low-base state) in which a function called "Electric Support" etc.) is not provided. In the normal game state, the probability that a jackpot game will be executed based on the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/160) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively long time (for example, 20 seconds). , and when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds x 1 time).

"Probability variable gaming state" is a gaming state (high probability high base state) in which special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state where the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively high, and the above support function is provided. be. That is, in the variable probability game state, the probability of determining that a jackpot game will be executed by special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/60) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second starting port 22 when it is determined to open the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

The "time saving gaming state" is a gaming state (low probability high base state) in which special symbol determination is performed in the above-mentioned low probability state and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the time-saving game state, the probability of determining that a jackpot game will be executed by special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/160). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

Comparing these gaming states regarding the variation time of special symbols, we find that the variation time of special symbols in the "probable variable gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" is relatively longer than that in the "normal gaming state". It is easy to set it to a short period of time. In addition, as shown in the explanation of each game state, the probability that it will be determined that a special game will be executed (jackpot probability), the probability that it will be determined that the second starting port 22 will be opened (probability of winning in normal symbol determination), and the fluctuation of normal symbols. It goes without saying that the time and the opening time of the second starting port 22 are merely examples, and other probabilities and times may be used.

In addition, in the following explanation, the state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 22 because the support function is provided will be referred to as the "high base state", and the state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 22 because the support function is not provided will be referred to as the "high base state". A state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 22 is referred to as a "low base state."

[Game flow]
A game ball hit to the right by a player may not win a prize in the first starting hole 21 but can win a prize in the second starting hole 22. However, in the low base state, the second starting port 22 is difficult to open, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a low base state (which corresponds to the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment), the player plays the game by hitting the left hand aiming at the first starting opening 21. Become.

When a game ball hit to the left enters the first starting slot 21 during the normal gaming state, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed. As the first special symbol shown, a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, if the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game will not be played and the gaming state will not change. On the other hand, when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which a predetermined number of round games are played according to the jackpot symbol is executed, and after the jackpot game is finished, a "probable variable game state" or a "time-saving game" is executed. The game will be controlled by the state.

In addition, when the gaming state shifts to the "probability variable gaming state" or "time-saving gaming state" triggered by the end of the jackpot game, that is, when the gaming state shifts from the low base state to the high base state, the game ball to the second starting port 22 Due to the above-mentioned support function that makes it easier to win a prize, it is easier to win a game ball in the second starting hole 22 than in the first starting hole 21. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a high base state, the player plays the game by hitting the ball to the right, aiming at the second starting opening 22. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state or the time saving game state, the second special symbol determination is basically performed.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol in the variable probability game state or the time saving game state, after the jackpot game ends, the game is basically controlled in the variable probability game state. On the other hand, if a jackpot cannot be won in the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the gaming state is returned from the variable probability gaming state (or the time saving gaming state) to the normal gaming state.

[About special symbol determination using random numbers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a determination process using jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers will be described. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers. Note that in the explanatory diagrams for each random number illustrated in FIG. 6 and subsequent figures, the possible range of the random number is set to be smaller than the actual range in order to facilitate explanation.

<Processing based on jackpot random numbers>
The jackpot random numbers illustrated in FIG. 6(A) are random numbers used in the jackpot determination process (step S308 in FIG. 42) to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the probability that it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed is Each of a low probability state where the probability is relatively low and a high probability state where the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively high are individually set.

In this embodiment, six winning values regarding the low probability state are stored in the main ROM 82, and the main CPU 81 stores the winning values in the low probability state (in this embodiment, the "normal gaming state" and the "time saving gaming state" correspond to this). ), when the acquired jackpot random number matches any of these six winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed. In addition, regarding the high probability state (in this embodiment, the "variable probability gaming state" corresponds to this), 16 winning values are stored in the main ROM 82, and when the game is controlled in the high probability state, the 16 winning values can be acquired. If the jackpot random number matches any of these 16 winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number can take on 960 values from "0" to "959" in both the low probability state and the high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/160 (=6/960), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/60 (=16/960).

<Processing based on pattern random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game, the main CPU 81 determines which random number among the random numbers set in advance for each type of jackpot matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the judgment. Determine the type of jackpot based on. In other words, the first special symbol (second special symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42) as the jackpot symbol is selected.

(Types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6(B), in this embodiment, the types of jackpots due to winnings from the first starting opening (in the normal gaming state) are "5R probability variation A", "5R probability variation B", and "5R normal A". ”, and “5R Normal B” are available.

Here, "5R probability variation A" (see FIG. 6(B)) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five round games in which the second jackpot 28 is opened and closed is executed. If you win this "5R probability change A", both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are controlled to be open, and the validity period during which the V winning of the game ball to the V winning hole 287 is valid is A jackpot game including a set valid round game (see "1R" in FIG. 7(A)) is executed, and the passage of a game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283 during this valid round game. , After the end of the jackpot game, the game is controlled in the "probability variable game state".

“5R Probability Variable B” (see FIG. 6(B)) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five round games of opening and closing the second jackpot 28 is executed. If this "5R fixed variable B" is won, a jackpot game including a valid round game (see "3R" in FIG. 7(B)) will be executed in the same way as in the case of winning "5R fixed variable A", and this valid round After the end of the jackpot game, the game is controlled in the "probability variable game state" on the condition that the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283 during the game.

“5R Normal A” (see FIG. 6(B)) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five round games in which the second jackpot 28 is opened and closed is executed. If this "5R normal A" is won, a jackpot game that does not include a valid round game but includes an ineffective round game (see "2R" and "4R" in FIG. 7(C)) is executed. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 287 during an ineffective round game, it will not result in a V winning prize, and after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in the "time saving game state".

"5R Normal B" (see FIG. 6(B)) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five round games in which the second jackpot 28 is opened and closed is executed. If this "5R normal B" is won, the same as the case where "5R normal A" is won, it does not include a valid round game and is an ineffective round game (see "2R" and "4R" in Figure 7 (D)) A jackpot game including the following is executed. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 287 during an ineffective round game, it will not result in a V winning prize, and after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in the "time saving game state".

As is clear from the notations in FIGS. 7(A) to (D), in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "5R probability variable A", "5R No matter which jackpot you get, "Probable Variable B", "5R Normal A", or "5R Normal B", the second grand prize opening 28 is kept open for a long time (for the time when 10 game balls can easily win). A round game is executed twice. Therefore, all of these four types of jackpots are essentially two-round (2R) jackpots in which two rounds worth of prize balls (300 balls = 15 balls x 10 counts x 2R) can be won.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game and selects "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B" as the type of jackpot, the main CPU 81 (second The opening/closing member 29 and slide member 285 are operated (via the grand prize opening solenoid 282 and the V prize opening solenoid 286) to open the second grand prize opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 so that the game ball can easily pass through. It is possible to execute a plurality of round games including an effective round game (specific round game).

As illustrated in FIG. 6(B), in this embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random value for determining the type of jackpot is stored in the main ROM 82. ing. Specifically, 30 random numbers are stored for "5R fixed variation A," 30 random numbers are stored for "5R fixed variation B," and 20 random numbers are stored for "5R normal A." Random numbers are stored, and 20 random numbers are stored for "5R normal B".

In this embodiment, the possible range of the pattern random number is set to "0" to "99", and the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 21. If it is determined, "5R probability variation A" is selected at a rate of 30% (=30/100 x 100) as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, and "5R probability variation B" is selected at a rate of 30% (=30 /100×100), “5R normal A” was selected at a rate of 20% (=20/100×100), and “5R normal B” was selected at a rate of 20% (=20/100×100). It is selected based on the ratio (see FIG. 6(B)).

Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol X1 indicating "5R probability variation A" will be the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 at a rate of 30%. The jackpot symbol X2 indicating "5R Probable Variable B" is selected at a rate of 30%, the jackpot symbol X3 indicating "5R Normal A" is selected at a rate of 20%, and the jackpot symbol indicating "5R Normal B" is selected. X4 is selected at a rate of 20%.

(Type of jackpot related to second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6(C), in this embodiment, the types of jackpots due to the second starting opening winning (in the probability-variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state) are "5R probability-variable", "7R probability-variable", and " There are three types of jackpots available: 9R Probability.

Here, "5R probability change" (see FIG. 6(C)) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five round games in which the second jackpot 28 is opened and closed is executed. If this "5R probability change" is won, a jackpot game including a valid round game is executed, and on the condition that the passing of a game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283 during this valid round game, after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the game is controlled in a "variable probability gaming state". In addition, in the case of this "5R definite change", including the above-mentioned effective round game, a round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened for a long time (as long as the time when 10 game balls can easily win) will be executed 5 times. be done. Therefore, the "5R probability change" related to the second special symbol determination is essentially a 5-round (5R) jackpot in which you can win 5 rounds worth of prize balls (750 balls = 15 balls x 10 counts x 5Rs).

"7R Definite Change" (see Figure 6(C)) is a total of 7 rounds including 5 round games in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed, and 2 round games in which the first big prize winning hole 26 is opened and closed. This is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game including a round game is executed. If this "7R probability change" is won, the above valid round game using the second big winning hole 28 is executed, and the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283 during this valid round game. , After the end of the jackpot game, the game is controlled in the "probability variable game state". In addition, in the case of this "7R definite change", including the effective round game mentioned above, a round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened for a long time (as long as the time when 10 game balls can easily win) will be executed 5 times. In addition, a long open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is opened for a long time (as long as the time when 10 game balls can easily win) is executed twice. Therefore, the "7R fixed variation" related to the second special symbol determination is essentially a 7-round (7R) jackpot where you can get 7 rounds worth of prize balls (1050 pieces = 15 pieces x 10 counts x (5R + 2R)). .

“9R Definite Change” (see FIG. 6(C)) is a total of 9 rounds including 5 round games in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed, and 4 round games in which the first big winning opening 26 is opened and closed. This is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game including a round game is executed. If this "9R probability change" is won, the above valid round game using the second big winning hole 28 is executed, and the passing of the game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283 during this valid round game. , After the end of the jackpot game, the game is controlled in the "probability variable game state". In addition, in the case of this "9R definite change", including the above-mentioned effective round game, a round game in which the second grand prize opening 28 is opened for a long time (as long as the time when 10 game balls can easily win) will be executed 5 times. In addition, a long open round game is executed four times in which the first large prize opening 26 is opened for a long time (as long as the time during which 10 game balls can easily win). Therefore, "9R Definite Change" related to the second special symbol determination is essentially a nine-round (9R) jackpot where you can get nine rounds worth of prize balls (1350 pieces = 15 pieces x 10 counts x (5R + 4R)). .

As illustrated in FIG. 6(C), in this embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random value for determining the type of jackpot is stored in the main ROM 82. ing. Specifically, 25 random numbers are stored for "5R probability variation," 30 random numbers are stored for "7R probability variation," and 45 random numbers are stored for "9R probability variation." remembered.

In the present embodiment, the possible range of the random symbol numbers related to the second special symbol determination is the same as the possible range of the random symbol numbers related to the first special symbol determination, and it is assumed that the game ball enters the second starting hole 22. When a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number obtained in accordance with , “7R probability variation” is selected at a rate of 30% (=30/100×100), and “9R probability variation” is selected at a rate of 45% (=45/100×100).

Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol Y1 indicating "5R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 25% as the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42. Then, the jackpot symbol Y2 indicating "7R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 30%, and the jackpot symbol Y3 indicating "9R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 45%.

<Processing based on reach random number>
When the main CPU 81 determines not to execute a jackpot game, whether the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination is a random value corresponding to a reach effect or a random value corresponding to a reach effect. Based on whether it matches the random value of , it is determined whether to perform a reach effect or a reach effect without a reach effect. Here, the ready-to-reach performance is a performance that notifies you of a win or loss (determination result of special symbol determination) by a ready-to-win performance that is executed in a state where a reach based on the performance symbols is established. On the other hand, a no-reach performance is a performance in which this reach performance is not performed, and is basically a performance in which a "big win" is not reported, but a "loss" is reported.

In this embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores 10 random numbers for the reach effect, and the main CPU 81, when the obtained reach random number matches any of these 10 random numbers, Decided to perform a reach performance. In addition, 90 random numbers are stored for the no-reach performance, and if the obtained reach random number matches any of these 90 random numbers, the main CPU 81 performs the no-reach performance. decide. In this embodiment, the possible range of the reach random number is set to "0" to "99", and when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, the ratio of the reach effect is 10% (=10/ 100×100), and the percentage of no reach effect (proportion of non-reach effect) is 90% (=90/100×100).

When the main CPU 81 determines to perform the ready-to-reach presentation, the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern in which a variation presentation pattern of presentation symbols accompanied by a ready-to-reach presentation is selected by the sub-control board 90 as a special symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, when it is decided to perform a no-reach performance, a variation pattern is selected as a special symbol variation pattern in which a variation performance pattern of performance symbols without a reach performance is selected by the sub-control board 90.

[About the jackpot game that is executed depending on the first win]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 7, a jackpot game that is executed when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment becomes "jackpot" when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state will be explained. Here, FIG. 7 is a time chart for explaining the jackpot game.

<5R fixed variable A jackpot game>
When winning the 5R probability variation A described above based on FIG. 6(B), a 5R jackpot game using the second jackpot 28 is executed in the manner illustrated in FIG. 7(A). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7(A), in the 1R round game, the second grand prize opening 28 is open for 0.1 seconds, closed for 0.1 seconds, and closed for 10 seconds. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so that the state changes in the order of the open state. Along with this, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning hole 287 changes its state in the following order: an open state for 0.1 seconds, a closed state for 0.1 seconds, and an open state for 10 seconds.

In this way, in the 1st round game of 5R fixed variation A, both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are opened long, so the player can open the V winning hole by simply hitting right. It is possible to easily allow the game ball to pass through the sensor 283. In addition, the operation of the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 in the 1R round game illustrated in FIG. This continues until 10 seconds have elapsed or the passage of 10 game balls is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 281 after the 1Rth round game is started.

Next, in the 2nd round game of 5R probability variation A, as illustrated in FIG. Thus, the operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled. On the other hand, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled such that the V winning a prize opening 287 is in the open state for only 0.1 second, then returns to the closed state and maintains that state. In this way, in the 2nd round game of 5R probability variation A, while the second grand prize opening 28 is kept open for a long time, the V winning opening 287 changes to the open state for only 0.1 seconds, so the player While it is possible to easily win the game ball into the second grand prize opening 28 by hitting to the right, the game ball enters the second major prize opening 28 until it reaches the V winning hole 287. Since it takes 0.1 seconds or more to pass the game ball through the V winning a prize opening sensor 283, it is impossible. Note that the conditions for ending the 2nd round game are the same as the ending conditions for the 1st round game.

Subsequently, in the 3rd round game of 5R probability variation A, as illustrated in FIG. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain this state. On the other hand, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning hole 287 undergoes the same state change as when the 1R round game is being played. In this way, in the 3rd round game of 5R probability variation A, the V winning hole 287 is kept open for a long time, while the second big winning hole 28 changes to the open state for only 0.1 seconds. For this reason, it is extremely difficult for the player to win the game ball into the second grand prize opening 28 even if the player hits the ball right-handed.

Subsequently, in the 3rd round game of 5R probability variation A, as illustrated in FIG. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain this state. On the other hand, the slide member 285 does not operate, and the V winning hole 287 does not change to the open state. In this way, in the 3rd round game of 5R probability variation A, the second grand prize opening 28 changes to the open state for only 0.1 seconds, so even if the player hits right, the second grand prize opening 28 It is extremely difficult to win a game ball in 28.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, during the 1R round game and during the 3R round game, the game ball to the V winning hole 287 is The validity period during which the V winnings are valid is set (see Figures 7 (A) to (D)), and during other round games (during the 2nd round game, 4th round game, and 5th round game). (during a round game), no validity period is set. Therefore, even if the passage of a game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283 during another round game, based on this detection, the game will be controlled in the "probability variable game state" after the jackpot game ends. There isn't.

In the jackpot game related to 5R probability variation A, the 1Rth round game is the effective round game. In addition, in the 2nd round game, although the second grand prize opening 28 is opened for a long time, the V prize opening 287 is only opened for 0.1 seconds and it is not even during the validity period, so there is no money in the second grand prize opening 28. The game ball that enters the game will not win the V prize. Also, during the 3rd round game, although the V winning is valid, the second grand prize opening 28 is only open for 0.1 seconds, so the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28. The possibility is extremely low, and since the V winning hole 287 is once closed almost at the same time as the second big winning hole 28 is closed, even if the game ball enters the second big winning hole 28, That game ball will never win a prize. In addition, in the 4th round game and the 5th round game, the second grand prize opening 28 is opened for only 0.1 seconds, and the V winning opening 287 does not change to the open state, so the game ball will never win the V prize.

<5R fixed variable B jackpot game>
When winning the 5R probability variable B described above based on FIG. 6(B), a 5R jackpot game using the second jackpot 28 is executed in the manner illustrated in FIG. 7(B). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7(B), in the 1st round game, the second grand prize opening 28 changes to the open state for 0.1 seconds, returns to the closed state, and then returns to the closed state. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled to maintain this state. Along with this, similar to the 1st round game of 5R fixed variation A, the V winning hole 287 changes state in the following order: open state for 0.1 seconds, closed state for 0.1 seconds, and open state for 10 seconds. Thus, the movement of the slide member 285 is controlled.

In the 1st round game of 5R Probable Variable B, the V winning hole 287 is open for a long time, and although the validity period is set for the V winning to be valid, the second big winning hole 28 is only open for 0.1 seconds. Therefore, the possibility of the game ball entering the second grand prize opening 28 is extremely low. In addition, since the V winning hole 287 is temporarily closed almost at the same time as the second big winning hole 28 is closed, even if the game ball enters the second big winning hole 28, the game ball will win the V prize. There's nothing to do.

Next, in the 2nd round game of 5R probability variation B, as illustrated in FIG. 7(B), the second grand prize opening 28 remains open for 10 seconds and then returns to the closed state. , the operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled. On the other hand, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled such that the V winning a prize opening 287 is in the open state for only 0.1 second, then returns to the closed state and maintains that state. In this way, in the 2nd round game of 5R probability variable B, while the second grand prize opening 28 is left open for a long time, the V prize opening 287 changes to the open state for only 0.1 seconds, so the player While it is possible to easily win a game ball into the second big winning hole 28 by hitting right, it is impossible to let the game ball pass through the V winning hole sensor 283. In addition, in this 2R round game, the number of game balls detected by the second big winning hole sensor 281 reaches 10 before 10 seconds have passed since the second big winning hole 28 changed to the open state. When it reaches, the 2R round game ends at that point, and the opening/closing member 29 returns to the initial position of closing the second big prize opening 28.

Subsequently, in the 3rd round game of 5R fixed variation B, the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 are controlled in the same way as the 1st round game of 5R fixed variation A, and the V winning of the game ball is activated. This is a valid round game set in a period. Therefore, the player can easily cause the game ball to pass through the V winning hole sensor 283 by simply hitting the ball to the right. Note that the termination conditions for the 3rd round game of the 5R probability variation B are the same as the termination conditions for the 1Rth round game of the 5R probability variation A (see FIG. 7(A)).

In the jackpot game related to 5R probability variation B (see FIG. 7(B)), the 3rd round game is the effective round game, and the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 28 can easily win a V prize. In addition, during the 1R round game, the V winning hole 287 is opened for a long time, and although the validity period is set, the second big winning hole 28 is only opened for 0.1 seconds, so the game ball is You won't win any prizes. In addition, in the 2nd round game, although the second grand prize opening 28 is opened for a long time, the V prize opening 287 is only opened for 0.1 seconds, and since it is not within the validity period, the game ball enters the V prize. Never. In addition, in the 4th round game and the 5th round game, the second grand prize opening 28 is opened for only 0.1 seconds, and the V winning opening 287 does not change to the open state, so the game ball will never win the V prize.

<5R normal A jackpot game>
When winning the 5R normal A described above based on FIG. 6(B), a 5R jackpot game using the second jackpot 28 is executed in the manner illustrated in FIG. 7(C). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7(C), in the 1R round game, the second grand prize opening 28 changes to the open state for 0.1 seconds, returns to the closed state, and then returns to the closed state. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled to maintain this state. Accordingly, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning a prize opening 287 changes to the open state for 0.1 seconds, then returns to the closed state and maintains that state.

During the 1st round game of 5R regular A, similar to the 1st round game of 5R fixed variation A and the 1st round game of 5R fixed variation B, the V prize of the game ball is valid during the valid period. However, during the 1st round game of 5R normal A, both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are opened for only 0.1 seconds, so the game ball does not win a V prize.

Next, in the 2nd round game of 5R normal A, as illustrated in FIG. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 (and sliding member 285) is controlled so as to return to the closed state. Therefore, although it is possible for the player to easily win the game ball into the second big prize opening 28 by hitting right, in this 2R round game, the V winning of the game ball is not effective. Since it is the above-mentioned ineffective round game, the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283, but the game is not controlled in the "probability variable game state" after the jackpot game ends.

Subsequently, in the 3rd round game of 5R normal A, as illustrated in FIG. 7(C), the second grand prize opening 28 changes to the open state for 0.1 seconds and then returns to the closed state. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain this state. Accordingly, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning hole 287 changes its state in the following order: open state for 0.1 seconds, closed state for 0.1 seconds, and open state for 0.1 seconds. Ru. During this 3rd round game, although the V winning of the game ball is valid during the valid period, the second grand prize opening 28 is only open for 0.1 seconds, so the game ball does not enter the second grand prize opening 28. The possibility of the game ball entering the V winning hole 287 is extremely low, and even if it enters the second big winning hole 28, the game ball will not pass through the V winning hole 287.

Subsequently, in the 4th round game of 5R normal A, as illustrated in FIG. be done.

Subsequently, in the 5R 5th round game of 5R normal A, as illustrated in FIG. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so that the state changes in the following order: an open state for 0.1 seconds, a closed state for 0.1 seconds, and an open state for 0.1 seconds. During the 5R round game of 5R normal A, it is not during the validity period in which the V winning of the game ball is valid, and the V winning opening 287 does not change to the open state, so the game ball is not in the valid period. V won't win.

As is clear from the explanation so far, the 5R normal A jackpot game does not include an effective round game. Therefore, the game ball will not win a V prize during the 5R normal A jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in the "normal game state".

<5R normal B jackpot game>
If the above-described 5R normal B is won based on FIG. 6(B), a 5R jackpot game using the second jackpot 28 is executed in the manner illustrated in FIG. 7(D). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7(D), in the 1R to 4R round games of 5R normal B, the opening/closing member 29 And the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled. In the 5th round game, the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 operate in the same manner as the 5R normal A round game, except that the opening/closing member 29 shifts to the open state one less time. controlled. For this reason, the 5R normal B jackpot game also does not include an effective round game, and the game ball will not win a V prize during the 5R normal B jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, the “normal The game will be controlled in the 'gaming state'.

[Configuration to make it difficult to tell whether there is a V-winning prize or not]
By the way, if a game ball wins a V prize during a jackpot game that is performed in response to winning "5R Kokuhen A" or "5R Kokuhen B", the player can be notified that the jackpot game is won. After the game ends, it is possible to clearly recognize that the game is controlled in the "variable probability game state". On the other hand, even if the game ball wins a V prize, it does not notify that fact (it does not display a production image to notify the V prize on the display screen 70, or outputs a production sound to notify the V prize from the speaker 38). In addition, after the jackpot game ends, by performing the performance in a performance mode that makes it impossible to determine whether the game is being controlled in the "probability-changing game state" or the "time-saving game state". It is conceivable to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult to tell whether or not the game has shifted to the "variable probability gaming state".

However, in this configuration, after recognizing in advance what round the round game is in which both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are long-opened, the V winning hole is won during that round game. By watching the mouth 287, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game ball has won a V prize, which may actually reduce the player's interest.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to suppress the occurrence of such problems. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot game of "5R fixed variation A", the jackpot game of "5R fixed variation B", the jackpot game of "5R normal A", and the jackpot game of "5R normal B" Regarding this, a configuration is adopted in which the number of rounds indicating which round game is currently being played is not displayed.

By adopting this configuration, even if you know in advance what round game the game ball can win a prize in, it is possible to determine whether the game that is currently being played is that round game. It is possible to easily and effectively suppress the above-mentioned problem from occurring. The configuration in which the number of rounds is not displayed during this jackpot game will be described in more detail later based on FIG. 14.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which, for example, the second large winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are alternately opened long and short. Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot game of 5R probability variation A (see FIG. 7(A)), a 1R round game in which both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are opened for a short time and then opened for a long time. , 2nd round game where the second big prize opening 28 is opened short and then long (V winning opening 287 is only opened once short), and V winning opening 287 is opened short and then long. A 3rd round game (the second big prize opening 28 is opened only once) is played.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of round games including an effective round game are being executed, it is possible to recognize which round the round game is being executed. The opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 operate in a manner that makes it difficult to do so. Therefore, for example, the short opening of the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 that is performed first after the jackpot game is started is the 1R round game, and is the first round game that is played after the jackpot game is started. It is possible to make the player feel that the long opening of the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 may be the 2R round game, and it is possible to easily enhance the effect of making it difficult to understand the current round number. It is possible.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment employs a configuration in which the V winning of the game ball is valid only for a predetermined round game. Specifically, for any of the four types of jackpot games that can be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot", the 1st round game and the 3rd round game However, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 287, a valid period is set in which the V winning becomes valid (see FIGS. 7(A) to (D)). For example, if you win "5R Kokuhen A" or "5R Kokuhen B", in the 1st round game and the 3rd round game in the jackpot game, both the 2nd big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are opened long. (See FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B)). For this reason, the player can easily make the game ball win a V prize by simply hitting the right hand, and after the jackpot game ends according to the V prize of the game ball, the player enters the ``Probability Variable Game State''. ” will control the game.

On the other hand, for any of the above four types of jackpot games, the validity period is not set for the 2nd round jackpot game, the 4th round game, and the 5th round game (Figure 7 (A) ~ (See (D)). For example, if you win "5R Normal A" or "5R Normal B", as illustrated in FIGS. 7(C) and (D), in the 2nd round game and the 4th round game in the jackpot game, Although both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are opened for a long time, the period of validity is not during these round games. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 287, it will not result in a V winning prize, and after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in the "time saving game state".

In this way, in addition to not being notified of the V winning of the game ball and not displaying the current number of rounds, there is a possibility that the probability of winning is There are times when the game is controlled in the game state and times when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state. For this reason, it is difficult to clearly determine whether a round game in which both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are opened for a long time is a valid round game or an ineffective round game. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether or not the game ball has won a V prize.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot game of "5R fixed variation A", the jackpot game of "5R fixed variation B", the jackpot game of "5R normal A", and the jackpot game of "5R normal B" , the actual number of rounds is set to 2R. Therefore, based on the actual number of rounds, it is determined whether it is a jackpot game that includes a valid round game or a round game that does not include a valid round game, and based on the determination result (V winning hole 287 It is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not the passing of the game ball against the target is a V winning prize.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are cases where a jackpot game (see FIGS. 7(C) and (D)) consisting of a plurality of round games that does not include an effective round game is executed; It is possible to operate the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 in an ineffective round game among the round games. Specifically, regarding the jackpot game of "5R normal A" and the jackpot game of "5R normal B", the second jackpot 28 is kept open for a long time in the 2nd round game and the 4th round game. The opening/closing member 29 operates, and the slide member 285 operates so that the V winning opening 287 is wide open. In this way, the effective round game (1st round game of "5R probability variation A": see FIG. 7(A), 3rd round game of "5R probability variation B": see FIG. 7(B)) and non-specific The opening/closing member 29 and the slide member are used in both round games (2nd round game of "5R normal A": see FIG. 7(C), 4th round game of "5R normal B": see FIG. 7(D)). 285 operates, it is difficult to specify whether or not it is a valid round game based on the operations of the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although the timings are different for the 5R fixed variable A jackpot game and the 5R normal A jackpot game, the short opening and long opening of the second big prize opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) are different from each other. A configuration is adopted in which the order of opening (opening pattern) is matched. Specifically, for both the 5R Probable Variable A jackpot game and the 5R Regular A jackpot game, the second big prize opening 28 is short open, long open, short open, long open, short open, short open, short. They are opened in the order of opening (see FIGS. 7(A) and (C)). In addition, for both the 5R probability variable A jackpot game and the 5R normal A jackpot game, the V winning opening 287 is opened in the order of short open, long open, short open, short open, and long open (Fig. 7 (A) ) and (C)).

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although the timings are different for the 5R fixed variable B jackpot game and the 5R normal B jackpot game, the short opening and long opening of the second big prize opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) are different. A configuration is adopted in which the order of opening (opening pattern) is matched. Specifically, for both the 5R Probable Variable B jackpot game and the 5R Regular B jackpot game, the second big prize opening 28 is opened in the following order: short open, long open, short open, long open, short open, short open. It is released (see FIGS. 7(B) and (D)). In addition, for both the 5R Probable Variable B jackpot game and the 5R Normal B jackpot game, the V winning opening 287 is opened in the order of short open, long open, short open, short open, and long open (Fig. 7 (A) ) and (C)).

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the opening patterns of the second big winning hole 28 (and V winning hole 287) during the jackpot game match with respect to 5R probability variable A and 5R normal A, and Regarding B and 5R normal B, the opening patterns of the second big winning hole 28 (and V winning hole 287) during the jackpot game match. Therefore, based on the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 28 (and V winning hole 287), it is possible to distinguish between 5R fixed variation A and 5R normal A, or between 5R fixed variation B and 5R normal B. It is difficult to do so, and as a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the above-mentioned problem that it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has won a V prize.

[About the flow of the game]
Next, the flow of the game will be explained with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1. Due to the board configuration of the game board 2, a game ball launched into the left gaming area 3L can win a prize in the first starting opening 21, while a gaming ball launched into the right gaming area 3R can win a prize in the first starting opening 21. Never. In addition, in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 22 is difficult to open, and even if it does, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is extremely short, and the game ball does not enter the second starting port 22. The chance of winning is extremely low. For this reason, there is no advantage for the player to play right-handed during the normal gaming state. As is clear from these, the normal gaming state is an advantageous state for the left side, where it is easier to hit the jackpot by launching the game ball into the left gaming area 3L than by launching it into the right gaming area 3R (special symbol determination is easier to execute). It is. Therefore, the player plays left-handed during the normal gaming state.

When a game ball hit to the left during the normal gaming state enters the first starting hole 21, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41, , the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X4 (see FIG. 6(B)) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, and the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is A jackpot game corresponding to is executed.

When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "Jackpot", the jackpot symbol that informs a probability-variable jackpot is stopped and displayed (see Figure 8 (A)), and the jackpot symbol that informs a normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. There are times when (see FIG. 8(E)).

Here, when the jackpot symbol X1 that informs a probability-variable jackpot is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned jackpot game (including the effective round game) is executed based on FIG. 7(A), and the jackpot symbol When X2 is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned jackpot game (including the effective round game) is executed based on FIG. 7(B). When a jackpot game that includes these valid round games is executed, provided that the game ball has won a V prize during the valid round game, after the jackpot game ends, if a jackpot does not occur on the way, the second special will be played. The game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state that continues until symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is executed 80 times (see FIG. 8(B)). On the other hand, even though a valid round game has been executed, if the game ball does not win a V prize due to reasons such as the player not hitting right during the valid round game, when the jackpot game ends, the jackpot will be won midway. If this does not occur, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state that continues until the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is executed 80 times (see FIG. 8(G)).

Here, in the variable probability game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol determination performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 25 is set to a relatively high probability (11/11 in this embodiment), and The opening time of the second starting port 22 when the symbol determination is won is set to a relatively long time (1.5 seconds x 3 times in this embodiment). Therefore, the variable probability game state is a right-side advantageous state in which it is easier to get a jackpot by hitting the game ball into the right game area 3R than by hitting it into the left game area 3L (special symbol determination is more likely to be executed). For this reason, when the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state, the player plays right-handed. This also applies when the game is controlled in the normal game state.

When a game ball hit to the right enters the second starting hole 22 while the game is being controlled in a variable probability gaming state, a second special symbol determination is executed, and a second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 42. After being variably displayed, a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, and the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is A jackpot game corresponding to is executed.

If the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "Jackpot", the jackpot symbol that informs you of a probability-variable jackpot is stopped and displayed (see Figure 8 (C)), while the jackpot symbol that informs you of a normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. (See Figure 6(C)). Here, if any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 that informs the probability-variable jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game including an effective round game using the second big winning hole 28 is executed, and during this effective round game, the game ball After the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled again in the variable probability game state on the condition that the player has won a V prize (see FIGS. 8(C) and (B)). On the other hand, if the game ball does not win a V prize during the valid round game even though the valid round game is executed, the time saving game state is entered at the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 8(G)).

In addition, if the judgment results of the 80 second special symbol judgments (or first special symbol judgments) performed during the variable probability gaming state are all "losses", the gaming state changes from the variable probability gaming state to the normal game. (See FIG. 8(D)).

On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol X3 (or jackpot symbol X4) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol to notify the jackpot in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 8(E)), when the jackpot game ends, if a jackpot does not occur midway through, The game shifts to a time-saving gaming state that continues until the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is executed 80 times (see FIG. 8(F)).

When a game ball hit to the right enters the second starting slot 22 while the game is controlled in the time-saving gaming state, a second special symbol determination is executed, and a second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 42. After being variably displayed, a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "Jackpot", one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) is displayed and stopped as the jackpot symbol to notify the probability-variable jackpot. A jackpot game corresponding to the displayed jackpot symbol is executed (see FIG. 8(H)). This jackpot game is a jackpot game that includes an effective round game, and on the condition that the game ball wins a V prize during this effective round game, the game state shifts to the variable probability game state at the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 8). See I). On the other hand, if the game ball does not win a V prize during the valid round game even though the valid round game is executed, the time saving game state is entered at the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 8 (J)).

In addition, if the judgment results of the 80 second special symbol judgments (or first special symbol judgments) performed during the time-saving gaming state are all "losses", the gaming state changes from the time-saving gaming state to the normal game. (See FIG. 8(K)).

[About variable effects]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, various effects are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special symbol (or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The variable performance performed on the display screen 70 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol will be explained.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and then the first special symbol is displayed. A first special symbol indicating the determination result of the symbol determination is stopped and displayed. The display screen 70 is provided with a performance symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 2) in which a performance symbol that notifies the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is displayed. Then, along with the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable performance including a variable display of the performance symbol is performed (see FIG. 2). Then, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a variable time corresponding to the variable pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is executed, as this first special symbol is stopped and displayed, The performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

During such variable display of performance symbols, a so-called ready-to-reach performance may be performed. Specifically, in the effect pattern display area 73 of the display screen 70, for example, part of a pattern row of effect patterns in which numbers 1 to 9 are written vertically consecutively from bottom to top is displayed horizontally. Three columns are displayed, and when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, these symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner (scroll display) so as to scroll from top to bottom. On the other hand, when a reach effect is performed, before all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed, first, for example, the effect symbols in the left column (left symbol) and the effect symbols in the right column (right symbol). pseudo-stop in order or at the same time so as not to stop completely. FIG. 2 shows an example of a state in which three symbols are pseudo-stopped as left symbols, three symbols are pseudo-stopped as right symbols, and the middle symbol row continues to be scrolled. In addition, a pseudo-stop is a performance in which the performance symbols are swung on the spot without moving much, and in the following explanation, the actual stop (sometimes simply referred to as a "stop display") in which the performance symbols are completely still is used. ), it may be called a pseudo-stop.

When the same performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol come to a pseudo-stop on the effective line, a ready-to-win performance is established, and a reach-for-win performance is performed that makes the player expect that three identical performance symbols will line up. In this reach effect, the reach symbols (left and right symbols) are pseudo-stopped, and the performance symbols (middle symbols) that make up the middle row of symbols are scrolled at a low speed so that the player can identify them, and finally , This is an effect in which a medium symbol that is common to the reach symbol or a medium symbol that is different from the reach symbol is stopped on the active line to notify a win or loss.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, other display objects such as characters and items are used in addition to the presentation symbols for such ready-to-reach presentation. In addition, in the following explanation, in a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed, the performance performed until the reach is established may be referred to as a "pre-reach performance".

The type of reach effect will be explained in detail later, but if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose", the three effect symbols indicating the reach loser (for example, "323") will pseudo-stop to notify you of the loss. However, as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three production symbols come to a final stop. On the other hand, when the reach effect is not performed, the three effect symbols indicating the winning number (for example, "629") will pseudo-stop to notify you of the loss, and the losing symbol will be stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. At the same time, these three performance symbols come to a standstill. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game will not be executed, the three production symbols are pseudo-stopped at the reach loss mark or the breakout mark indicating a loss, and then the actual stop is made to notify the loss (that the jackpot game will not be executed). A loss notification performance is executed.

If this loss notification performance is executed, the jackpot game will not be executed, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol and performance symbol will be displayed for a predetermined confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds). After being stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination is performed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol is started.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", a reach effect is usually executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and a double number (for example, "333") is shown to notify the jackpot. The three performance symbols come to a pseudo stop, and as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three performance symbols come to a real stop. In this way, when it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, a hit notification effect is executed in which the three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot, and then the actual stop is made to notify a jackpot (that a jackpot game will be executed). executed. When this winning notification performance is executed, a jackpot game is executed.

[Screen configuration of display screen 70]
FIG. 2 exemplifies the screen configuration of the display screen 70 in the normal gaming state. When the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, a pending icon display area 71, the icon display area 72, and an effect symbol display area 73 are formed on the display screen 70, as illustrated in FIG. As described above, the production symbol display area 73 displays the left symbols constituting the left symbol column, the middle symbols constituting the middle symbol column, and the right symbols constituting the right symbol column. This is the display area.

<Pending icon display area 71>
The pending icon display area 71 is a display area where a pending icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is pending is displayed. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 in a situation where special symbol determination and special symbol fluctuation display cannot be started immediately, such as during a special symbol fluctuation display or during a jackpot game, the first special The right to judge symbols is reserved up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment).

In this way, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the reservation icon display area 71 displays the same number of reservation icons as the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol reservation display 44. be done. In FIG. 2, a state in which two pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 71 is illustrated to indicate that the pending number of the first special symbol determination is "2".

Note that if a hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 while a highly reliable reach effect such as SPSP reach, which will be described later, is being performed, not only will the display area used for the reach effect be restricted, but also the hold icon display area 71 will be restricted. The display of icons may reduce the interest of reach performance. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the display object (in this embodiment, the pedestal of the pending icon) and the pending icon that make up the pending icon display area 71 is displayed during normal reach or SP reach, while the display object (in this embodiment, the pedestal of the pending icon) and the pending icon are displayed. As the reach performance develops from reach to SPSP reach, the display objects and pending icons that make up the pending icon display area 71 are erased from the display screen 70, and after the SPSP reach ends, the pending icon display area 71 is configured. A configuration is adopted in which display objects and pending icons are displayed again.

Moreover, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, basically no game ball enters the second starting port 22. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, basically, the right to determine the second special symbol is not suspended, and a pending icon related to the second special symbol determination is displayed on the display screen 70, or this pending icon is displayed on the display screen 70. A display area for display is not formed.

<The icon display area 72>
The icon display area 72 is a display area that displays the icon as a variation suggestion image suggesting that the first special symbol is displayed in a variation manner. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 with the start of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, and for example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing when the fluctuating production symbol stops). It is deleted from the icon display area 72. However, the timing of erasing the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased during the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, when the SPSP reach develops or in the middle of the SPSP reach, which will be described later. The icon may be deleted.

By the way, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 in a state where the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and the right to judge the special symbol is not reserved, the first special symbol will not be displayed in a variable manner. Accordingly, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 72. On the other hand, when the pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71 and the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is finished, the icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71. A first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon (the pending icon displayed in the position closest to the icon display area 72) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in accordance with the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, It will be displayed as a new icon. In this way, the hold icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 72 is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 rather than the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71.

Note that if another hold icon different from the above-mentioned first hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, as the first hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 72, the hold icon display area 71 , the other pending icons are shifted in the direction closer to the icon display area 72. As is clear from the explanation so far, in the gaming machine 1, the icon corresponding to the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 may be displayed in the icon display area 72, so the following explanation will be given. In this case, when the pending icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icon."

(About icon change effect)
By the way, the hold icon is normally displayed as a white hold icon (default hold icon: white icon) (see FIG. 21(A)). On the other hand, when a pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, an icon change effect may be performed in which the display mode of the pending icon changes. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, there are cases where the display color of the hold icon changes and cases where the display color and shape of the hold icon change due to the icon change effect. When this icon change effect is performed, the white pending icon changes to a pending icon of a color indicating the jackpot reliability, such as blue, green, red, or rainbow color. The colors suggesting jackpot reliability illustrated here are arranged in order from lowest to highest jackpot reliability. The rainbow color is selected only when the judgment result of the suspended first special symbol judgment becomes a "jackpot", and is not selected when it becomes a "loss". Red is when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the red pending icon is a "jackpot", or when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively long time even though it is a "loss". (As a reach effect, it is likely to be selected when the reach effect develops into a reach effect with relatively high jackpot reliability such as SP reach or SPSP reach). Green is likely to be selected when the variation time of the special symbol is set to a medium time for a "big hit" or a "loss". Blue is likely to be selected when there is a "lose" or when the special symbol variation time is set to a relatively short time, and it is difficult to select when it is a "jackpot". In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the blue pending icon is set to approximately 3%, the jackpot reliability of the green pending icon is set to approximately 15%, and the jackpot reliability of the red pending icon is approximately 45%. The jackpot reliability of the rainbow-colored pending icon is set to 100%.

Here, an example has been described in which an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of a pending icon changes only once when it is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, but the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment In this case, other icon change effects may be performed. That is, for example, when a white pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, one pending icon is targeted, such as changing to a blue pending icon, and then changing to a green pending icon. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the pending icon changes multiple times. Further, when a white pending icon shifted from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect in which the display color changes may be performed.

Further, the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes, and then when the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, the display color changes. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the icon changes in both the pending icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72. In addition, an icon change effect may be performed in which the pending icon is initially displayed in a display color other than white (for example, blue), or an icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of the pending icon whose initial color is other than white is changed. . Furthermore, for example, if the right to determine the first special symbol is not reserved and the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and a game ball enters the first starting port 21, the white color is An icon change effect in which the icon is displayed in a different display color (for example, green) or an icon change effect in which the display color of the icon is changed to another display color (for example, red) may be performed.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment displays on the display screen 70 reservation information indicating that the right to judge a special symbol is reserved, and is capable of changing the display mode of the reservation information. . In the following description, a hold icon or icon whose display color is other than white may be referred to as a "special icon" to distinguish it from a normal hold icon or the icon whose display color is white.

[Modified example regarding display control of pending information]
Note that the display control of the reservation information is not limited to the one exemplified in this embodiment, but may be as follows. That is, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, an example will be described in which the display colors of the icons (the pending icon and the relevant icon) are white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, but other embodiments may also be used. In terms of the shape, gold may be used which suggests that the reliability of jackpots is higher than that of red, but that the reliability of jackpots is lower than that of rainbow colors.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the icon change effect that targets the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71, it is possible to perform an icon change effect that targets the icon displayed in the icon display area 72. However, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which only the former icon change effect can be performed without providing the icon display area 72 (without displaying the icon).

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which a hold icon as hold information is displayed on the display screen 70 and the display color of the hold icon is changed. On the other hand, in other embodiments, for example, four color LEDs whose emission colors can be changed are provided, and the same number of LEDs as the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination are lit, and the emission color of any one of the LEDs is changed. By changing the display mode of the pending information, the display mode of the pending information may be changed.

[Flow of the production accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol]
FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of reach performance. When the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, on the display screen 70, as the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, scroll display of the three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 73 is started (see FIG. 9(A)). .

Here, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose", for example, different performance symbols as left symbols and right symbols will pseudo-stop on the effective line, and in this non-reach mode, the symbol row in the middle row A no-reach effect (see FIG. 9(B)) may be performed in which the only scrolling information is displayed. When this no-reach effect is performed, the three effect symbols showing the winning result are pseudo-stopped at the end of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, and these symbols are stopped as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. A loss notification performance (see FIG. 9(C)) will be performed in which the three performance symbols are stopped.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot" or if it is decided to perform a reach effect even though it is a "loss", for example, while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, A pre-reach performance in which a predetermined left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line of the performance symbol display area 73, and then the right symbol, which is the same production symbol as the left symbol, is moved onto the effective line (see FIG. 9(D)). will be held. Then, when the same left symbol and right symbol come to a pseudo stop on the active line, a reach is established (see FIG. 9(E)). When a reach is established in this way, the player expects that the middle symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol), will stop on the active line and the symbols will be aligned. A performance is held.

In this embodiment, three types of ready-to-reach presentations, normal reach, SP ready-to-reach, and SPSP ready-to-reach, are prepared as ready-to-reach presentations that can be executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9).

Normal reach (see FIG. 9(F)) is a reach performance with relatively low jackpot reliability (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). When a reach is established, a normal reach is first performed, and during the normal reach, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols, which was scrolled at high speed between the two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol), gradually decreases. go.

Here, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose", and for example, the variation pattern E (see FIG. 10(B)) in which the variation time is 30 seconds at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is selected. If so, a medium symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line to display the effect symbol of a reach loss (for example, "434"), and a loss notification effect (figure 9(G)) is performed.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" and, for example, variation pattern A (see FIG. 10(A)) with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol. If so, a middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line to display a double-eye effect symbol (for example, "444"), and a hit notification effect (Fig. 9 ( G)) is performed.

In addition, if a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time of the first special symbol is selected, the middle symbol, which is the same production symbol as the reach symbol, is effective without the hit notification effect or loss notification effect being performed in normal reach. After passing over the line, the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row increases and develops into SP reach (see FIG. 9(H)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 9(I)).

Although not shown in the figure, when developing into a highly reliable reach effect such as SP reach or SPSP reach, the left symbol that has been pseudo-stopped shrinks and moves to the upper left position on the display screen 70. At the same time, the right symbol, which had been pseudo-stopped, shrinks and moves to the upper right position on the display screen 70, and these left and right symbols pseudo-stop at the moved positions, and the middle symbol row is , will not be displayed until the end of the highly reliable reach performance (for example, see FIGS. 12(A) to 12(E)). Then, the display objects and pending icons forming the pending icon display area 71 are also hidden. As a result, it becomes possible to perform a highly reliable ready-to-win presentation in a display area wider than the presentation symbol display area 73, and it is possible to improve the interest of the highly reliable ready-to-win presentation.

SP Reach and SPSP Reach, for example, are configured as a battle production in which your character fights an enemy character, and SP Reach is positioned as the first half of the battle and SPSP Reach is positioned as the second half of the battle. So, the enemy characters you fight are common. In other words, for example, if a battle performance in which you fight enemy character A is performed in SP Reach in the first half of the battle, and then progresses to SPSP Reach in the second half of the battle, a battle performance in which you fight against enemy character A will also be performed in SPSP Reach. .

When comparing these SP Reach and SPSP Reach, SPSP Reach has higher jackpot reliability than SP Reach, and compared to when it only develops to SP Reach, it is more likely to win if it develops to SPSP Reach. It has the characteristic that the notification effect is easily executed.

In gaming machine 1, the normal reach (see Figure 9 (F)) progresses to the SP reach in the first half of the battle (see Figure 9 (H)), and in this SP reach, the hit notification effect or loss as shown in Figure 7 (G) occurs. Announcement performances may be performed. In addition, there are cases in which normal reach develops to SPSP reach (see Figure 7 (I)) via SP reach, and cases in which normal reach develops directly to SPSP reach without passing through SP reach. In this case, the hit notification effect or loss notification effect shown in FIG. 9(G) will be performed in this SPSP reach.

Note that the types of ready-to-win performances and the way in which the ready-to-reach performances are developed are merely examples, and the types of ready-to-win performances and the manner in which the ready-to-reach performances are developed may be other types.

[Variation pattern selection table used in normal gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a process for selecting a special symbol variation pattern in the normal gaming state will be explained. Here, FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting a variation pattern of special symbols in the normal gaming state.

The main ROM 82 includes a variable pattern selection table for jackpot (see FIG. 10(A)) as a variable pattern selection table that is referred to when selecting a variable pattern for a special symbol (here, the first special symbol) in the normal gaming state. ), a variation pattern selection table for reach/loss (see FIG. 10(B)), and a variation pattern selection table for no reach/loss (see FIG. 10(C)) are stored. The jackpot variation pattern selection table is a table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern for the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot". The variation pattern selection table for reach loss is a variation pattern selection table for selecting the first special symbol when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "lose" and it is determined (based on the reach random number) to perform the reach effect. This table is referred to in order to select a variation pattern. The variation pattern selection table for no-reach loss is used when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "loss" and it is determined (based on the reach random number) to perform the no-reach effect, the first This table is referred to in order to select a special symbol variation pattern.

(Variation pattern selection table for jackpot)
In the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10(A)), the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the random number value to be compared with the variation pattern random number. In addition, in FIG. 10, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the fluctuation patterns and the number of random numbers associated with each fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the number of random values selected by the sub CPU 91 for each fluctuation pattern are shown. The type of fluctuating performance pattern, the specific performance content of the fluctuating performance pattern, the possible range of the random number of the fluctuating pattern, and the rate at which each fluctuating pattern is selected are also described.

In the normal gaming state, when the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game based on the jackpot random number acquired in response to the winning of a game ball in the first starting port 21, the main CPU 81 executes the jackpot random number and the fluctuation acquired together with the jackpot random number. The variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected by reading the variation pattern associated with the same random number as the pattern random number from the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10(A)).

As illustrated in FIGS. 10(A) and (B), in this embodiment, the possible range of the fluctuation pattern random number for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is from "0" to "99". It is set. In the jackpot variation pattern selection table, as illustrated in FIG. 10(A), 2 random numbers are associated with variation pattern A, and 18 random numbers are associated with variation pattern B. 35 random numbers are associated with the variation pattern C, and 45 random numbers are associated with the variation pattern D.

Therefore, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "Jackpot", variation pattern A is selected at a rate of 2% (=2/100 x 100), and at a rate of 18% (=18/100 x 100). Variation pattern B is selected at a rate of 35% (=35/100×100), variation pattern C is selected at a rate of 45% (=45/100×100), and variation pattern D is selected at a rate of 45% (=45/100×100). For example, when the variable pattern A is selected, the sub CPU 91 selects the variable effect pattern A, and performs a variable effect that performs a winning notification effect in normal reach. Further, for example, when the variable pattern D is selected, the sub CPU 91 selects the variable effect pattern D, and performs a variable effect that performs a hit notification effect in the SPSP reach that has developed from the normal reach through the SP reach. become.

(Fluctuation pattern selection table for reach loss)
If the main CPU 81 determines in the first special symbol determination that a jackpot game is not to be executed, the main CPU 81 determines whether to perform a reach effect based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, symbol random number, and variable pattern random number. Determine. Specifically, either one of the fluctuation patterns is selected from a group of fluctuation patterns in which a reach effect is performed (see FIG. 10(B)), or a fluctuation in which a reach effect is not performed (a no-reach effect is performed). It is determined which variation pattern to select from the pattern group (see FIG. 10(C)). Here, when it is determined to perform a reach effect, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table for reach loss.

In the reach/miss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10(B)), the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the random number value to be compared with the variation pattern random number. In the normal gaming state, the main CPU 81 determines not to execute the jackpot game based on the jackpot random number acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 21, and uses the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number. If it is decided to perform a reach effect based on these random numbers, a variation pattern associated with the same random value as the variation pattern random number obtained together with these random numbers is selected in the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see Figure 10 (B) ), the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected.

In the variation pattern selection table for reach loss, as illustrated in FIG. 10(B), 40 random numbers are associated with variation pattern E, and 30 random numbers are associated with variation pattern F. 20 random numbers are associated with the variation pattern G, and 10 random numbers are associated with the variation pattern H.

Therefore, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose" and it is decided to perform a reach effect, variable pattern E is selected at a rate of 40% (=40/100 x 100), and 30% %(=30/100×100) of fluctuation pattern F is selected, 20%(=20/100×100) of fluctuation pattern G is selected, 10%(=10/100×100) of The variation pattern H is selected based on the ratio. Then, for example, when the variable pattern F is selected, the sub CPU 91 selects the variable effect pattern F, and performs a variable effect that performs a loss notification effect with the SP reach developed from the normal reach. Further, for example, when the variable pattern H is selected, the sub CPU 91 selects the variable effect pattern H, and performs a variable effect that performs a loss notification effect in the SPSP reach that has developed from the normal reach through the SP reach. become.

(Fluctuation pattern selection table for no reach loss)
When the main CPU 81 determines not to execute a jackpot game based on the jackpot random number and determines to perform a no-reach performance based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern selection table for no-reach loss. Refer to this and select the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

In the variation pattern selection table for no-reach loss (see Figure 10(C)), the variation pattern of the special symbol and the pending number of the first special symbol judgment when the variation display of the current first special symbol starts. are associated.

The main CPU 81 determines that when the pending number of the first special symbol judgment becomes "0" or "1" with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, the variation time of the first special symbol is 13 seconds. A certain variation pattern J is selected, and when the number of reservations in the first special symbol determination is "2", a variation pattern K in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 8 seconds is selected. In addition, the main CPU 81 determines that during the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination reaches the upper limit of "4", and with the start of the current variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol determination is performed. When the number of reservations is "3", the variation pattern L in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 4 seconds is selected.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined not to execute a jackpot game and it is determined to perform a no-reach performance, the number of reserved first special symbol judgment rights is If the number of reservations is relatively large, the first special symbol whose fluctuation time is relatively short can be newly stored in response to the new winning of a game ball to the first starting port 21. A variation pattern is selected. On the other hand, if the number of pending pieces is relatively small, in order to prevent the first special symbols and performance symbols from changing and the progress of the game to stop, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has a relatively long variation time. is selected.

The following can be said from the explanation regarding the two variation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B). That is, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", there is a tendency that a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected, and a variation pattern with a short variation time is difficult to be selected (Figure 10 (See (A)). In addition, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose" and a reach effect is performed, it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a long variation time, and conversely, a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected. There is a tendency (see FIG. 10(B)).

From these facts, it can be said that the longer the variation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to perform a winning notification performance, and conversely, the shorter the variation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to perform a loss notification performance. In other words, if a reach effect is performed over a relatively long period of time, such as from normal reach to SP reach via SP reach, a hit notification effect is likely to be executed, and in a reach where only normal reach is performed, If the time required for the performance is relatively short, it can be said that the loss notification performance is likely to be executed. In other words, the win or loss is not announced in the normal reach effect, but the normal reach progresses to SP reach or SPSP reach, or the normal reach progresses to SP reach via SP reach (or directly without going through SP reach). It can be said that the reliability of hitting the jackpot is higher if it develops into .

[About advance judgment processing]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game before the first special symbol determination is performed for that right. Pre-determination processing may be performed. Specifically, the main CPU 81 acquires a jackpot random number in response to the game ball winning in the first starting hole 21, and based on the acquired jackpot random number, the Prior to the jackpot determination process in the first special symbol determination (see step S308 in FIG. 42), a similar jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not it will be determined as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol determination is executed. Determine in advance whether Also, based on the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, a process similar to the fluctuation pattern selection process described above based on FIGS. 10(A) and (B) (see step S309 in FIG. 42) is performed. 1. It is determined in advance which variation pattern will be selected when special symbol determination is executed.

In this way, when the main CPU 81 performs the preliminary determination process in response to the suspension of the right to determine the first special symbol, the main CPU 81 sends a suspension command containing preliminary determination information indicating the preliminary determination result to the sub control board 90. Send. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned icon change effect based on the preliminary determination information included in the pending command. When it is determined to perform the icon change effect, it is determined what kind of change pattern is used to change the display mode (in this embodiment, the color of the icon) of the icon (the pending icon or the relevant icon), and the determined result is The image and sound control board 100 is caused to perform an icon change effect based on the following.

[About production mode]
When a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while the game is being controlled in the normal gaming state, a first special symbol determination is executed. When this first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41, and then the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Ru. On the other hand, on the display screen 70, a variable effect is executed in which the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner as the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is performed. The production pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner that notifies the user of this. Although not shown in the figure, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment provides three types of production modes when variable production is performed in this normal gaming state: normal mode, chance mode, and intense heat mode. has been done.

When these three production modes are compared, the composition of the production symbols, the manner in which the production symbols fluctuate, the background image displayed on the display screen 70 during the variation production, the production sound output from the speaker 38 during the variation production, and the variation production. It is characterized in that the types of preview presentations executed during the variable presentation, the light emitting patterns of the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 during the variable presentation, etc. may differ from each other. In addition, the chance mode is a production mode that suggests that the reliability of jackpots is higher than the normal mode, and the intense heat mode is a production mode that suggests that the reliability of jackpots is even higher than the chance mode. Also, the reliability of jackpots differs depending on the performance mode.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the jackpot reliability is relatively high, that is, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot" or a "loss", the When the variation pattern of the first special symbol with a relatively long time is selected, the production mode shifts from normal mode to chance mode and a variation production is performed in chance mode, or the production mode changes from normal mode to intense heat. It is possible to change the mode and perform a fluctuating production in super hot mode, or to shift from normal mode to chance mode to super hot mode and perform fluctuating production in super hot mode. be.

Furthermore, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the above-mentioned preliminary determination process (see FIG. 41) may be executed by the main CPU 81. When this pre-judgment process is executed, based on the pre-judgment result, a "pre-read Before the "target change" starts, the production mode changes from normal mode to chance mode, from normal mode to extreme heat mode, or from normal mode to chance mode to extreme heat mode. Sometimes I do. Furthermore, the production mode may shift from the normal mode to the chance mode before the pre-read target variation starts, and the production mode may shift from the chance mode to the intense mode after the pre-read target variation starts.

In addition, the normal mode includes a first normal mode, a second normal mode, and a third normal mode, and when comparing these normal modes, the composition of the production symbol, the variation mode of the production symbol, the variation production The background image displayed on the display screen 70, the effect sound output from the speaker 38 during the variable effect, the type of preview effect executed during the variable effect, the light emission of the frame lamp 37 and board lamp 5 during the variable effect. Although the patterns etc. are different from each other, there is no difference in jackpot reliability.

[Specific example of performance in the first normal mode in the normal gaming state]
Next, a specific example of the performance in the first normal mode in the normal gaming state will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIGS. 11 and 12 are screen diagrams illustrating the performance in the first normal mode in the normal gaming state. Here, as a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, a winning notification is given in the SPSP reach that has evolved from the normal reach. The effect executed when the variation pattern C (see FIG. 10(A)) in which the effect is to be performed is selected will be explained. In addition, here, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the first notice, second notice, third notice, and A case will be described using as an example a case where four types of preview performances of the fourth notice are executed.

In the first normal mode, effect patterns made up of numbers to which no character images are added are displayed on the display screen 70, and each effect pattern scrolls downward. Further, during the variable performance in the first normal mode, a background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and BGM dedicated to the first normal mode is output from the speaker 38.

In FIG. 11(A), on the display screen 70, one pending icon (for example, a red pending icon) is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is In order to notify that the judgment result of the corresponding first special symbol judgment is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the effect symbol indicating the winning number of "526" is displayed. A state in which the display is stopped is illustrated. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, the red pending icon) is executed. Then, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" and the variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the following effect is performed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon, the earliest displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 72, and scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 11(A) and 11(B)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the scroll display of these three symbol rows was started, the first preview may be executed (see FIG. 11(C)). For example, as the first preview, the display mode of the effect image (first preview effect image) related to the step-up notice displayed in the center area of the display screen 70 is changed in stages, and the effect sound related to the step-up notice is changed in stages. A step-up notice output from the speaker 38 is executed.

Following the above-mentioned first notice, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed. Here, the pseudo-continuous performance is such that during the variable display of one special symbol (here, the first special symbol), the performance symbol displayed in the performance symbol display area 73 is variably displayed multiple times. It is a staged performance. Regarding this pseudo continuous effect, the following effects are displayed.

In other words, the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the symbol column in the right column decreases (the left symbol that pseudo-stopped first and The symbols on the right (for example, 4 symbols) will pseudo-stop, and then the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols will decrease, and the 7 symbols will pseudo-stop as the middle symbol to notify the execution of the pseudo-series effect (Figure 11). (See (D)).

In this way, after the different performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol have pseudo-stopped, when the 7 symbols in the middle row have pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second fluctuating performance that follows the pseudo-first fluctuating fluctuating performance is started. . Specifically, after the characters “×2” indicating the start of the second pseudo-variable effect are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, the characters “×2” are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 70. Along with this, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 11(D) and (E)).

When this pseudo second series of variable effects is being performed, for example, a dialogue preview is executed as the second preview. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11(F), a production image (second preview production image) showing a predetermined character uttering a line is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and Performance sounds related to the preview (for example, characters' voices) are output from the speaker 38.

As mentioned above, when the dialogue preview is executed as the second notice during the variable display of the second pseudo series, the second pseudo continuous display is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (Figure 11 (See (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11(G), the scrolling speed of the symbol row on the left column decreases, the left symbol (for example, 2 symbols) comes to a pseudo-stop, and then the scroll speed of the symbol column on the right column decreases. The scrolling speed decreases and the right symbols (for example, 5 symbols) pseudo-stop, and then the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row decreases and the 7 symbols pseudo-stop as the middle symbol.

When the second pseudo consecutive performance is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, a pseudo third consecutive variable performance following the pseudo second consecutive fluctuating performance is started. Specifically, after the characters “×3” indicating the start of the pseudo third fluctuating performance are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, the characters “×3” are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 70. Along with this, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 11(G) and (H)).

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the pseudo third fluctuating effect in this way, the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases, the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then , the scrolling speed of the right symbol column decreases (same as the left symbol), and the right symbols (here, 3 symbols) come to a pseudo stop, establishing a reach (see FIG. 11(I)).

In addition, here, we have explained the case where the "pre-reach pseudo series" is executed, which restarts the scrolling display of each symbol row (pseudo-stopped) before the reach is established, but it is assumed that after the reach is achieved (pseudo-stopped) ) "Pseudo series after reach" that restarts the scrolling display of each symbol row may be executed. In addition, a pseudo-continuous performance may be executed both before and after the reach is established.

As described above, when the same effect symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and a reach is established, a normal reach is executed (see FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, after a reach is established, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases, and the same middle symbols (here, the middle 3 symbols) as the reach symbols (here, the 3 symbols on the left and 3 symbols on the right) become reachable. An effect display is performed to show how the player approaches the active line defined by the symbol.

Here, when the normal reach progresses to the SPSP reach, the following effects are displayed. In other words, when the middle row symbol row is being scrolled, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (3 symbols in this case) passes over the active line, and accordingly, the scrolling speed of the middle row symbol row increases. increases, making it difficult to identify the medium symbol, and a development effect is performed that suggests that SPSP will develop into a reach (see FIG. 12(B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12(B), in the process of moving to the upper left area of the display screen 70 while the three symbols on the left are being reduced in size, the scroll direction is rotated once clockwise as the axis direction. Then, move to the upper left area, and at the same time, while moving to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while reducing the three right symbols, rotate once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis direction, and then move to the upper right area. move to the other area. After that, until the end of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, the 3 symbols on the left are displayed in a pseudo-stop display in the upper left area, and the 3 symbols on the right are displayed in a pseudo-stop display in the upper right area (Fig. 12 (C) ~ (See (H)).

Next, when the development effect (see Figure 12 (B)) suggesting the development to SPSP reach is performed as described above, the player is informed that the third notice (see Figure 12 (A)) described above will occur. A darkening effect that makes people look forward to it is performed (see FIG. 12(C)). Specifically, until a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the development effect is performed, the reach symbol (here In this case, an effect display is performed in which only the three left symbols and the right symbol) and the relevant icon are displayed in a superimposed manner, and the other effects symbols are hidden.

Following this blackout effect, for example, a group preview may be performed as a third preview (see FIG. 12(D)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12(D), an effect display is performed that shows a large number of characters moving from right to left on the display screen 70.

Please note that such a third notice is not always executed if a blackout effect is performed, but there are cases where SPSP Reach starts after the third notice is executed following a blackout effect, and there are cases where SPSP Reach starts after the third notice is executed following a blackout effect. There are cases where SPSP reach is started without the third notice being executed.

In this way, when the SPSP reach is started, the SPSP reach effect image that is the effect image related to the SPSP reach is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12(E)). As a result, for example, an effect display is performed that depicts a battle between the player's own character and the enemy character. Then, when reaching the final stage of the SPSP reach, a first performance button operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the first performance button 35 (see FIG. 12(F)). Specifically, a first performance button image imitating the first performance button 35 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period during which operation of the first performance button 35 is valid are displayed.

In this first performance button operation promotion performance, the fourth notice is given at the timing when the first performance button 35 is operated during its valid period, or at the timing when the valid period ends without the first performance button 35 being operated. For example, a cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is displayed superimposed on the performance image (other than the ready-to-reach symbols) displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12(G)). This cut-in is an effect that suggests the degree of reliability of a jackpot, and when a green cut-in is performed, which includes a single character and displays a cut-in image expressed using green in a superimposed manner. , a case where a red cut-in is performed in which a cut-in image containing two characters and expressed using the color red is superimposed, and a case where a cut-in image containing three characters and expressed using the color gold is superimposed. There are cases where gold cut-ins are displayed in a superimposed manner, and when these cut-ins are arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of jackpot, the order is green cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in. Note that FIG. 12(G) illustrates an example of gold cut-in being performed.

When the cut-in occurs in this way and the SPSP reach reaches its final stage, a second performance button operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the second performance button 36 (see FIG. 12(H)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12(H), during the valid period of the second performance button operation promotion performance, a second performance button image imitating the second performance button 36 and a message "Press!" are displayed. Characters indicating the operation content of the second performance button 36 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

If the second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period of this second performance button operation promotion performance, the three performance symbols showing the double number will be pseudo-stopped as an operation corresponding performance according to the operation, and then the main stop will be stopped. A winning notification effect is performed (see FIG. 12(I)).

Note that here, since the variation pattern C (see FIG. 10(A)) is selected at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol this time, a hit notification production is performed as an operation-compatible production, but for example, this time When the variation pattern G or variation pattern H illustrated in FIG. 10(B) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the three production symbols indicating reach loss are pseudo-stopped as the operation corresponding production. After that, a loss notification effect is performed to stop the actual operation.

[About the production performed during the jackpot game]
As described above, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X4 (see FIG. 6(B)) is stopped and displayed. Along with this, three performance symbols indicating a double number, such as "222", for example, are stopped on the display screen 70. Here, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the double number of "777" and the double number of "333" definitively notify that the game will be controlled in a variable probability game state after the jackpot game ends. These Zoro are considered as production symbols, and in some cases when 5R probability variation A or 5R probability variation B is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, these three production symbols that notify the probability variation jackpot are Either one of the eyes will come to rest on the display screen 70.

In this way, when the three performance symbols showing doubles of "777" or "333" which definitely notify the probability-variable jackpot are actually stopped, a jackpot game that definitely includes an effective round game is executed. For this reason, during the effective round game, a launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 13(B) and (C)) that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning hole 287 is executed. When the game ball passes through the V winning hole 287, a V winning notification effect (see FIGS. 13(D) and (E)) is executed to notify that the gaming ball has won a V winning prize.

On the other hand, when 5R normal A or 5R normal B is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, and when 5R probability variation A or 5R probability variation B is selected, "777" and "333" are selected. One of the seven types of digits "111," ``222,'' ``444,'' ``555,'' ``666,'' ``888,'' and ``999,'' excluding the digits of , is displayed on the display screen 70. I will do it. When these 7 types of doubles are actually stopped, when 5R probability variation A is selected as the type of jackpot, when 5R probability variation B is selected, and when 5R normal A is selected, There are times when 5R probability variation B is selected. And, in order to make it difficult to understand whether or not this jackpot is a guaranteed-variable jackpot, and whether or not an effective round game will be executed during a jackpot game, the above-mentioned launch promotion effect is not executed during a jackpot game. Furthermore, even if the game ball wins a V prize during a valid round game, the above-mentioned V winning prize notification effect will not be executed.

<When V-winning is announced>
FIG. 13 is a screen diagram showing an example of performance when a V winning prize is announced during a jackpot game. Here, a case will be described as an example where 5R probability variation A (see FIG. 7(A)) is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, in which the 1Rth round game is an effective round game. The determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state becomes "Jackpot", and as the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIG. 6(B)) indicating 5R probability variation A is stopped and displayed, for example, the double number of "777" is displayed. There are cases where the three production symbols showing the main stop. In this case, during the jackpot game of 5R probability variation A, the following effects are performed.

First, during the opening period of the 5R probability variable A jackpot game, a predetermined opening effect is executed (see FIG. 13(A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 13(A), the words "RUSH BONUS" are displayed in the center area of the display screen 70, informing the type of jackpot this time, and the player is prompted to hit right. The words “Right-handed” and a right-pointing arrow are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70.

Then, in conjunction with the 1st round game (which is an effective round game) of 5R probability variation A (see FIG. 7(A)), a predetermined round performance is executed (see FIGS. 13(B) and (C)). . Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 13(B) and (C), there are three arrows pointing to the V winning slot 287 (with the words "Right hit" written on it) and a sign saying "Aim for the V". A launch promotion effect is executed in which large letters are displayed on the display screen 70 and a voice saying "Aim for the V" is output from the speaker 38. In addition, the three performance symbols "777" that stopped before the current jackpot game started are displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the current jackpot game is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70. The total number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the second grand prize opening 28 after the start of the game is displayed.

In this way, in the 1R round game in which the launch promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning hole 287, as described above based on FIG. 7(A), the second grand prize is The opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for 0.1 seconds and then opened for 10 seconds. Therefore, the player can easily win the game ball into the V winning hole 287 by hitting the ball to the right according to the launch promoting effect. In this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the launch promotion effect is started with the start of the 1st round game, but in other embodiments, the launch promotion effect may be started from the middle of the opening period. You can also do this.

Next, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 287 during the 1R round game which is a valid round game, a predetermined V winning notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball has won a V prize (FIG. 13). See D). Specifically, for example, an effect display showing two characters holding up a star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V" and showing joy is performed, and a predetermined V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38. .

In this way, during the 1st round game, when the V winning notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball has won a V prize, the above star-shaped emblem will be displayed on the display screen during the 2nd round game that follows. It is displayed in a small size in the lower left area of 70 (see FIG. 13(E)). In addition, in the 1R round game and the 2R round game, the second big prize opening 28 is opened for a long time, so every time the passage of a game ball is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 281, the above-mentioned payout is performed. The total number of awarded prize balls is updated (see FIGS. 13(B) to (E)). Although not shown in the figure, during the period in which the 3rd to 5th round games are played in which the second grand prize opening 28 is briefly opened, the effect display illustrated in FIG. 13(E) continues. It will be done as follows. Then, during the ending period of the jackpot game, in order to notify that the production mode named "Gekbatou RUSH" will start, which will definitely notify that the game is in a "definitely variable game state", "Gekbatou RUSH rush" will be announced. !” are displayed in a large size in the central area of the display screen 70, and the speaker 38 outputs a voice saying “Gekibatou RUSH rushes in!”.

<If the V prize is not announced>
FIG. 14 is a screen diagram showing an example of performance when a V winning prize is not announced during a jackpot game. Here, a case will be described as an example where 5R probability variation A (see FIG. 7(A)) is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, in which the 1Rth round game is an effective round game. The determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state becomes "jackpot", and as the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIG. 6(B)) indicating 5R probability variation A is stopped and displayed, for example, the double number of "444" is displayed. There are cases where the three production symbols showing the main stop. In this case, during the jackpot game of 5R probability variation A, the following effects are performed.

First, during the opening period of the jackpot game of 5R probability variation A, a predetermined opening effect is executed (see FIG. 14(A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 14(A), the words "Challenge Bonus" are displayed in the center area of the display screen 70, informing the type of jackpot this time, and the player is asked to hit right. The words “Right-handed” and a right-pointing arrow are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70. Incidentally, a similar opening performance is also performed during the opening period of the 5R normal A and 5R normal B jackpot games.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the opening period, the opening performance is switched to an opening performance that functions as a right-handed hitting promotion performance (see FIGS. 14(A) to 14(C)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 14(A) to (C), instead of the words "Challenge Bonus", the words "Aim to the right!" and the words "Save your energy" are used. and an arcing arrow are displayed on the display screen 70, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the opening performance was changed, the words ``Save up your energy'' change to the words ``Prepare for battle!''.

By the way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 287 during an ineffective round game in the 5R normal A or 5R normal B jackpot game, the game is controlled in a variable probability game state after the jackpot game ends, with the condition that it passes. Never. Therefore, it can be said that there is little need to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effects illustrated in FIGS. 14(B) and 14(C). However, if the right-handed driving promotion effect is not performed during an effective round game in the jackpot game of 5R probability-variable A or 5R probability-variable B, there is a chance that the game will be controlled in a probability-variable gaming state because the player did not perform a right-handed hit. may be missed unintentionally.

Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, it may be possible to perform the above-mentioned launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 13(B) and (C)) during a round game, but this does not mean that during an effective round game Therefore, it may become difficult to understand whether the game ball has won a V prize or not.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the round game in the jackpot game that is executed in response to the actual stop of the three effect symbols indicating any of the seven types of zeros, the above-mentioned launch During the opening period when the promotion effect (see FIGS. 13(B) and (C)) is not performed and the second grand prize opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are both closed, the situation shown in FIGS. 14(B) and (C) We are planning to perform an example to encourage players to hit right-handed.

Next, when the 1Rth round game starts, the right-handed hitting promotion effect ends, and a predetermined round effect is performed (see FIGS. 14(D) and (E)). Specifically, three performance symbols, for example, "444", which were stopped before the start of the current jackpot game, are displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and at the same time, in the upper right area of the display screen 70. , the total number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls winning in the second big prize opening 28 after the start of the current jackpot game is displayed. In addition, in the center area of the display screen 70, a gauge image is displayed in which the black area expands to the right as the number of paid out prize balls increases, and the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28. Each time a prize is won, it is updated along with the total number of prize balls.

The 1Rth round game in which the performance display illustrated in FIGS. 14(D) and (E) is performed is an effective round game, and if the player normally hits the ball to the right, the game ball will win the V prize. It is easy to win a V in the opening 287, but even if the game ball wins a V, it will not be notified to that effect (see FIGS. 14(D) and (E)).

Note that this gauge image is continuously displayed until the 2Rth round game (see FIG. 7(A)) ends (see FIG. 14(F)). Then, when 10 game balls enter the second grand prize opening 28 in both the 1R round game and the 2R round game, the gauge image becomes full of black areas and the 2nd major prize opening 28 becomes short. During the 3rd to 4th round games that are opened, the words "Charge Complete!" are displayed in the center area of the display screen 70 to notify that the gauge image has become full of black areas ( (See FIG. 14(G)). In addition, during the 5th round game (in which the second big prize opening 28 is briefly opened), the words "The battle is won and the fierce battle RUSH begins!!" are displayed in the center area of the display screen 70 ( (See FIG. 14(H)).

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 14, although the round number indicating the number of the round game currently being played is not displayed, each time the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28, The black area in the gauge image increases. Therefore, the player can grasp the progress of the jackpot game based on the degree of accumulation of black areas in the gauge image.

In this way, when the 5R round game in the jackpot game of 5R probability variable A ends, during the ending period of the jackpot game, a "challenge mode" that does not notify whether it is a "probability variable gaming state" or a "time saving gaming state" is set. In order to notify the start of the performance in the production mode named ``Challenge Mode Entering!'', the words ``Challenge Mode Entering!'' are displayed in large size in the center area of the display screen 70, and the voice ``Challenge Mode Entering!'' It is output from the speaker 38.

As is clear from the explanation so far based on FIG. 14, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the V winning hole 287 during an effective round game, when this is notified (see FIG. 13(D)), and there are cases where this notification is not made. For this reason, it may be possible to effectively increase expectations for a jackpot among players who recognize that the game will be controlled in a "probable variable gaming state" after a jackpot game ends; Even if the game does not shift to the "probability-variable gaming state," it is possible to make the player expect a shift to the "probability-variable gaming state," and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of round games including a valid round game are executed (see FIGS. 7(A) and (B)), the round game that is being executed can be identified as a round game. The number is not displayed (see Figure 14). For this reason, it becomes difficult to identify whether the round game being executed is a valid round game and then to watch the V winning hole 287 and check whether the game ball has won a V prize or not, which reduces the enjoyment of the game. It is possible to improve effectively.

[About staged suggestions]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the stage suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 will be explained. Here, FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the staged suggestion effect. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table used in the process of determining the number of performances during a period suggested by staged suggestion performances. FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the stage suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S172 of FIG. FIG. 18 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of staged suggestion production. FIG. 19 is a screen diagram illustrating an example of a performance performed after the staged suggestion performance ends.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stage suggestion effect is executed during the period from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect pattern to the elapse of a predetermined period of time (for example, a suggestion period of 3 seconds) in the normal gaming state. may be executed. This stage suggestion performance is a performance that continues up to a predetermined number of stages (“3” in this embodiment) or below, and is a performance that is performed in advance in the same symbol variation as the stage suggestion performance. This is a production that can be suggested.

<Stage suggestion that ends at the first stage>
FIG. 15(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stage suggestion performance that ends at the first stage. The stage suggestion performance that ends at the first stage is a performance that suggests a performance to be performed during the first period (performance during the first period) during the suggestion period, as illustrated in FIG. 15(A). Here, the suggestion period is a period from the start of the symbol variation in which the staged suggestion effect is executed until a predetermined time (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed. The first period is a period from the end of this suggestion period to the end of symbol variation. For example, if variation pattern E (see Fig. 10(B)) with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the first 3 seconds will be the suggestion period, and the remaining 27 seconds (=30 seconds - 3 seconds) is the first period.

When such a stage suggestion performance that ends at the first stage is executed, a success performance or a failure performance is performed as illustrated in FIG. 15(A). Here, if a successful performance is executed after the stage suggestion performance that ends in the first stage, while the performance suggested by the stage suggestion performance that ends in the first stage is executed during the first period, If a failure performance is executed after a stage suggestion performance that ends in the first stage, the performance suggested by the stage suggestion performance that ends in the first stage is not executed in the first period. That is, the stage suggestion performance and the failure performance that end at the first stage function as so-called false performances.

<Stage suggestion that ends at the second stage>
FIG. 15(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stage suggestion performance that ends at the second stage. As illustrated in FIG. 15(B), the stage-suggesting performance that ends in the second stage includes a performance performed during the first period (during the first period) and a performance performed during the second period. A production that suggests (a production during the second period) during the suggestion period, where the first stage production suggests the production during the first period, and the second stage production suggests the production during the second period. . Here, the suggested period is the same period as described above based on FIG. 15(A). The first period is a period from the end of this suggestion period until the start of a second period, and the second period is a period from the end of the first period to the end of symbol fluctuation. For example, if variation pattern B (see FIG. 10(A)) with a variation time of 55 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the first 3 seconds will be the suggestion period, and the following 26 seconds (= (55-3)÷2) is the first period, and the remaining 26 seconds (=(55-3)÷2) is the second period.

When such a stage suggestion performance that ends in the second stage is executed, as in the case where a stage suggestion performance that ends in the first stage is executed, as illustrated in FIG. 15(B), a success performance or A failure performance is executed. Here, if a successful performance is executed after a stage suggestion performance that ends at the second stage, the performance suggested by the first stage performance of the stage suggestion performance is executed during the first period, and the stage suggestion performance ends. The performance suggested by the second stage performance is executed during the second period. On the other hand, if a failure performance is executed after the stage suggestion performance that ends in the second stage, the two performances suggested by the stage suggestion performance that ends in the second stage are executed in each of the first period and the second period. It has the characteristic that it never happens. That is, the stage suggestion performance and failure performance that end at the second stage function as fake performances, similar to the stage suggestion performance and failure performance that end at the first stage.

<Stage suggestion that ends at the 3rd stage>
FIG. 15(C) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stage suggestion performance that ends at the third stage. As illustrated in FIG. 15(C), the stage-suggesting performance that ends in the third stage includes a performance performed during the first period (during the first period) and a performance performed during the second period. (a performance during the second period) and a performance to be performed during the third period (a performance during the third period) during the suggestion period, and the performance during the first period is performed by the first stage performance. The second stage performance suggests a performance during the second period, and the third stage performance suggests a performance during the third period. Here, the suggested period is the same period as described above based on FIG. 15(A). The first period is the period from the end of this suggestion period until the start of the second period, the second period is the period from the end of the first period until the start of the third period, and the second period is the period from the end of the first period until the start of the third period, The period is a period from the end of the second period to the end of symbol variation. For example, if variation pattern D (see FIG. 10(A)) with a variation time of 90 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the first 3 seconds will be the suggestion period, and the following 29 seconds (= (90-3) ÷ 3) is the first period, 29 seconds following this first period (= (90-3) ÷ 3) is the second period, and 29 seconds following this second period (= (90-3) -3)÷3) is the third period.

When such a stage suggestion performance that ends at the third stage is executed, the stage suggestion performance that ends at the first stage or the stage suggestion performance that ends at the second stage is executed, as shown in FIG. 15(C). A success performance or a failure performance is executed as illustrated in . Here, if a successful performance is executed after the stage suggestion performance that ends at the third stage, the performance suggested by the first stage performance of the stage suggestion performance is executed during the first period, and the stage suggestion performance ends. The performance suggested by the second-stage performance is executed during the second period, and the performance suggested by the third-stage performance of the stage-suggested performance is executed during the third period. On the other hand, if a failure performance is executed after the stage suggestion performance that ends in the third stage, the three performances suggested by the stage suggestion performance that ends in the third stage will be executed in each of the first to third periods. It has the characteristic that it never happens. In other words, stage suggestion performances and failure performances that end at the third stage are false performances, similar to the stage suggestion performances and failure performances that end at the first stage, and the stage suggestion performances and failure performances that end at the second stage. functions as

By the way, if the reach effect is executed during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, there is a possibility of a jackpot, so in such a case, the stage suggestion effect (which functions as a false effect) and the failure I don't like to stage things. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern for jackpot described above based on FIG. 10(A) or the variation pattern for reach loss described above based on FIG. 10(B) is selected, the above three types When performing any of the stage suggestion performances, the success performance is always executed without executing the failure performance after the stage performance. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the stage suggestion performance and the success performance that end in any of the first to third stages function as reach confirmation performance, which increases the player's ability to receive a jackpot. It is possible to effectively improve expectations.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern for no-reach loss described above is selected based on FIG. 10(C), the reach effect will not be executed. This is undesirable, and it becomes impossible to make the stage suggestion performance and success performance function as reach confirmation performance. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a variation pattern for no-reach loss is selected, a failure performance is always performed without performing a success performance after the staged suggestion performance.

In addition, when the variation pattern L (see FIG. 10(C)) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 4 seconds is selected and the stage suggestion production and failure production are executed, a falling eye will be shown immediately after the failure production. The effect pattern will be stopped and displayed, which is not desirable for the effect. In addition, when the variation pattern J (see FIG. 10(C)) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 13 seconds is selected, and the variation pattern K (see FIG. 10(C)) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 8 seconds is selected, If the configuration is such that stage suggestion performances and failure performances are executed both when (see (C)) is selected, the appearance rate of stage suggestion performances and failure performances that function as fake performances will become higher than necessary. , there is a possibility that the performance effect of the step-suggestive performance may actually be reduced.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern J (see FIG. 10(C)) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 13 seconds is selected, a stage suggestion production and a failure production are executed, and the variation A configuration is adopted in which when pattern K or variation pattern L is selected, stage suggestion performance and failure performance are not performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that step-suggestion performances and failure performances occur frequently, resulting in discomfort to the player.

<About selecting the number of performances during the period>
The sub ROM 92 contains a table for jackpots that is referred to by the sub CPU 91 when determining the number of effects during the period suggested by the stage suggestion effect, in other words, how many stages the stage suggestion effect should ultimately be continued. The table for selecting the number of performances during the period (see Figure 16 (A)), the table for selecting the number of performances during the period for losing in reach (see Figure 16 (B)), and the table for selecting the number of performances during the period for losing in reach (see Figure 16 (C) ) are stored. When the sub CPU 91 receives a fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol determination transmitted from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 receives information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the fluctuation start command, The number of performances during the period is determined based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol and the above three types of selection tables for the number of performances during the period.

(About selecting the number of performances during the period in case of a jackpot)
The table for selecting the number of performances during the jackpot period illustrated in FIG. This is a table for selecting the number of performances during the period. When the sub CPU 91 receives a variation start command including information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot", the sub CPU 91 updates the random number as appropriate every time the random number update process of step S46 in FIG. 49 is performed. Regarding the random number for determining the number of performances during the period, the value at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93. Then, the table for selecting the number of performances during the jackpot period is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93, and the number of performances during the period corresponding to the random number corresponding to the acquired random number for determining the number of performances during the period is set for the jackpot period. The number of performances during the period is determined by reading from the selection table for the number of performances during the period.

In this embodiment, the possible range of the random number for determining the number of performances during the period is set to "0" to "99". On the other hand, in the jackpot selection table for the number of performances during the period, 15 random numbers are associated with the number of performances during the period "1", and 35 random numbers are associated with the number of performances during the period "2". , and 50 random numbers are associated with the number of performances during the period "3". Therefore, the rate at which the number of performances during the period is determined to be "1" is 15% (=15/100x100), and the rate at which the number of performances during the period is determined to be "2" is 35% (=35/ 100×100), and the rate at which the number of performances during the period is determined to be “3” is 50% (=50/100×100).

(Regarding selection of number of performances during the period in case of loss of reach)
The table for selecting the number of effects during the period for reach loss illustrated in FIG. This is a table for selecting the number of performances during the period that is referred to when determined by the CPU 91. When the sub CPU 91 receives a variation start command including information indicating that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "lose" and a variation pattern for reach loss has been selected, or when the above-mentioned "jackpot" is received. Similarly, a random number for determining the number of performances during the period is obtained and stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93. Then, the table for selecting the number of performances during the period for reach loss is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the random number corresponding to the acquired random number for determining the number of performances during the period. The number of performances during the period is determined by reading the number of performances during the period from the reach-loss selection table for the number of performances during the period.

In the reach-loss selection table for the number of performances during the period, as illustrated in FIG. 16(B), the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the number of performances during the period, and (compared with the random number for determining the number of performances during the period) It is associated with a random value. For example, regarding the variation pattern E (see Figure 10 (B)), which is a variation pattern for losing reach, 70 random numbers are associated with the number of performances during the period "1", and the number of performances during the period is "2". 20 random numbers are associated with this, and 10 random numbers are associated with the number of performances during the period "3" (see FIG. 16(B)). Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives a variation start command related to the first special symbol determination that includes information indicating that variation pattern E has been selected by the main CPU 81, the rate at which the number of effects during the period is determined to be "1" is 70% (=70/100 x 100), and the rate at which the number of performances during the period is determined to be "2" is 20% (=20/100 x 100), and the number of performances during the period is determined to be "3". The determined ratio is 10% (=50/100×100).

On the other hand, for example, regarding the variation pattern H (see FIG. 10(B)), which is a variation pattern for losing reach, 20 random values are associated with the number of performances during the period "1", and the number of performances during the period "1" is associated with 20 random values. 2" is associated with 20 random numbers, and the number of performances during the period "3" is associated with 10 random numbers (see FIG. 16(B)). Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives a fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol determination that includes information indicating that the fluctuation pattern H has been selected by the main CPU 81, the rate at which the number of performances during the period is determined to be "1" is 20% (=20/100 x 100), and the rate at which the number of performances during the period is determined to be "2" is 30% (=30/100 x 100), and the number of performances during the period is determined to be "3". The determined ratio is 50% (=50/100×100).

Regarding the trends in determining the number of performances during the period, the following can be said. In other words, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "Jackpot", a large value is likely to be selected as the number of performances during the period (see FIG. 16(A)), and the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is When it is a "lose" and a variation pattern for reach loss is selected, as the variation time becomes longer, a larger value is more likely to be selected as the number of performances during the period. From this, it can be said that when the jackpot reliability is relatively high, a large value is likely to be selected as the number of performances during the period.In other words, it can be said that the stage suggestion performance is likely to continue up to a higher stage.

Therefore, instead of stage-suggestive performances that end at the first stage (see Figure 15(A)), stage-suggestive performances that end at the second stage (see Figure 15(B)) and stage-suggestive performances that end at the third stage. By executing (see FIG. 15(C)), it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for a jackpot.

(Regarding the selection of the number of performances during the period in case of no reach and loss)
In the table for selecting the number of performances during the period for no-reach loss, which is exemplified in FIG. This is a table for selecting the number of performances during the period that is referred to when it is determined by the sub CPU 91 to execute. When the sub CPU 91 receives a variation start command including information indicating that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "loss" and a variation pattern for a no-reach loss has been selected, the sub CPU 91 receives the above-mentioned "jackpot". As in the case, a random number for determining the number of performances during the period is obtained and stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93. Then, the table for selecting the number of performances during the period for no reach loss is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol corresponds to the random number corresponding to the acquired random number for determining the number of performances during the period. The number of performances during a period is determined by reading out the assigned number of performances during a period from a table for selecting the number of performances during a period for no-reach loss.

In the table for selecting the number of performances during the period for no reach loss, as illustrated in FIG. ) is associated with a random value. For example, regarding the variation pattern J (see FIG. 10(C)), which is a variation pattern for no-reach losses, 55 random values are associated with the number of performances during the period "1", and the number of performances during the period "2". ” is associated with 35 random numbers, and the number of performances during the period “3” is associated with 10 random numbers (see FIG. 16(C)). Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives a variation start command related to the first special symbol determination that includes information indicating that variation pattern J has been selected by the main CPU 81, the rate at which the number of productions during the period is determined to be "1" is 55% (= 55/100 x 100), and the percentage that the number of productions during the period is determined to be "2" is 35% (= 35/100 x 100), and the number of productions during the period is determined to be "3". The determined ratio is 10% (=50/100×100).

On the other hand, regarding fluctuation patterns K and L, which are fluctuation patterns for no-reach losses, random values are not associated with the number of performances during any period, and the number of performances during the period is not selected. , stage suggestion effects, and failure effects are not executed.

(About stage suggestion performance pattern selection process)
Next, the step suggestion effect pattern selection process executed by the sub CPU 91 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the stage suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S172 of FIG. 57, which will be described later. The sub CPU 91 executes the following process following the preview effect pattern setting process in step S164, which will be described later.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 17, the sub CPU 91 acquires and stores a stage suggestion performance random number used in the process of determining whether to execute the stage suggestion performance (step S1721). Specifically, regarding the stage suggestion effect random number that is updated every time the random number update process of step S46 in FIG. is stored in a predetermined area.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether to execute the step suggestion effect based on whether the obtained step suggestion effect random number matches the random number stored in advance in the sub ROM 92 (step S1722). . Here, if it is determined that the step suggestion effect is not to be executed (step S1722: NO), the step suggestion effect pattern setting process ends and the process proceeds to step S174 in FIG. 57.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the stage suggestion effect (step S1722: YES), as described above, the sub CPU 91 acquires the random number for determining the number of effects during the period and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1723). Then, it is determined whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination specified based on the information included in the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80 is a "jackpot" (step S1724), and " If it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S1724: YES), the table for selecting the number of performances during the jackpot period (see FIG. 16(A)) is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1725).

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not a "jackpot" (step S1724: NO), the sub CPU 91 performs a variation start command based on the information included in the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80. Then, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81 is a variation pattern for reach loss (step S1726). Here, if it is determined that the variation pattern is for a reach loss (step S1726: YES), the table for selecting the number of performances during the reach loss period (see FIG. 16(B)) is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1727), if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not for a reach loss (step S1726: NO), that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern for a no-reach loss, the table for selecting the number of performances during the period for a no-reach loss (FIG. 16(C) ) is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1728).

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S1725, the process of step S1727, or the process of step S1728, it executes the process of determining the number of performances during the period (step S1729). The process for determining the number of performances during this period is as described above based on FIGS. 16(A) to 16(C).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 executes a period effect selection process (step S1730). Specifically, when the number of effects during the period is determined to be "1" in the process of step S1729, the effect during the first period described above is selected based on FIG. 15(A). Further, when the number of performances during the period is determined to be "2", the performance during the first period and the performance during the second period described above are selected based on FIG. 15(B). Further, when the number of performances during the period is determined to be "3", the above-mentioned performances during the first period, performances during the second period, and performances during the third period are selected based on FIG. 15(C).

As will be described in detail later, the fluctuation effect pattern setting process in step S163 in FIG. The type and content of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of effect pattern to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. Also, by the advance notice performance pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 57, the performance patterns of various advance notice performances that are executed when the performance symbols are variably displayed in the variable performance pattern set in the process of step S163 are set. Ru. For this reason, the sub CPU 91 determines which effect is to be displayed at which timing based on the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and the preview effect pattern set in the process of step S164. It is possible to specify whether this is done in

When executing a stage-suggesting performance that ends at the first stage (see FIG. 15(A)), the sub CPU 91 refers to the above-mentioned variable performance pattern and preview performance pattern, and determines the performance to be performed during the first period. The specified performance is selected as a performance during the first period (for example, by drawing a lottery using random numbers).

In addition, when executing a stage suggestion performance that ends in the second stage (see FIG. 15(B)), the sub CPU 91 refers to the above-described variable performance pattern and preview performance pattern to be executed during the first period. The performance and the performance executed during the second period are specified. Then, one of the performances to be performed during the first period is selected as the performance during the first period (for example, by performing a lottery using random numbers), and one of the performances to be performed during the second period is selected (for example, by performing a lottery using random numbers). (A lottery using random numbers is conducted) to select the performance during the second period.

Furthermore, when executing a stage suggestion performance that ends at the third stage (see FIG. 15(C)), the sub CPU 91 refers to the above-mentioned variable performance pattern and preview performance pattern to be executed during the first period. A performance, a performance performed during the second period, and a performance performed during the third period are specified. Then, one of the performances to be performed during the first period is selected as the performance during the first period (for example, by performing a lottery using random numbers), and one of the performances to be performed during the second period is selected (for example, by performing a lottery using random numbers). Select one of the performances to be performed during the third period as the performance during the third period (for example, by performing a lottery using random numbers) as the performance during the second period. .

When the sub CPU 91 selects one or more period effects in this manner, it sets information indicating the selection result as a stage suggestion effect pattern, and stores the setting information in the sub RAM 93 (step S1731). In addition, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is a variation pattern for a jackpot or a variation pattern for a reach loss, setting information indicating that a success performance is to be executed after the stage suggestion performance is stored, and a variation pattern for a no reach loss is stored. In the case of a variation pattern of , setting information indicating that a failure performance is to be executed after the stage suggestion performance is stored.

The setting information related to the stage suggestion effect stored in the sub-RAM 93 in this way is included in the variable effect start command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S174 in FIG. The step suggestion effect described above with reference to FIG. 15 is realized by the image and sound control CPU 101 and the lamp CPU 121 performing effect control based on the variation start command transmitted to the board 120.

Although it is not shown in FIG. 17, even if the process proceeds from step S1728 to step S1729, the variation pattern K or L, which is a variation pattern for a no-reach loss, may be used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. If it is selected, the number of effects during the period is not determined in the process of step S1729, so the process of setting the stage suggestion effect pattern ends without executing the process of step S1730 and the process of step S1731.

(Specific example of a stage-suggestive performance that ends at the third stage)
Next, while referring to FIGS. 18 and 19, we will discuss the stage-suggestive performance that ends at the third stage (see Figure 15(C)) and the stage-suggestive performance that will be performed after this stage-suggestive performance (during the first period to third stage). We will explain specific examples of performances during the period, etc.). Here, FIG. 18 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the stage suggestion performance that ends at the third stage, and FIG. 19 is a screen diagram illustrating a performance performed after the stage suggestion performance ends.

Here, explanation will be given using an example where, when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the stage suggestion performance that ends in the third stage described above is performed based on FIG. 15(C) and the like. In the above-mentioned first normal mode, a production pattern consisting of numbers to which no character image is attached is displayed on the display screen 70, whereas in the second normal mode, the production pattern is distinguished from other production patterns. An effect pattern is displayed on the display screen 70, which is composed of a number that allows the number to be played and a character image unique to the number. Specifically, by scrolling each symbol row, one symbol is added with the character image of character A added to the number "1", and a character image of character B is added to the number "2". 2 designs, 3 designs with the character image of character C added to the number "3", 4 designs with the character image of character D added to the number "4", character image of character E with the number "5" 5 symbols with a character image added to the number "6", 6 symbols with a character image of character F added to the number "7", 7 symbols with a character image of character G added to the number "7", a character image added to the number "8" The production symbols of each symbol row are displayed on the display screen 70 so that 8 symbols with the character image of H added thereto and 9 symbols with the character image of character I added to the number "9" are displayed in order. Ru.

Further, in the second normal mode, as in the first normal mode, each symbol column is scrolled downward so that the effect symbols arranged in the vertical direction are displayed in order on the display screen 70. Although not shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, during the variable performance in the second normal mode, a background image dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and BGM dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed. It is output from the speaker 38.

FIG. 18(A) shows that on the display screen 70, one pending icon (for example, a red pending icon: see FIG. 21(A)) is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, and the icon display area 72 is In order to inform you that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the displayed icon is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and "251" is displayed. A state in which a production pattern indicating a winning combination is displayed in a stopped state is illustrated. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, the red pending icon) is executed. For example, the judgment result of this first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is variation pattern D (the reach effect develops in the order of normal reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach). (see FIG. 10(A)) is selected, and furthermore, when it is decided to execute a stage suggestion effect that ends at the third stage in the symbol variation in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in this variation pattern D, The following performances will take place.

That is, in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon (here, the red pending icon), the variable display of the first special symbol starts, and the pending icon display starts. The first pending icon displayed in the area 71 is shifted to the icon display area 72, and scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 18(A) and 18(B)). Then, during the suggestion period from the start of the scroll display of these three symbol rows until a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the first stage of the stage suggestion performance, the second stage of the stage suggestion performance, etc. The performance and the third stage performance are executed in order.

In the first stage production (see FIG. 18(C)), the same character G shown by the character image added to the number "7" making up the 7 symbols is arranged side by side on the left and right, and A performance image (first stage performance image) in which characters "Ten?" are placed below these characters G is displayed in the center of the display screen 70.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a staged suggestion performance is performed, a reach is not actually established unless a successful performance is performed afterwards. Therefore, at least a successful performance is performed. 18(C) to (H)).

In addition, to explain the first stage performance as an example, even if a stage suggesting performance including the first stage performance that suggests that a reach is established, if a successful performance is not performed afterwards, the actual reach will not occur. is never established. For this reason, in the first stage production, instead of using characters such as "7 Ten!" which definitively announces that a reach is achieved with 7 symbols as a production during the first period (reach establishment production), the text "7 Ten!" The first stage effect image is displayed, which is composed of characters including a question mark such as "7 ten?", which suggests that there is a possibility of a reach with the symbol (Figure 18 (C )reference).

In the first stage production illustrated in FIG. 18(C), although the 7 symbol itself is not displayed, the same character image G that is added to the number "7" that makes up the 7 symbol is displayed, and the 7 symbol is Since the first stage effect image representing the characters "7 ten?" indicating that there is a possibility that a reach is established with the 7 symbols is displayed, the player is aware that the effect that a reach is established with the 7 symbols is displayed during the first period. It is possible to easily recognize that it may be executed as a medium performance.

By the way, we believe that, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a first-stage performance image representing the 7 symbols itself is displayed, the player will be able to more clearly recognize that there is a possibility that a reach will be achieved with the 7 symbols. It will be done. However, if such a configuration is adopted too easily, a problem arises in that the player will misinterpret the first stage performance as a reach establishment performance, and as a result, the performance effect of the stage suggestion performance will be significantly reduced. there is a possibility.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when performing a first stage performance that suggests that a reach establishment performance may be performed as a performance during the first period, the performance symbols that have the possibility of forming a reach are A first stage effect image representing some of the constituent elements (in this case, numbers and a character image of the character images) is displayed.

Furthermore, in order to further reduce the possibility of the above problem occurring, in this embodiment, while displaying a production pattern to which a color character image is added, a first stage production image in which the character image is expressed in monochrome is used. A configuration that displays the following information is also adopted.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", that is, when a hit notification performance is executed in a reach performance, a performance that forms a reach The probability that 7 symbols will be selected as a reach symbol is the highest, the probability that 3 symbols will be selected as a reach symbol is the next highest, and the probability that other production symbols will be selected as a reach symbol is set to a low value. ing. In addition, in the case where the judgment result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "loss" and a loss notification performance is executed in the reach performance, contrary to the case where it is a "jackpot", other performance symbols ( 7 symbols and production symbols other than 3 symbols) have the highest probability of being selected as a reach symbol, 3 symbols have the next highest probability of being selected as a reach symbol, and 7 symbols have the lowest probability of being selected as a reach symbol. is set to .

For this reason, the jackpot reliability of the reach effect that establishes a reach with 7 symbols is relatively high, and the first stage effect that suggests that a reach is possible with 7 symbols (Figure 18 ( By executing (see C)), it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for a jackpot.

Up to this point, we have explained the case where there is a possibility that a reach establishment performance will be executed as a performance during the first period, and a first stage performance that suggests this reach establishment performance is executed as an example, but the performance during the first period is It is not limited to the reach establishment performance, but for example, a first stage performance that suggests the execution of a pseudo continuous performance as a performance during the first period, or a step-up notice as a performance during the first period. A first-stage performance that suggests execution of the performance may be executed.

After the first stage performance is performed, the second stage performance (suggesting the performance during the second period) is subsequently performed (see FIG. 18(D)). In Figure 18 (D), in the second period of this symbol change (see Figure 15 (C)), there is a possibility that SP reach will be performed as a performance during the second period, so the characters "SP?" This example shows a second stage performance in which a second stage performance image is displayed.

In addition, here as well, it is not confirmed that SP reach will be executed as a performance during the second period until a successful performance is executed after the stage suggestion performance ends, so SP reach such as "SP!" A second stage effect image is displayed that includes characters such as "SP?" that suggest that SP reach may be executed, rather than characters that definitively suggest that SP reach may be executed.

Also, during the second stage performance (see Figure 18 (D)), during the third stage performance (see Figure 18 (E)), and after the completion of the stage suggestive performance (see Figures 18 (F) to (H)) In order for the player to easily recognize the effects during the first period suggested by the effects of the first stage, the first stage effect includes characters that are common to the characters shown in the first stage effect image (here, "7-ten?"). The first stage corresponding image is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize the performance during the first period suggested by the first stage performance, based on the first stage corresponding image, even after the first stage performance has ended. be.

In addition, here, we have explained an example of a case where a second stage performance is performed that suggests that SP reach may be performed as a performance during the second period, but the performance during the second period is not limited to SP reach. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a second-stage production that suggests execution of a reach development production (for example, a production that notifies that the reach production will develop from normal reach to SP reach) as a production during the second period may be used. Alternatively, a second-stage effect that suggests the execution of an icon change effect as a second period effect may be executed.

After the second stage performance is performed in this way, the third stage performance (suggesting the performance during the third period) is subsequently performed (see FIG. 18(E)). Figure 18 (E) shows that during the third period of this symbol change (see Figure 15 (C)), there is a possibility that a group preview (see Figure 12 (D)) will be performed as a performance during the third period. 3 shows an example of a third stage performance in which a third stage performance image representing some of the plurality of characters appearing in the group preview and the characters "Gun?" is displayed.

In addition, here as well, it is not confirmed that the group preview will be executed as a performance during the third period until the success performance is executed after the stage suggestion performance ends, so the group preview such as "Group!" will not be executed. A third stage effect image is displayed that includes characters such as "Group?" that suggest that there is a possibility that a group preview may be executed, rather than characters that definitively suggest that a group notice may be executed.

In addition, during the third stage production (see Figure 18 (E)) and after the completion of the stage suggestion production (see Figures 18 (F) to (H)), the second period production suggested by the second stage production is also performed. In order for the player to easily recognize the second stage performance image, a second stage corresponding image containing characters common to the characters shown in the second stage performance image (in this case, "SP?") is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the display screen 70. be done.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize the performance during the second period suggested by the second stage performance based on the second stage compatible image even after the second stage performance ends. be.

Furthermore, even after the stage-suggesting performance has ended (see FIGS. 18(F) to 18(H)), the third-stage performance is changed so that the player can easily recognize the performance during the third period suggested by the third-stage performance. A third-stage corresponding image containing characters common to the characters shown in the image (here, "Gun?") is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize the performance during the third period suggested by the third stage performance based on the third stage compatible image even after the third stage performance has ended. be.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 18(F) to (H), the first stage corresponding image showing the characters "7 ten?", the second stage corresponding image showing the characters "SP?", and the second stage corresponding image showing the characters "Gun?" Since the three stage corresponding images of the third stage corresponding image showing the characters ``'' are displayed, the player can decide based on the fact that there are three stage corresponding images displayed immediately after the stage suggestion effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to continue to recognize that the stage suggestion performance has continued up to the third stage, which is the upper limit, even after the stage suggestion performance has ended.

Here, we have explained the case where three stage-corresponding images are displayed in order for the stage-suggestion performance to continue up to the third stage, but if the stage-suggestion performance ends at the first stage, If only the first stage corresponding image is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70 and a stage suggestion effect that ends at the second stage is executed, two stage corresponding images, the first stage corresponding image and the second stage corresponding image, are displayed. The stage-corresponding image will be displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

In addition, here, we have explained the case where a third stage performance is executed which suggests that a group preview may be executed as a performance during the third period, but the performance during the third period is not included in the group preview. For example, the present invention is not limited to this, and suggests the execution of a cut-in (see FIG. 12 (G)) as a performance during the third period (occurs in the latter half of SPSP reach and does not occur during other reach performances). The third stage performance is executed, or the second performance button operation promotion performance (executed in the latter half of SPSP reach and not executed during other reach performances) as a performance during the third period (see Figure 12 (H)) ) is performed, or a third stage performance is performed that suggests the execution of a winning notification performance (see FIG. 12(I)) as a performance during the third period. Sometimes I do.

When the third stage performance is performed in this manner, a character appearance performance is performed that functions as an introduction performance for the above-described success performance and failure performance (see FIG. 18(F)). This character appearance production is a successful production that announces that the production will actually take place during the period suggested by the stage suggestion production, or a notification that the production during the period suggested by the stage suggestion production will not actually take place. This is an effect showing how a character whose role is to notify the user with a failure effect appears on the display screen 70.

FIGS. 18(G) to (H) exemplify how the character appearing in this character appearance effect performs a judge effect (success effect). Specifically, in this judge performance, the first stage compatible image is displayed to ask whether or not a reach with 7 symbols is established, and the second stage compatible image is displayed to ask whether or not it will develop into an SP reach. is displayed, and an image corresponding to the third stage is displayed asking whether or not a group notice will occur, and a character lifts up a placard with the word "YES" written on it. has been done.

In this way, when a production display showing a character lifting up a placard with the characters "YES" written on it is performed, the character switches the placard to a sword, and the characters shown in the first stage corresponding image become "7". "Ten?" changes to "7 Ten!", the characters shown in the second stage compatible image change from "SP?" to "SP!", and the characters shown in the third stage compatible image change from "Group?" to "SP!". Group!'' and the characters ``Get!!'' indicating that the character has acquired these effects are displayed.

In addition, FIGS. 18(G) and (H) show how the judge performance (as a successful performance) is performed with three stage corresponding images, ie, the first stage corresponding image to the third stage corresponding image, being displayed. As shown in the example, if a stage-suggesting effect that ends at the second stage or a stage-suggestive effect that ends at the first stage is performed, the only difference is the number of stage-corresponding images displayed. , a judge performance similar to that illustrated in FIGS. 18(G) and (H) is performed.

On the other hand, if the production (during the period) suggested by the production corresponding to each stage is not actually carried out, the character appearance production illustrated in FIG. 18(F), although not shown in the figure, Next, a judge performance is performed as a failure performance. Specifically, a stage display is performed showing a character appearing in a character appearance raising a placard with the word "NO" written on it, and along with this, a first stage display showing the characters "7-ten?" A stage-corresponding image, a second-stage corresponding image showing the characters "SP?", and a third-stage corresponding image showing the characters "Gun?" are displayed in an effect showing how they crumble. Such a series of performance displays is performed in the same way when a judge performance is performed as a failure performance after a stage suggestion performance that ends at the first stage or a stage suggestion performance that ends at the second stage is performed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 18, when the judge performance as a successful performance is performed, the first stage performance (see FIG. 18(C)) and the first stage corresponding image (illustrated in FIGS. 18(D) to (G)) As the effect during the first period suggested by "7 Ten?"), a reach-achieving effect showing a reach-achieving effect with 7 symbols is performed (see FIG. 18(I)). In addition, in FIG. 18(I), the first stage effect (see FIG. 18(C)) in which the first stage effect image including the characters "7 ten?" and the character G is displayed is performed, and then a successful result is shown. As a result of the effect, a reach effect is shown in which a reach effect is established with 7 symbols. If a successful performance is performed after the first stage performance of displaying a staged performance image is performed, a reach-achieving performance representing a state in which a reach is established with three symbols will be performed.

When the reach effect is performed in this manner, the normal reach (see FIG. 19(A)) is performed first. This normal reach is performed in the same way as the normal reach described above based on FIG. 12(A), except that the structure of the effect pattern is different, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Next, since it is suggested in advance that SP reach will be executed by the second stage of the stage suggestion performance and the success performance, the reach performance will develop from normal reach to SP reach (Figure 19 (See (A) and (B)). The period in which this SP reach is performed is a period included in the second period illustrated in FIG. 15(C), and the SP reach is performed as suggested by the second stage performance. After that, for example, at the end of the SP reach, after a pseudo-loss effect (see Fig. 19 (C)) is performed in which the three effect symbols indicating the reach loss of "787" are pseudo-stopped to make it look like a loss. As a performance for developing the reach performance from SP reach to SPSP reach, a development performance similar to that described above based on FIG. 12(B) is performed (see FIG. 19(D)).

The period in which SPSP reach is performed via this development performance is a period included in the third period illustrated in FIG. 15(C), and the group preview is executed by the third stage performance and success performance. Since this has been suggested in advance, a group preview will occur during the SPSP reach as a performance during the third period (see FIG. 19(F)). Note that this group notice is the same effect as the group notice described above based on FIG. 12(D) except for the generation timing, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Thereafter, when approaching the final stage of SPSP reach, a first performance button operation promotion performance (see FIG. 19(G)) is performed to prompt the player to operate the first performance button 35, and this first performance button operation promotion performance is performed. When the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period, a cut-in occurs (see FIG. 19(H)). Then, at the end of the SPSP reach, a second performance button operation promotion performance (see FIG. 19(I)) is performed that prompts the player to operate the second performance button 36, and this second performance button operation promotion performance is related to When the second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period, a winning notification performance (or a loss notification performance) is executed (see FIG. 19(J)). In addition, here, since the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "jackpot", in response to the operation of the second performance button 36 for the second performance button operation promotion performance. , a winning notification effect is executed.

Up to this point, we have briefly explained the series of performances that take place after reaching the final stage of SPSP reach, with reference to Figures 19 (G) to (J). These performances are shown in Figures 12 (F) to (I). This is done in the same way as described above based on .

(Regarding gaming machine 1 that can execute staged suggestion effects)
Up to this point, we have explained the stage suggestion performance executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment and the performance performed within the same variation after the stage suggestion performance, but such a gaming machine 1 has the following explanations. It can be viewed as a gaming machine.

A determining means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game);
When the determination is made, a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41), and then a special symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. A symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 81 that controls the first special symbol display 41),
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling execution of production,
The performance control means is
Displaying a performance pattern in a variable manner as the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and stop displaying a performance pattern that notifies the result of the determination as the special pattern stops being displayed;
During the variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to establish a reach based on the effect pattern and execute a predetermined reach effect (for example, a normal reach illustrated in FIG. 19(A)),
During the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the performance symbols until the reach is achieved by the performance symbols, a performance display is performed in which a performance symbol that establishes the reach is specified (e.g., the stage illustrated in FIG. 18(C)). Execute the first stage of suggestive performance),
When the effect display is executed, after establishing a reach based on the effect symbol suggested by the effect display, execute the predetermined reach effect (see FIGS. 18(I) and 19(A)),
It is better when a reach is achieved by the first effect symbol (for example, 7 symbols) than when a reach is established by the second effect symbol (for example, any of the 1 to 6 symbols, 8 symbols, or 9 symbols). A gaming machine characterized in that the special game has a high possibility of being executed.

According to the gaming machine 1 having such a configuration, before a reach is established, a performance display that allows identification of the performance symbols that establish a reach (for example, a first stage performance of a stage suggestion performance: FIG. 18(C)) is provided. ) is executed and a reach with the first effect symbol (e.g., 7 symbols) is achieved, than when a reach with the second effect symbol (e.g., an effect symbol other than the 7 symbol) is achieved. is likely to be carried out. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that a performance display that allows the first performance symbol to be identified rather than the second performance symbol will be executed.

(Other configurations related to staged suggestion production)
Regarding the staged suggestion performance, the following configuration may be adopted.
That is, in this embodiment, in the first stage of the stage suggestion production, a part of the production pattern (in this embodiment, a character image forming the production pattern) that is displayed as a reach pattern when a reach is established is displayed. The case where the display is displayed is explained as an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, a first stage performance image representing the performance pattern itself (that is, the entire performance pattern) to be displayed as a ready-to-win pattern may be displayed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the player from misperceiving the first stage performance as a reach effect, for example, a first stage performance image is displayed in which the performance symbols displayed in color as reach symbols are expressed in monochrome. Alternatively, it is preferable to also adopt a configuration in which a first-stage performance image is displayed in which the numbers and character images forming the performance pattern to be displayed as the ready-to-win pattern are separated.

Furthermore, in FIG. 18, an example is given in which a first-stage performance is performed in which the player can identify the performance symbol in a situation where there is a possibility that a reach is established using the performance symbol composed of numbers and character images. I gave an explanation. On the other hand, for example, there is a situation in which there is a possibility that a reach can be achieved by a production pattern that is composed of numbers, a character image added to the numbers, and a panel image that functions as a background for the numbers and character images. Below, the player may perform a first stage performance in which the player can specify the ready-to-reach symbols.

In this case, as the first stage effect, for example, it is possible to display a first stage effect image that is similar to the effect image with only the numbers removed. With this configuration, since the first stage effect image shows the character image and panel image that are common to the ready-to-reach symbols, it is possible for the player to easily identify the ready-to-reach symbol based on the first stage effect image. It is. In addition, since this first stage effect image does not include the numbers that constitute the effect symbol as a reach symbol, the display content is different from the actual reach symbol, and the effect that displays the first stage effect image is a reach establishment effect. It is also possible to easily prevent the problem that the player may misunderstand that the game is the same.

In addition, when the effect pattern displayed as a reach pattern is composed of numbers, character images, and panel images, the first stage effect that represents the numbers and character images but does not represent the panel image. An image may be displayed, or a first stage effect image that represents numbers and a panel image but does not represent a character image may be displayed. Further, a first stage effect image representing any one of the three components (numbers, character images, panel images) constituting the effect image may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first stage performance (see FIG. 18(C)) in a state where scrolling display is performed for all three symbol rows increases the possibility that a reach is established with a predetermined performance symbol. The explanation was given using as an example a case in which it is suggested that there is a hit, and the subsequent successful performance confirms the reach establishment (with the performance symbol suggested by the first stage performance). On the other hand, in other embodiments, for example, in a situation where the seven symbols included in the left column are pseudo-stopped on the display screen 70, and the symbol columns in the right column and the middle column continue to be scrolled, In the case where a first stage performance suggesting 7 symbols is performed, a configuration may be adopted in which reach establishment with 7 symbols is determined at the time the first stage performance is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the stage suggestion performance (and successful performance) is executed during the suggestion period from the start of the symbol variation in which the stage suggestion performance is performed until a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. did. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the period from the start of the symbol variation in which the staged suggestion effect is performed until the reach is achieved by the production pattern is defined as the suggestion period, and during this suggestion period, the staged suggestion effect (and the success It is also possible to perform the following.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, a case where the stage suggestion performance that ends at the third stage suggests the performance during the first period, the performance during the second period, and the performance during the third period in the same order as the actual execution order. explained. On the other hand, in other embodiments, for example, the first stage performance suggests a performance during the third period, the second stage performance suggests a performance during the first period, and the third stage performance suggests a performance during the first period. The effects during the period may be suggested in a different order from the actual order of execution, such as suggesting effects during two periods.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the upper limit of the number of stages of the stage suggestion performance is "3" has been explained as an example, but the upper limit of the number of stages of the stage suggestion performance is not limited to "3", but may be "2" or " It may be 4" or more. Alternatively, the upper limit of the number of stages may be set to "1" so that the stage suggestion performance is not continued in stages.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the success effect or the failure effect is executed after the step suggestion effect is executed, and only when the success effect is executed, the effect during the period suggested by the step suggestion effect is actually executed. We have explained the case where On the other hand, in other embodiments, if a stage suggestion performance is executed with a configuration in which no success performance or failure performance is performed, the performance during the period suggested by the stage suggestion performance is always within the same fluctuation. A configuration in which the program is executed may also be adopted.

In addition, although the case where the stage suggestion performance is executed when the performance is controlled in the second performance mode is explained as an example, the stage suggestion performance is executed when the performance is controlled in the first performance mode. You may also do so. In this case, in the first production mode, a production pattern consisting of numbers to which no character image is attached is displayed, so the numbers (for example, "3") forming the production pattern are displayed in color. On the other hand, the first stage effect image that expresses the number in monochrome may be displayed, or the first stage effect image may be displayed that expresses the above number in a different form, such as "Maybe 3 will reach?" All you have to do is

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the staged suggestion performance is executed based on the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment was explained as an example, but in other embodiments, it is possible to deal with the suspended right of the first special symbol judgment. Based on the preliminary judgment result, before the start of the prefetch target variation (the first special symbol variation display that is started in response to the execution of the suspended first special symbol judgment), a staged suggestion production is performed. may be executed. Furthermore, the staged suggestion effect may be executed using both the period until the prefetch target variation is started and the period from the start of the prefetch target variation until a predetermined time has elapsed.

[About final notification performance]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the confirmation notification performance executed by the gaming machine 1 will be explained. Here, FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the characteristics of each confirmed notification performance that can be executed by the gaming machine 1. In addition, the effect means used in FIG. 20 are the effect means used for each confirmed notification effect listed in the effect type column, "image display" means the display screen 70, and "speaker" means the speaker. 38, "lamp" means the frame lamp 37 and board lamp 5, and "vibration" means the vibration motor 128. Also, "〇" in "image display", "speaker", "lamp", and "vibration" means that the production means is used, and "-" means that the production means is not used. It means. For example, if the "Image display" and "Speaker" columns are "○" and the "Lamp" and "Vibration" columns are "-", the frame lamp 37, panel lamp 5, and vibration motor 128 are used. This means that the final notification performance using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 is executed without any need for a final notification.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game is to be executed, the sub CPU 91 executes a winning notification effect (see FIG. 12(I)). In addition, when the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game will be executed, the sub CPU 91 executes the jackpot game prior to the above winning notification effect (in other words, executes the winning notification effect). A definite notification effect may be executed to definitively notify the user. In this way, the confirmed notification performance is a performance that notifies you in advance that the winning notification performance will be executed, so it has the characteristic that it will not be executed if the winning notification performance is not performed.

As illustrated in FIG. 20, this definite notification performance is divided into a definite notification performance that is executed when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, and a definite notification performance that is executed when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is classified into a confirmed notification performance that is executed during the execution of the jackpot game, and a confirmed notification performance that is executed during the execution of the jackpot game.

<Confirmed notification performance in normal gaming state>
As illustrated in FIG. 20, the confirmed notification effects executed when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state include an icon display effect of the confirmed notification mode, a preview effect of the confirmed notification mode, and a preview effect of the confirmed notification mode. There is a title display effect, a cut-in during a specific reach, a first shot announcement effect, a second first shot announcement effect, a confirmation button effect, a special character appearance effect, and a strong button vibration effect.

When the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, it is difficult to place a game ball in the second starting port 22, so the player hits the ball to the left aiming at the first starting port 21. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol determination is not executed, and basically, the first special symbol determination is executed. The final notification performance in the normal gaming state is the result of the first special symbol judgment that is executed on the condition that the game ball has entered the first starting port 21 while the game is being controlled in the normal gaming state. This is executed on the condition that the game becomes a "big hit" and that the user wins the performance lottery executed by the sub CPU 91 using the confirmed notification performance random number (see step S1662 in FIG. 61). In other words, the conditions for executing the confirmed notification performance in the normal gaming state are that the judgment result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", and that you win the performance lottery using the confirmed notification performance random number. be.

However, in the normal gaming state, there is a guaranteed notification performance that definitely notifies you of a guaranteed variable jackpot, and one of the execution conditions for this confirmed notification presentation is that the type of jackpot is a guaranteed variable jackpot. Become.

(Icon display effect of confirmed notification mode)
The icon display performance in the final notification mode is a final notification performance that is performed using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 without using the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, or the vibration motor 128. Specifically, the icon display effect of this confirmed notification mode is a display effect that displays a rainbow-colored pending icon (or the rainbow-colored icon), and the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol). It is performed during the time or during the variable display of the first special symbol (and production symbol).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change performance is performed that targets the pending icon or the icon. Display performance is realized. The first icon change effect is to change the display color of the pending icon to (rainbow This is an icon change effect that changes the display color (from a display color other than color) to a rainbow color. In the second icon change production, since the first special symbol (and production symbol) corresponding to the icon currently displayed in the icon display area 72 is being displayed in a variable manner, This is an icon change effect that changes the display color of the displayed pending icon to a rainbow color (from a display color other than rainbow color).

The third icon change performance is when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 in a state where the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and the right to judge the first special symbol is not reserved. This is an icon change effect in which a rainbow-colored icon is newly displayed in the icon display area 72 in accordance with the event. The fourth icon change effect is to change the display color of the icon (other than rainbow color) as the pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as a new icon. This is an icon change effect that changes the display color to a rainbow color. The fifth icon change performance is during the pre-reach performance, when the reach is established, at the timing when the reach performance develops from one reach performance to another, at a predetermined timing during a predetermined reach performance (for example, SPSP reach), etc. , is an icon change effect in which the display color of the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is changed to rainbow color (from a display color other than rainbow color).

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the icon change effect is executed by the icon change effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 50) of step S517, which is executed in response to the sub CPU 91 receiving the hold command from the main control board 80. The effect pattern is set, and in this icon change effect pattern setting process, the rainbow color is selected as the final display color of the icon, thereby realizing the icon display effect of the final notification mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the icon display performance of such a final notification mode is performed on the display screen 70, a special performance sound dedicated to the icon display performance of the final notification mode is outputted from the speaker 38 as an example. As will be explained, in addition to this, for example, during a period from when the display color of the icon changes to a rainbow color until a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 or both Either one may be emitted in a rainbow color, or the vibration motor 128 may be driven to vibrate the first effect button 35.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon display effect of the confirmed notification mode can be executed even if the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is either "probable variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot". As will be explained, in other embodiments, an icon display performance of a definite notification mode is executed for some cases of a "probable strange jackpot", while an icon display performance of a definite notification mode is executed for a "normal jackpot". A configuration in which the process is not executed may also be adopted.

(Pre-announcement performance of confirmed notification mode)
The preview performance in the final notification mode is a final notification performance that is performed using the display screen 70, the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, and the panel lamp 5 without using the vibration motor 128. There are multiple preview performances that function as preview performances for this final notification mode, such as a production that displays a cut-in image expressed using rainbow colors, a production that displays a button image expressed using rainbow colors, Examples include an effect that displays the number of steps expressed using rainbow colors, and an effect that displays a background image expressed using rainbow colors.

The effect of displaying a cut-in image expressed using rainbow colors is as follows.
That is, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, when approaching the final stage of SPSP reach, the first performance button operation promotion performance (see FIG. 12(F)) is executed, and this first performance button operation promotion performance is executed. In response to the operation of the first effect button 35 for effect, a cut-in is generated in which a predetermined cut-in image is displayed superimposed on the effect image displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12(G)). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, a cut-in image that includes five characters and is expressed using rainbow colors is displayed on the display screen 70. A rainbow cut-in that is superimposed on the effect image may occur.

Note that, as described above based on FIG. 12(G) and the like, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, one of three types of cut-in occurs: green cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in. These cut-ins may occur both when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is a "big hit" and a "loss". On the other hand, in order to make the above rainbow cut-in function as a preview performance (a preview performance with 100% jackpot reliability) that functions as a confirmed notification performance, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is It has a different feature from the above three types of cut-ins, in that it occurs in some cases where the cut-in is a "miss" and does not occur when the cut-in is a "miss".

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first performance button operation promotion performance illustrated in FIG. , is never executed during SP reach. Further, if the first performance button 35 is not operated during the valid period during which this first performance button operation promotion performance is performed, a cut-in will not occur. Therefore, the rainbow cut-in occurs at the timing when the first performance button 35 is operated during the period of validity related to the first performance button operation promotion performance while the first special symbol is being displayed while the SPSP reach is executed. It has the characteristic that it is only executed. Therefore, for example, a rainbow cut-in will not occur immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state or during the variable display of the first special symbol in which SPSP reach is not performed. This also applies to the above three types of cut-ins.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which a cut-in does not occur unless the first performance button 35 is operated during the validity period related to the above-mentioned first performance button operation promotion performance, but in other embodiments Even if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period, a cut-in (one of the above three types of cut-ins and a rainbow cut-in) is generated at the end of the valid period. good.

The effect of displaying a button image expressed using rainbow colors is as follows.
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the first effect button operation promotion effect (for example, FIG. 12(F) ) or a second effect button operation promotion effect (for example, see FIG. 12(H)) that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 36, the first effect button image expressed using rainbow colors is It may be displayed during the first performance button operation promotion performance, or a second performance button image expressed using rainbow colors may be displayed during the second performance button operation promotion performance.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first effect button image is expressed using the same color (normal color) as the actual color of the first effect button 35 during the validity period related to the first effect button operation promotion effect. is displayed, a case where a first effect button image expressing the first effect button 35 using red is displayed, and a case where a first effect button image expressing the first effect button 35 using rainbow colors is displayed. It may be displayed. The color of these first effect button images represents the jackpot reliability, and when the red first effect button image is displayed, it is more likely to be a jackpot than when the normal color first effect button image is displayed. High reliability. Moreover, the jackpot reliability is higher when the rainbow-colored first effect button image is displayed than when the red first effect button image is displayed.

In addition, the normal color first production button image and the red first production button image are the judgment results of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol accompanied by the first production button operation promotion production. It is displayed whether it is a "jackpot" or a "loss". On the other hand, the rainbow-colored first effect button image is displayed in some cases when there is a "jackpot" in order to function as a preview effect (a preview effect with 100% jackpot reliability) that functions as a confirmed notification effect. , it has a different feature from the normal color first effect button image and the red first effect button image that it is not displayed if it is a "loss".

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the validity period related to the second performance button operation promotion performance, the second performance is expressed using the same color (normal color) as the actual color of the second performance button 36. A case where a button image is displayed, a case where a second effect button image expressing the second effect button 36 using red color is displayed, and a case where a second effect button image expressing the second effect button 36 using rainbow colors are displayed. Images may be displayed. The color of these second effect button images represents the jackpot reliability, and when the red second effect button image is displayed, it is more likely to be a jackpot than when the normal color second effect button image is displayed. High reliability. Moreover, the jackpot reliability is higher when the rainbow-colored second effect button image is displayed than when the red second effect button image is displayed.

In addition, the normal color second performance button image and the red second performance button image are the judgment results of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol accompanied by the second performance button operation promotion performance. It is displayed whether it is a "jackpot" or a "loss". On the other hand, the rainbow-colored second effect button image is displayed in some cases of a "jackpot" in order to function as a preview effect (a preview effect with 100% jackpot reliability) that functions as a confirmed notification effect. , it has a different feature from the normal color second effect button image and the red second effect button image that it is not displayed if it is a "loss".

Note that the effect of displaying these first effect button images (or second effect button images) in rainbow colors is to encourage the player to operate the first effect button 35 (or second effect button 36). , is performed during the valid period related to the first performance button operation promotion performance (or first performance button operation promotion performance), but is not performed outside the validity period (for example, immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol) There is a characteristic that

Although not shown in the drawings, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first performance button operation is promoted even during the SPSP reach, such as during the pre-reach performance or during the normal reach, and the first performance button is pressed. A predetermined performance is performed in response to the operation 35. For example, when the first performance button 35 is operated in response to the first performance button operation promotion performed during the pre-reach performance, a preview performance called a line preview in which a predetermined character utters a line may be performed. For this reason, regarding the promotion of the first effect button operation other than during such SPSP reach, an effect may be performed in which the first effect button image is displayed in a rainbow color.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example will be explained in which the first effect button image and the second effect button image are displayed in rainbow colors as a preview effect that functions as a confirmed notification effect, but the same effect as these effect button images is used. For example, it is possible to further display a first effect button image expressing the first effect button 35 using gold, or a second effect button image expressing the second effect button 36 using gold as the effect button image. good.

The production of displaying the number of steps expressed using rainbow colors is as follows.
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the step-up notice described above based on FIG. 11(C) etc. may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. This step-up notice is a notice performance that is performed, for example, during the pre-reach performance, and the display mode of the performance image related to the step-up notice is changed in stages, and the performance sound related to the step-up notice is output from the speaker 38. It's a performance.

In this step-up notice, the characters "STEP1" are displayed during the step 1 performance, and the characters "STEP 2" are displayed during the step 2 performance, in order to clearly inform you of which stage of the performance is being performed. is displayed, and during the performance of step 3, characters indicating the current stage number are displayed, such as the characters "STEP 3" are displayed.

When such a step-up notice is given, the characters indicating the current stage number are usually displayed in black. On the other hand, for some cases where the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol for which a step-up notice is given is a "jackpot", the current number of stages is shown. Text is displayed in rainbow colors.

Here, the effect of displaying the characters indicating the current stage number in black is that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol where the step-up notice is given is a "jackpot". It is possible to carry out both cases where there is a problem and cases where there is a “loss”. On the other hand, a production that displays characters indicating the current number of steps in rainbow colors (a production that displays the number of steps expressed using rainbow colors) is a production that functions as a final notification production, so " It is characterized in that it is executed in some cases when it is a ``big hit'', but not executed when it is a ``loss''.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the characters "STEP1", "STEP2", and "STEP3" that are displayed as the step-up notice changes from step 1 to step 3 are all changed. An example will be explained in which the characters are displayed in rainbow colors, but in other embodiments, for example, the characters "STEP 1" are displayed in black, the characters "STEP 2" are displayed in black, and the characters "STEP 3" are displayed in rainbow colors. For example, only the characters indicating the final step number may be displayed in rainbow colors.

The effect of displaying a background image expressed using rainbow colors is as follows.
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is either a "jackpot" or a "loss". However, basically, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, a background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the background image is displayed on the display screen 70. A background image dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and a background image dedicated to the third normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70 when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode.

On the other hand, in some cases where the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment above is a "jackpot", a special background image expressed using rainbow colors is displayed instead of a background image dedicated to each normal mode. displayed on screen 70. Specifically, a first background change in which a background image dedicated to any normal mode (for example, a background image dedicated to the first normal mode) changes to a special background image with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Or, in the middle of the variable display of the first special symbol, a second background change in which a dedicated background image in any normal mode changes to a special background image is performed.

In addition, since the performance that displays the special background image in this way is a performance that functions as a final notification performance, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state If it is a "lose", the first background change is not performed at the start of this symbol variation, nor is the second background change performed during this symbol variation.

Up to this point, the preview performances of the final notification mode have been a production that displays a cut-in image expressed using rainbow colors, a production that displays a button image expressed using rainbow colors, and a production that displays a button image expressed using rainbow colors. The effects of displaying the number of steps and the effect of displaying a background image expressed using rainbow colors have been described, but these preview effects of the final notification mode are performed when the sub CPU 91 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 80. In the preview effect pattern setting process of step S164 (see FIG. 57), which is executed in response to the change, a effect pattern for displaying an effect image expressed using rainbow colors is selected, and a variation including information indicating the selection result is selected. This is realized by transmitting a production start command to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Further, in this embodiment, when the preview performance of the confirmed notification mode is performed using the display screen 70, a special performance sound dedicated to the preview performance of the confirmed notification mode is output from the speaker 38, and the preview performance of the confirmed notification mode is outputted from the speaker 38. An example will be explained in which the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 are made to emit light in a dedicated light emission pattern, but in addition to this, in other embodiments, the vibration motor 128 may be driven at the execution timing of a notice effect in the final notification mode. The first effect button 35 may also be caused to vibrate.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the preview performance of the confirmed notification mode can be executed regardless of whether the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "probable variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot". However, in other embodiments, a preview performance in a confirmed notification mode is executed for some cases of a "probable and strange jackpot", while a preview display in a confirmed notification mode is not executed in the case of a "normal jackpot". configuration may be adopted.

(Title display performance of confirmed notification mode)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the start of SPSP reach, for example, a title such as "VS Enemy character be done. This title is sometimes displayed in black and sometimes in red, and the jackpot reliability of the production that displays the black title (black title) is set to about 20%, and the red title (red title) is set to about 20%. The jackpot reliability of the performance that displays the title) is set at approximately 45%.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state where SPSP reach is performed is a "jackpot" In some cases, at the start of SPSP Reach, an effect may be performed in which the above title is displayed in rainbow colors. The jackpot reliability of this rainbow title display is 100%, and as mentioned above, it is executed in some cases of "jackpot", but it is not executed in case of "loss". .

In addition, in this embodiment, the title display performance (the display of a rainbow title) in the final notification mode uses only the display screen 70 without using the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, or the vibration motor 128. However, in other embodiments, at least one of the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 is further used to perform the final notification mode. A title display effect may also be executed.

(Cut-in during specific reach)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, a cut-in occurs in response to the operation of the first performance button 35 for the first performance button operation promotion performance during SPSP reach. On the other hand, without the first performance button operation promotion performance being performed, a cut representing a special character (special character) is made during normal reach or SP reach, regardless of the player's operation on the first performance button 35. A special character cut-in may occur in which the in-image is superimposed on the currently displayed effect image.

This special character cut-in basically occurs during SP reach, and if the special character cut-in occurs during SP reach, the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the special character cut-in does not occur during SP reach. It is characterized by a high degree of That is, the special character cut-in functions as a chance-up effect during SP reach.

On the other hand, when a normal reach is performed in conjunction with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, regarding some cases where the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of this symbol fluctuation is a "jackpot" , a special character cut-in occurs during normal reach. In addition, since this special character cut-in is a performance that functions as a confirmed notification performance, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose", the special character cut-in will occur during SP reach. However, it does not occur during normal reach.

In this way, since the special character cut-in during the normal reach functions as a final notification effect, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the special character cut-in to occur during the normal reach.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which a special effect sound exclusively for the special character cut-in is output from the speaker 38 as the effect image related to the special character cut-in is displayed on the display screen 70. The presentation means used for the special character cut-in is not limited to the display screen 70 and the speaker 38; for example, at least one of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 may also be used. A special character cut-in may also be executed.

(First shot announcement performance)
The first notification performance is a first special symbol that is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot". Immediately after the start of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol or when a ready-to-win is established during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, this is a performance that definitively notifies that the winning notification performance will be executed. Specifically, this first shot announcement effect is an effect that causes some of the color LEDs constituting the panel lamp 5 to emit light in rainbow colors and outputs a predetermined one shot announcement sound from the speaker 38.

In addition, this first hit notification performance, like other confirmed notification performances, is a performance that definitively announces a "jackpot" prior to the hit notification performance, so the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment described above It has the characteristic that it is executed in some cases when there is a "jackpot", but it is not executed when it is a "loss".

(Second first announcement performance)
The 2nd first announcement performance is a first special symbol that is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot". This is a performance that definitively notifies that a winning notification performance will be executed at the final stage of a predetermined reach performance (for example, SP reach or SPSP reach) during the variable display of. Specifically, this second first shot announcement effect displays a first shot announcement effect image expressed using rainbow colors on the display screen 70, causes the frame lamp 37 to emit light in rainbow colors, and This is a performance in which a one-shot notification sound different from the one-shot notification sound output during the one-shot notification performance is output from the speaker 38.

Although this second first shot announcement performance is different in presentation form from the first first shot announcement performance as described above, the execution conditions are common, and the sub CPU 91 decides to execute the one shot announcement performance. If so, one of the one-shot announcement performances is selected, for example, by a lottery of performances, and the one-shot announcement performance is executed. Therefore, both the first shot notification performance and the second shot notification performance are not executed within the same variation.

(Confirm button effect)
The confirmation button performance is a confirmation notification performance that uses the frame lamp 37 and vibration motor 128 around the first performance button 35 to definitively notify that a winning notification performance will be performed.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the combination of the emitted light color of the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 and the strength of the vibration of the first effect button 35 (the drive pattern of the vibration motor 128). The button effect is executed. In this embodiment, this button performance may occur as a chance-up performance during the valid period of the second performance button operation promotion performance at the end of SPSP reach. That is, there are cases in which the button effect occurs and cases in which it does not occur, and there is a feature that the jackpot reliability is higher when the button effect occurs than when it does not occur. Note that there are the following types of button effects.

For example, a first button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits blue light and the first effect button 35 is slightly vibrated, and the jackpot reliability of this first button effect is approximately 12%. is set to . For example, a second button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits green light and the first effect button 35 is strongly vibrated, and the jackpot reliability of this second button effect is approximately 56%. is set to .

Further, for example, a third button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits red light and the first effect button 35 is strongly vibrated. is set to 100%, and functions as the above-mentioned confirm button effect. This third button performance is not executed unless the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", and it becomes likely that the jackpot will be hit at the time when the third button performance is executed.

Also, for example, a fourth button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits rainbow colors and the first effect button 35 is strongly vibrated. The degree is set to 100%, and it functions as the above-mentioned confirmation button effect. This fourth button performance will not be executed unless the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is "probable jackpot", and the fourth button production will not be executed. Once executed, it is highly likely to be a jackpot. That is, when the fourth button performance occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the hit notification performance for notifying a variable probability jackpot is always executed at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol.

Note that during the valid period of the second performance button operation promotion performance in which the first to fourth button performances occur, the operation of the second performance button 36 instead of the first performance button 35 is valid. For this reason, in other embodiments, a vibration motor that vibrates the second effect button 36 is provided, and this vibration motor and the frame lamp 37 around the second effect button 36 are used to perform the first to fourth button effects. may also be executed. In addition, the number of performance buttons that can be operated by the player is reduced to one, and a vibration motor that vibrates this performance button and a frame lamp 37 around this performance button are used to execute the first to fourth button performances. You may also do so.

Further, in this embodiment, the first button effect to the fourth button effect are executed using the frame lamp 37 and the vibration motor 128 without using the display screen 70, the speaker 38, and the panel lamp 5. As will be described, in other embodiments, at least one of the display screen 70, the speaker 38, and the panel lamp 5 may be further used to execute these button effects.

(Special character appearance)
The special character appearance performance in the normal gaming state is a confirmed notification performance that uses the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 to definitively notify that a winning notification performance will be performed to notify a certain variable jackpot. This is an effect in which an effect display representing the appearance of a special character (character) is displayed on the display screen 70, and a voice of the special character such as ``Kakuhen!'' is output from the speaker 38. This special character appearance effect is performed in part when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot" and when the type of jackpot is selected as the type of jackpot, this first special symbol judgment This is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. In this embodiment, the special character appearance performance is performed at various timings, such as during pre-reach performance, when a reach is established, during normal reach, during SP reach, and during SPSP reach.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which a special character appearance effect in the normal gaming state is performed using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 without using the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, or the vibration motor 128. However, in other embodiments, at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 may be further used to perform a special character appearance effect.

(Strong button vibration effect)
The strong button vibration performance is a definite notification performance that definitively notifies that a winning notification performance will be performed by controlling the drive of the vibration motor 128 to cause the first performance button 35 to strongly vibrate. This button strong vibration effect differs from the first to fourth button effects described above in the following points.

That is, while the first button effect to the fourth button effect are executed using the frame lamp 37 and the vibration motor 128 as described above, the button strong vibration effect is executed without using the frame lamp 37. This differs from the first to fourth button effects in that it is executed using only the vibration motor 128. In addition, while the first to fourth button effects are executed during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect at the end of SPSP reach, the strong button vibration effect is the first button effect in the normal gaming state. This differs from the first to fourth button performances in that it is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of special symbols or when a cut-in occurs during SPSP reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which only the vibration motor 128 is used to execute the strong button vibration effect so that only the player playing the gaming machine 1 can recognize that there is a strong chance of winning the jackpot. ing. On the other hand, in other embodiments, at least one of the display screen 70, the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, and the panel lamp 5 may be further used to perform the strong button vibration effect. .

Up to this point, we have explained various types of confirmation notification performances that are executed when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, but in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state starts. The final notification effect may be executed multiple times from the time it is started until the time it ends. In this way, when a fixed notification effect is executed multiple times within the same fluctuation, the result is different when the same fixed notification effect is executed multiple times, and when two or more different fixed notification effects are executed in order. There are times when a confirmed notification performance is executed multiple times within the same fluctuation.

<Determined notification performance in definite variable gaming state (or time-saving gaming state)>
As illustrated in FIG. 20, the confirmed notification effects executed when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state (or time-saving gaming state) include a special character appearance effect, a one-shot announcement effect, and a rainbow color effect. There is a production, a 7-symbol tenpai, and a reach voice production.

When the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state (or the time-saving gaming state), it is easy to place a game ball in the second starting port 22, so the player can easily hit the ball with the right hand aiming at the second starting port 22. will be held. In addition, if both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are pending, the second special symbol determination is executed with priority over the first special symbol determination, so the probability variable gaming state ( or when the game is controlled in the time-saving gaming state), the second special symbol determination is basically executed.

The fixed notification performance in the variable probability gaming state (or the time saving gaming state) is conditional on the fact that the game ball has won in the second starting port 22 while the game is being controlled in the variable probability gaming state (or the time saving gaming state). The condition is that the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment executed as ``Jackpot'' is a "jackpot", and that you have won the effect lottery executed by the sub CPU 91 using the confirmed notification effect random number (see step S1662 in FIG. 61). executed. In other words, the execution condition for the confirmed notification performance in the variable probability gaming state (or time saving gaming state) is that the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state (or time saving gaming state) is a "jackpot", and the fixed notification performance is It is to win a performance lottery using performance random numbers.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, since there are cases where the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is a "probable variable jackpot" and a case where it is a "normal jackpot" (see FIG. 6(B)), the normal game If a confirmed notification effect is executed while the game is being controlled in the state, then a winning notification effect to notify a "probable variable jackpot" is executed, and a win notification effect to notify a "normal jackpot" is executed afterwards. There are cases where it is executed. On the other hand, since all the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are "probable variable jackpots" (see FIG. 6(C)), when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state (or normal gaming state), the confirmed notification performance is When executed, unless the first special symbol determination is completed, the probability of a jackpot is high at the time when the confirmed notification performance is executed.

(Special character appearance)
The special character appearance performance in the variable probability game state (or time-saving game state) is a definite notification performance that uses the display screen 70 to definitely notify that a winning notification performance will be performed, and a special character (special character) This is a performance in which a performance display is performed on the display screen 70 to show how the character appears. This special character appearance performance is performed in part when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment in the variable probability gaming state (or time-saving gaming state) is a "jackpot". Executed while the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. In this embodiment, the special character appearance effect is executed at various timings, such as immediately after the variable display of the second special symbol starts, and when a reach is established.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special character appearance effect in a variable game state (or a time-saving game state) is performed using only the display screen 70 without using the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, or the vibration motor 128. Although a case will be described in which this is executed, in other embodiments, at least one of the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 is further used to execute the special character appearance effect. You can also do this.

(One-shot announcement performance)
The one-shot announcement performance in the variable probability gaming state (or time saving gaming state) is the second special symbol judgment when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment in the variable probability gaming state (or time saving gaming state) is "Jackpot". Immediately after the start of the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that is performed in response to the execution of the second special symbol, or when a reach is established during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, it is definitely notified that the hit notification performance will be executed. It's a performance. Specifically, this one-shot announcement effect is an effect that causes the frame lamp 37 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light in rainbow colors, and outputs a predetermined one-shot announcement sound from the speaker 38.

In addition, the one-shot notification performance in this variable probability gaming state (or time-saving gaming state) is a performance that definitively announces a "jackpot" prior to the winning notification performance, similar to other confirmed notification performances, so the above-mentioned It is characterized in that it is executed in some cases when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", but it is not executed when it is a "loss".

(Rainbow color effect)
The rainbow effect is a variation of the second special symbol that is performed in response to the second special symbol determination when the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state (or time saving gaming state) is a “jackpot”. This is a performance in which a performance image expressed using rainbow colors is displayed on the display screen 70 during display. This rainbow effect, like other confirmed notification effects, is a effect that definitely announces a "jackpot" prior to the hit notification effect, so the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment above is a "jackpot". It has the characteristic that it is executed in some cases, but not in cases where there is a "lose" situation.

(7 designs Tenpai)
7-symbol Tenpai is a production that establishes a reach with 7 symbols during the variable display of the second special symbol in the fixed-variable gaming state (or time-saving gaming state), and is a 9R game in which the player can win the most prize balls. A hit notification performance (for example, a hit notification performance in which three performance symbols showing doubles of "777" are pseudo-stopped and then the actual stop is performed) is performed to notify that a jackpot game (see FIG. 6(C)) will be executed. This is a definite announcement performance that notifies you in advance of what will happen.

In this way, since the 7-symbol Tenpai is a performance that notifies you of the 9R jackpot (probable variable jackpot) in advance, the judgment result of the second special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state (or time-saving gaming state) is a "jackpot". , and the execution condition is that the jackpot symbol Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) is selected as the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and even if it is a "jackpot", other jackpots It is not executed if a symbol is selected or if it is a "lose".

In addition, while the jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect that establishes a reach with 7 symbols during the variable display of the second special symbol in the fixed variable gaming state (or time-saving gaming state) is 100%, the jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect that establishes the reach with 3 symbols is 100%. The jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect is set to 50%, and the jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect that establishes the reach effect with other effect symbols is set to 20%.

In addition, in this embodiment, explanation will be made taking as an example a case where 7-symbol tenpai is performed using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38, but in other embodiments, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 will be used. At least one of them may be further used to perform 7-symbol tenpai.

(Reach voice production)
The reach sound production is when a reach is achieved with any of the 1st to 9th symbols during the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable probability game state (or the time-saving game state), and a sound indicating that the reach is established is emitted from the speaker 38. This is a performance to be output. This reach sound performance includes a reach sound performance that outputs a sound such as "It's super hot!" from the speaker 38, and a reach sound performance that outputs a sound such as "Reach!" from the speaker 38 a little later than the reach establishment timing. Therefore, any reach audio performance functions as a confirmed notification performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variable gaming state (or time-saving gaming state) is "loss", the variation of the second special symbol corresponding to this second special symbol determination Even if a reach is established during the display, the speaker 38 does not output a sound suggesting that the reach is established, and the above-mentioned reach sound effect is executed in conjunction with the establishment of a reach for a part of the case where it is a "big hit". An explanation will be provided. On the other hand, in other embodiments, when the reach is established during the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable probability gaming state (or the time-saving gaming state), the second special symbol is displayed at the start of the variable display. Regardless of whether or not the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", a sound (which may be a sound effect, etc.) suggesting that a reach is established is output, and a jackpot is determined depending on the content and output timing of this sound. A configuration in which the reliability changes may be adopted.

For example, the reliability of a jackpot is approximately 15% when a voice saying "Reach!" is output when a reach is established, and the reliability of a jackpot when a voice saying "Chance!" is output when a reach is established is approximately 15%. It is about 35%, and if the voice saying "It's super hot!" is output when the reach is established, it is likely to be a jackpot, and if the voice "reach!" is output a little later after the reach is established, it is also likely to be a jackpot. An example of such a configuration is that there is.

(Other configurations related to definite notification performance in variable probability gaming state (or time saving gaming state))
In this embodiment, explanation will be given using an example in which the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are all "probable variable jackpots", but in other embodiments, the type of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination is "probable variable jackpots". ” and “normal jackpot” may be adopted.

In this case, when executing a definite notification effect that definitely announces a jackpot regardless of whether the type of jackpot is a "probable jackpot" or not, the execution conditions common to those exemplified in this embodiment are satisfied. What is necessary is to execute a confirmed notification effect when the situation occurs. On the other hand, when executing a confirmed notification effect that definitively notifies that the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is a "probable variable jackpot", in addition to the execution conditions exemplified in this embodiment, the second special symbol determination The confirmed notification performance may be executed on the condition that the execution condition that the type of jackpot related to is "probable variable jackpot" is further satisfied.

<Confirmed notification performance during jackpot game>
As illustrated in FIG. 20, the confirmed notification effects executed during the jackpot game include a special winning sound output effect and a special V winning notification effect.

(Special winning sound output performance)
As is clear from the notation after step S236 in FIG. 63, the special winning sound output performance in this embodiment is performed when the second grand prize opening 28 is opened and closed during the round game of a predetermined round. This is an effect in which a special winning sound is output from the speaker 38 every time a game ball wins. This special winning sound output performance is such that at the start of the round game of the predetermined round when the second big winning opening 28 is opened and closed, the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved, and among the reserved rights there is "Jackpot". '', and is executed on the condition that the special winning sound output effect is won in the effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the special winning sound output effect. In other words, the execution conditions for the special winning sound output performance are that the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved at the start of the round game of the predetermined round when the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed; The winning result includes one that will be determined as a "big win", and the player wins the performance lottery for determining whether or not to execute the special winning sound output performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special symbol determination right that is reserved at the start of the round game of the predetermined round when the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed is determined to be a "jackpot". is not included, a configuration is adopted in which even if a game ball wins in the second grand prize opening 28 during this round game, a winning sound is not output. Therefore, as described above, by outputting a special winning sound from the speaker 38 every time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 28 during the round game of the predetermined round, the suspension related to the second special symbol determination can be made. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game includes a "big win".

In addition, in another embodiment, if even one of the execution conditions for the special winning sound output performance is not satisfied, each time a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28 during the round game of a predetermined round, the normal If a winning sound is output and all the execution conditions for the special winning sound output performance are met, each time a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28 during a predetermined round of round play (normal winning sound A configuration may also be adopted in which a special winning sound (different from the above) is output.

(Special V award announcement performance)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, regarding the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, in order to make it difficult to understand whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot game is a variable probability gaming state, the type of the variable probability jackpot is A configuration in which the effective round games are different (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) and a configuration in which even if a game ball wins a V prize, it is not notified to that effect are adopted. On the other hand, since the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are all variable probability jackpots (see FIG. 6(C)), there is little need to apply a similar configuration to the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effective round game in which the V winning of the game ball becomes valid is fixed to the fifth round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened, and this round game When a game ball wins a V-win, a V-win notification performance is always executed to notify that fact.

The above-mentioned V winning notification performance is a performance executed on the condition that the game ball has won a V prize during the fifth round of the game. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved at the start of the fifth round, and the reserved right includes "Jackpot". A special V winning notification effect may be executed on the condition that the winning information contains a result that will be judged as ``.''.

As described above based on FIG. 13(D), etc., the V prize notification production is a production image showing two characters holding up a (golden) star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V" and expressing joy. It is displayed on the display screen 70 and a predetermined V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38. On the other hand, the special V prize announcement performance displays on the display screen 70 a performance image showing five characters holding up a (rainbow-colored) star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V" and expressing joy. , a special V winning notification sound different from the above-mentioned V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38.

In this way, in the special V winning notification presentation, the display color of the star emblem, the number of characters lifting the star emblem, and the V winning notification sound output from the speaker 38 are different from the normal V winning notification presentation. ing. Therefore, based on these differences, players can easily recognize that in addition to the fact that the game ball has won a V prize, the right to determine the second special symbol, which will be determined as a jackpot, is reserved. It is possible to do so.

In addition, the special winning sound output performance and the special V winning notification performance are performances that notify that the pending second special symbol judgment rights include one that will be judged as a jackpot. Since both are common in this respect, there is little need to execute both of these performances during one jackpot game. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when performing the special winning sound output performance, the normal V winning notification performance is executed without executing the special V winning notification performance, and the special winning sound output performance is executed. If not, a special V winning notification effect will be executed.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 that can execute the confirmed notification effect)
Up to this point, with reference to FIG. 20, we have described various confirmed notification effects executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, but some of these confirmed notification effects have the same execution timing; Some of the execution timings are different, and when comparing two confirmed notification performances with different execution timings, at least one of the execution conditions and the production mode is different, so it is extremely versatile and highly interesting. It is possible to perform a performance. The gaming machine 1 that is capable of executing such a versatile and highly entertaining fixed notification performance can be regarded as the following gaming machine.

A determining means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game);
A special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes the big prize opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39) that executes the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling execution of production,
The performance control means is
A winning notification effect (for example, see FIG. 12(I)) for notifying that the determining means has determined that the special game will be executed; and prior to the winning notification effect, notifying that the special game will be executed. It is possible to perform a final notification effect (for example, see FIG. 20),
There is a first case in which the final notification performance is executed at a first execution timing, and a second case in which the final notification performance is executed at a second execution timing (for example, see FIG. 20),
A gaming machine characterized in that the first case and the second case are different in at least one of execution conditions and performance aspects of the confirmed notification performance (for example, see FIG. 20).

According to the gaming machine 1 having such a configuration, the confirmed notification performance executed at the second execution timing is different from the confirmed notification performance executed at the first execution timing in at least one of the execution conditions and the performance mode. One is different. In this way, when comparing confirmed notification effects with different execution timings, at least one of the execution conditions and presentation aspects of the confirmed notification effects will change. Since both aspects are fixed, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the final notification effect becomes monotonous and cannot be executed effectively.

[About reliability suggestion pair display performance]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a suspension icon (a suspension suggestion image) indicating that the right to determine the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is suspended is displayed in a display mode based on the preliminary determination result. In addition, as an expectation effect that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed, an effect that displays an expected image in a display mode based on the preliminary determination result may be performed. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display color of a pending icon other than the default white color (see FIG. 21(A)) and the expected image (see FIG. 21(B)) that can change in stages are different. Depending on the pair, a reliability-suggesting pair display effect that suggests jackpot reliability may be executed. The reliability suggestion pair display performance will be described below with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23.

(Icon jackpot reliability)
FIG. 21(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the pending icon (and the icon), and the types of icons that the pending icon and the icon can change by icon change effects, and the display of each icon. The correspondence relationship between the aspect and the jackpot reliability of each icon is illustrated. For example, if an icon change effect targeting a white hold icon (white icon: default hold icon) is executed, the white hold icon (white icon), the blue hold icon (blue icon), the green hold icon icon (green icon), red pending icon (red icon), and rainbow-colored pending icon (rainbow icon). Note that in this embodiment, both the display color and shape of the icon change by the icon change effect. In addition, in this embodiment, the white icon does not indicate jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability of the blue icon is set to approximately 3%, the jackpot reliability of the green icon is set to approximately 15%, and the red icon The jackpot reliability of the rainbow icon is set to approximately 45%, and the jackpot reliability of the rainbow icon is set to 100%.

In this way, there are a plurality of display modes of the pending icon, each of which differs in the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed.

(Jackpot reliability of expected image)
FIG. 21(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the expected image. When the icon change effect is executed and a blue icon, green icon, red icon, or rainbow icon is displayed as a pending icon, an expected image suggesting jackpot reliability is displayed in cooperation with the currently displayed pending icon. may be displayed.

In this embodiment, three types of expected images are prepared: a first expected image, a second expected image, and a third expected image. Here, the first expected image is a production image that shows one character who is accumulating power surrounded by a blue aura, and the second expected image is a production image that shows two characters who are accumulating power. The third expected image is a performance image showing three characters wearing a red aura as they accumulate their power. When these three types of expected images are arranged in order of jackpot reliability from low to high, the order is the first expected image, the second expected image, and the third expected image.

In this way, there are a plurality of display modes of the expected image that differ in the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed.

These expected images work together with a special pending icon (a pending icon with a display color other than white) to suggest the jackpot reliability, so in this embodiment, only the default pending icon is displayed. When the image is not displayed, the expected image is not displayed. Furthermore, since the expected image suggests the jackpot reliability in cooperation with the pending icon, if the pending icon (special icon) that cooperates with the expected image is not displayed in the pending icon display area 71, the expected image is not displayed, and as the pending icon that cooperates with the expected image is shifted from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, the expected image is deleted from the display screen 70.

Note that while the expected image is being displayed, an expected image changing effect that changes the currently displayed expected image may be performed. For example, an expected image change effect is performed while the first expected image is being displayed, and the first expected image being displayed changes to a second expected image, or an expected image change effect is performed while the first expected image is being displayed. The first expected image being displayed changes to the third expected image (without going through the second expected image), or the expected image change effect is performed while the second expected image is being displayed, and the second expected image being displayed changes. The image may change to a third expected image. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change in the display mode of the pending icon and the change in the display mode of the expected image are controlled by the sub CPU 91 based on the result of the preliminary determination for the suspended first special symbol determination right. controlled by

(Jackpot reliability of reliability suggestion pair)
When a reliability suggestion pair display performance in which the pending icon and the expected image cooperate to suggest jackpot reliability is performed, an icon change performance targeting the pending icon and an expected image change performance targeting the expected image are performed. are executed individually, so the combination of the pending icon and the expected image changes as appropriate.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the combination of the pending icon and the expected image. During the reliability suggestion pair display performance, the icon change performance and the expected image change performance are executed separately, so the combination of the pending image and the expected image changes, and the first pair to the second pair illustrated in FIG. One of the nine pairs will be displayed.

Here, the first pair is a pair consisting of a blue pending icon and a first expected image (see FIG. 22(A)). The second pair is a pair consisting of a blue pending icon and a second expected image (see FIG. 22(B)). The third pair is a pair consisting of a green pending icon and the first expected image (see FIG. 22(C)). The fourth pair is a pair consisting of a blue pending icon and a third expected image (see FIG. 22(D)). The fifth pair is a pair consisting of a green pending icon and a second expected image (see FIG. 22(E)).

The sixth pair is a pair consisting of a red pending icon and the first expected image (see FIG. 22(F)). The seventh pair is a pair consisting of a green pending icon and a third expected image (see FIG. 22(G)). The eighth pair is a pair consisting of a red pending icon and a second expected image (see FIG. 22(H)). The ninth pair is a pair consisting of a red pending icon and a third expected image (see FIG. 22(I)).

In addition, when arranging the 1st to 9th pairs in order of jackpot reliability from low to high, they are the 1st pair, the 2nd pair, the 3rd pair, the 4th pair, the 5th pair, the 6th pair, and the 7th pair. , the eighth pair, and the ninth pair. Furthermore, for example, if an icon change effect is performed that changes the blue pending icon to the green pending icon while the first pair (see FIG. 22(A)) is displayed, the first pair changes to the third pair (see FIG. 22(A)). (See C). Furthermore, for example, if an expected image change effect that changes the first expected image to the third expected image is performed while the third pair (see FIG. 22(C)) is displayed, the third pair changes to the seventh pair (see FIG. 22(C)). (see FIG. 22(G)). Also, for example, while displaying the second pair (see FIG. 22(B)), an icon change effect that changes a blue pending icon to a red pending icon, and an expected image change that changes a second expected image to a third expected image. If the performance is performed, the second pair changes to the ninth pair (see FIG. 22(I)).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the hold icon (hold suggestion image) is displayed without executing the effect of displaying the expected image (an example of the expected effect), for example, as illustrated in FIG. 11(A), As shown, the display mode of the pending icon suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. On the other hand, when the expected image is displayed while the pending icon is being displayed, that is, when the reliability suggestion pair display effect is being executed, both the display mode of the pending icon and the display mode of the expected image, The degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed is suggested.

(Specific example of reliability suggestive pair display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a specific example of reliability suggestion pair display performance will be described. Here, FIG. 23 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of reliability suggestion pair display performance. In FIG. 23(A), a game ball enters the first starting port 21 during the variable display of the first special symbol (and performance symbol) corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72, A state in which a fourth pending icon (white pending icon) corresponding to the fourth pending related to the first special symbol determination is newly displayed in the pending icon display area 71 is illustrated. Here, an explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where reliability suggestion pair display performance is performed based on the result of preliminary determination regarding the right of first special symbol determination corresponding to this fourth pending icon.

In addition, if the reach effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon that has been displayed before the hold icon to be read ahead is displayed, the reliability suggesting pair display effect will interfere with the reach effect. On the other hand, the reach effect may interfere with the reliability-suggesting pair display effect. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern related to the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the pending icon that has been displayed before the pending icon to be read ahead is displayed is the variable pattern for no-reach loss. When this is the case, the reliability-suggesting pair display performance is executed, and when a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot or a fluctuation pattern for a reach loss is included, the reliability-suggesting pair display performance is not performed.

FIG. 23(B) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 (see FIG. 23(A)). In order to notify that the number is a "loss", a state is illustrated in which three performance symbols indicating a winning number of "283" are pseudo-stopped. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the three performance symbols mentioned above are finally stopped. .

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (leftmost pending icon) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 23(B) and (C)).

In addition, here, the variable display of the first special symbol (and production symbol) that was being executed at the timing when the fourth right related to the first special symbol determination, which is the target of pre-reading, was reserved (see FIG. 23(A)) ) is set in advance to start the reliability suggesting pair display effect with the start of the next variable display. In the present embodiment, the expected image is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 (the area above the pending icon display area 71) while the reliability suggestion pair display performance is being performed. Therefore, three symbol rows are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 23(C)). In FIG. 23(C), a blue pending icon is displayed as the third pending icon to be read ahead, and the first expected image (see FIG. 21(B)) is displayed as the expected image. An example is shown. That is, FIG. 23(C) exemplifies a state in which the first pair described above based on FIG. 22(A) is displayed.

In this reliability suggestion pair display performance, when the display performance in Figure 23(C) is being performed, the first pair of the first to ninth pairs, that is, the blue pending icon A first expected image showing a character wearing a blue aura is displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize, by looking at the first pair, that the jackpot reliability is relatively low at this point in time.

By the way, if multiple special icons are displayed while an expected image is displayed, for example, a blue pending icon and a green pending icon are displayed at the same time, the special icon corresponding to the expected image The player may not be able to recognize whether it is an icon, and as a result, there is a possibility that a sufficient performance effect cannot be obtained by the reliability suggesting pair display performance.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 21 during execution of the reliability suggestion pair display performance, the pending icon corresponding to the winning can be displayed as a special icon. Even if there is a pending icon, it is displayed as a default pending icon, and an icon change performance for the pending icon is not performed until at least the reliability suggesting pair display performance is completed.

With this configuration, only one special icon is displayed while the expected image is displayed, so compared to the case where multiple special icons are displayed, the pending icon corresponding to the expected image is It is easy to recognize. However, in a state where the expected image, a pending icon as a special icon, and a pending icon that is not a special icon are displayed, the player wonders if the pending icon corresponding to the expected image is a pending icon that is not a special icon. There is a possibility that a sufficient performance effect cannot be obtained from the reliability-suggesting pair display performance.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a connected image is displayed that connects the pending icon to be prefetched and the expected image so that the player can clearly recognize the correspondence between the pending icon to be prefetched and the expected image. (See Figure 23(C)).

After the variable display of the first special symbol described above starts based on FIG. 23(C), at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "lost". In order to notify this, the three effect symbols showing the random number of "615" are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 23(D)). When the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the three performance symbols are finally stopped.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (leftmost pending icon) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 23(D) and (E)). In addition, with the shift of the earliest pending icon, the remaining pending icons in the pending icon display area 71 are also shifted to the left, and the pending icon to be read ahead is displayed as the second pending icon (FIG. 23(E) )reference).

Note that, as is clear from the notations in FIGS. 23(D) and (E), the expected image changes from the first expected image with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol two positions before the prefetch target. do not have. On the other hand, the pending icon for pre-reading was a blue pending icon (see Figure 23 (D)) before the variable display of the first special symbol two places before this pre-reading target started. As the variable display of the first special symbol two spots before the target starts, the icon changes to a green pending icon (see FIG. 23(E)).

In FIGS. 23(D) and (E), the expected image remains the first expected image, and the pending icon to be prefetched changes from a blue pending image to a green pending icon, and the reliability suggestive pair display effect is changed. The example shows how the pair changes from the first pair (see FIG. 22(A)) to the third pair (see FIG. 22(C)). In addition, since the display position of the pending icon to be prefetched has changed from the display position of the third pending icon to the display position of the second pending icon, the pending icon to be prefetched and the expected image are different from each other. It also illustrates how the shape of the connected image that connects the images changes.

After the above-described variable display of the first special symbol based on FIG. 23(E) (the variable display of the first special symbol two before the pre-read target) is started, at the end of the variable display of this first special symbol. Then, in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "lose", the three effect symbols showing the winning combination of "243" pseudo-stop (see FIG. 23(F)). When the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the three performance symbols are finally stopped.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (leftmost pending icon) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 23(F) and (G)). In addition, with the shift of the earliest pending icon, the remaining pending icons in the pending icon display area 71 are also shifted to the left, and the pending icon to be read ahead is displayed as the first pending icon (FIG. 23(G) )reference).

As is clear from the notations in FIGS. 23(F) and (G), the expected image changes from the first expected image to the third expected image with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol immediately before the prefetch target. It has changed into an image. On the other hand, the pending icon to be read ahead remains a green pending icon. From this, in FIGS. 23(F) and (G), the pairs related to the reliability suggesting pair display effect are from the third pair (see FIG. 22(C)) to the seventh pair (see FIG. 22(G)). This can be said to be an example of how things change. In addition, since the display position of the pending icon to be read ahead has changed from the display position of the second held icon to the display position of the first (earliest) held icon, the pending icon to be read ahead Also illustrated is how the shape of the connected image that connects the expected image and the expected image changes.

After the variable display of the first special symbol described above based on FIG. 23 (G) (the variable display of the first special symbol immediately before the pre-read target) is started, at the end of the variable display of this first special symbol. Then, in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "lose", the three performance symbols showing the winning combination of "156" pseudo-stop (see FIG. 23(H)). When the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the three performance symbols are finally stopped.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (pending icon to be read ahead) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of this first special symbol determination, the earliest pending icon (the pending icon to be read in advance) is moved from the pending icon display area 71. As the icon is shifted to the icon display area 72, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 23(H) and (I)). Here, as the pending icon to be read ahead shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, the green pending icon changes to the red icon.

Note that at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead, the expected image is not displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIGS. 23(H) and (I)), and FIGS. 23(H) and (I) can be said to exemplify how the display of the expected image ends (in other words, how the reliability suggesting pair display performance ends) with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead.

Up to this point, from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol three places before the pre-read target (see Figure 23 (C)), to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead (see Figure 23 (I)) ), we have explained how the reliability suggestion pair display performance is executed over the period up to When the pair display performance ends, a problem arises in that the player cannot recognize the display color of the expected image that was displayed immediately before the reliability suggesting pair display performance ended.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, when the reliability suggesting pair display performance ends, the expected image that was displayed immediately before the end of the reliability suggesting pair display performance is Effect images of the same color are displayed on both the left and right sides of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 23(I)). Note that in the example shown in FIG. 23, the third expected image showing the three characters who are accumulating power and surrounded by a red aura was displayed until just before the end of the reliability suggesting pair display performance. , FIG. 23(I) shows an example of how a red effect image is displayed.

Note that this effect image may be displayed until the end of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol to be read ahead, but since it may interfere with the reach effect, in this embodiment, the effect image is The display continues until the reach is established, and after the reach is established, the effect image is not displayed.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 that can execute the reliability suggestion pair display effect)
Up to this point, the reliability suggesting pair display effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23. 1 can be regarded as a gaming machine as shown below.

A determining means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game);
Reservation means that can reserve the right of the judgment up to a predetermined number (the acquired information obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 is stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4 reserve The acquired information obtained when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 22 is stored in any of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38(A)), and the acquired information is stored in the special drawing 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special drawing 2.・The main CPU 81 stored in either of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38(A));
Before the judgment is made on the rights held by the holding means, a preliminary judgment means (executes the preliminary judgment processing of steps S211 and S219 in FIG. 40) for making a preliminary judgment as to whether or not to execute the special game. main CPU 81),
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling execution of production,
The performance control means is
displaying a suspension suggestion image (e.g., a reservation icon) suggesting that the right to the judgment is withheld in a display mode based on the result of the preliminary determination (for example, see FIG. 21(A));
It is possible to perform an expectation performance (for example, a performance displaying an expected image: see FIG. 21(B)) that makes people expect that the special game will be executed in a performance mode based on the result of the preliminary determination,
The display mode of the suspension suggestion image includes a plurality of display modes in which the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed differs from each other (see FIG. 21(A)), and the mode of performance of the expected performance includes a plurality of display modes in which the degree of expectation that the special game is executed differs from each other (see FIG. 21(A)). There are multiple production modes that are different from each other (see Figure 21(B)),
When the hold suggestion image is displayed without the expectation effect being executed, the expectation level is suggested by the display mode of the hold suggestion image (for example, see FIG. 11(A)), and the hold suggestion image is When the expected performance is being executed during display, the degree of expectation is suggested by both the display mode of the pending suggestion image and the performance mode of the expected performance (for example, FIG. 23(C), (E) ), (G)).

According to this configuration, when an expected performance (a performance that displays an expected image) is executed while a pending suggestion image (for example, a pending icon) is being displayed, the display mode of the pending suggestion image and the performance mode of the expected performance are different. Both indicate the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed (for example, see FIGS. 23(C), (E), and (G)). Therefore, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect due to the synergistic effect of displaying the hold suggestion image and executing the expected performance. In addition, since it is possible to perform an expectation performance in a performance mode that suggests a high level of expectation while displaying a pending suggestion image in a display mode that suggests a low level of expectation (for example, see FIG. 22(D) ), by displaying a suspension suggestion image in a display style that suggests that the level of expectation is low, it is possible to effectively prevent the problem that a player's expectations for the execution of a special game are significantly lowered. It is possible to suppress it. Furthermore, since it is possible to display a pending suggestion image that suggests that the level of expectation is high during the execution of an expected performance in a style that suggests that the level of expectation is low (for example, see FIG. 22(F)), It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that a player's sense of expectation for the execution of a special game is significantly reduced by executing an expected performance in a performance mode that suggests that the special game is low. It is possible.

(Other configurations related to reliability suggestion pair display performance)
Regarding the reliability suggestion pair display performance, the following configuration may be adopted.
That is, in this embodiment, the expected image is not displayed while a white pending icon (default pending icon) is displayed, but the expected image is displayed while a non-white pending icon (special icon) is displayed. As will be explained as an example, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which an expected image can be displayed even while a white pending icon is displayed. That is, for example, the third expected image is displayed above the white pending icon, and a reliability suggesting pair display effect is executed that displays a connected image that connects the white pending icon and the third expected image. You can.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the pending icon to be read ahead is started, the pending icon to be read ahead is continuously displayed as the icon, but the expected image is not displayed. This will be explained using a case as an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the aura image is not displayed instead of the expected image, but the expected image is The display may be continued.

In addition, in this embodiment, the suggestion period from the start to the end of the reliability suggestion pair display effect (for example, from the start of the display in FIG. 23(C) to the start of the display in FIG. 23(I) An example will be explained in which the expected image is constantly displayed during the period (until the end of the process). On the other hand, in other embodiments, for example, during the above-mentioned suggestion period, the suggestion image is displayed only until a predetermined period of time (shorter than the variation time) has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the information is not displayed. Specifically, with this configuration, for example, the expected image is not displayed in the latter half of the variable display of the first special symbol where the loss notification effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 23(D), (F), and (H). The configuration is such that the expected image is displayed intermittently.

Further, in this embodiment, a case will be explained using an example in which there are three types of expected images, a first to a third expected image, but the types of expected images are not limited to three types, but two types or There may be four or more types.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expected image changes in the order of the first expected image, the second expected image, and the third expected image, so that the display content of the expected image (in this embodiment, the number of characters indicated by the expected image, etc.) ) and the display color (in this embodiment, the color of the aura worn by the character) will both change. However, in other embodiments, the display content of the expected image and the display content of the expected image will be changed by changing the expected image. A configuration may be adopted in which one of the display colors changes.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example will be described where the expected image is a performance image showing one or more characters who are accumulating power and wearing an aura of a predetermined color. The content and display color may be other colors as long as the player can recognize the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the expected image is displayed, the case where the effect pattern is displayed as a small pattern (see FIGS. 23(C) to 23(H)) will be explained as an example, but in other embodiments, for example, the expected The image display area is changed to the lower right area of the display screen 70 (the area to the right of the pending icon display area 71), and even during the reliability suggestion pair display performance, the performance symbols are displayed in the performance symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 2). It may be displayed in a larger size.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the expected effect that makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed is an effect that displays an expected image has been explained as an example, but the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed can be suggested by the effect mode. If possible, the expected performance is not limited to a performance that displays an expected image, but includes, for example, a performance that causes the frame lamp 37 to emit light in a luminescent color that indicates the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed, a jackpot game The expected performance may include, for example, a performance in which the speaker 38 outputs a performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation that the event will be performed. Furthermore, these effects may be performed together with the effect of displaying the expected image.

[About multiple expected performances]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27, a plurality of expected performances executed by the gaming machine 1 will be explained. Here, FIGS. 24 and 25 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the first expected performance and the second expected performance. FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining the first expected performance, the second expected performance, and the third expected performance. FIG. 27 is a time chart for explaining a modification of the first expected performance and the second expected performance.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the player can inform the player that a jackpot game will be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination related to the first special symbol determination to be read ahead. A first expected performance, a second expected performance, and a third expected performance can be executed as performances that make the user expect. Note that these three expected effects are different from the effect of displaying the expected image described above based on FIGS. 21 to 23.

In FIG. 24(A), a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 during the variable display of the first special symbol (and performance symbol) corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72, A state in which a fourth pending icon (white pending icon) corresponding to the fourth pending related to the first special symbol determination is newly displayed in the pending icon display area 71 is illustrated. Here, based on the preliminary determination result regarding the right of the first special symbol determination (pre-reading target) corresponding to this fourth pending icon, the third expected performance, the first expected performance, and the second expected performance are sequentially displayed. The explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where three expected performances are started.

In addition, a variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the pending icon that has been displayed before the pending icon to be read ahead is displayed (here, the three pending icons displayed to the left of the pending icon to be read ahead) If a reach effect is executed during the event, the expected effect may interfere with the reach effect. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern related to the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the pending icon that has been displayed before the pending icon to be read ahead is displayed is the variable pattern for no-reach loss. When this is the case, the expected performance is executed, and when a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot or a fluctuation pattern for a reach loss is included, the expected performance is not executed.

As mentioned above, it is decided that the first special symbol determination right corresponding to the fourth pending icon is to be prefetched, and the first expected performance, second expected performance, and third expected performance are to be executed regarding this prefetched target. If so, first, the third expected presentation (see FIG. 26) is started almost at the same time as a new prize to be read in advance. This third expected effect includes a board lamp light emission effect that causes the board lamp 5 to emit light in a light emission pattern exclusively for the third expected effect, and a corresponding effect sound corresponding to this board lamp light emission effect (for example, a predetermined effect that makes the player expect a jackpot). This is a production consisting of a corresponding production sound output production in which a sound effect) is output from the speaker 38.

Corresponding effect sound output The corresponding effect sound output by the effect is output during an output period that starts from the timing when there is a new prize corresponding to the fourth pending icon and ends when 2 seconds have passed from this timing. be done. On the other hand, although the board lamp light emission effect has the same start timing as the corresponding effect sound output effect, the end timing is different. In other words, the corresponding sound output performance ends when two seconds have elapsed from the start, whereas the board lamp light emission performance is the first one that starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination that is the target of pre-reading. This continues until the variable display of 1 special symbol starts (see FIG. 26).

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 24(A), the pending icon (fourth pending icon: pending icon for pre-reading) corresponding to the right to determine the first special symbol, which is the target of pre-reading, is the default pending icon. It is displayed as a white pending icon. Therefore, for example, if an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot is started with the start of the next symbol change after the symbol change that is being performed when the fourth pending icon is displayed, this effect will , the player cannot easily recognize which pending icon the performance corresponds to, and as a result, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to identify the pending icon that is expected to lead to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the board lamp 5, which normally emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the current performance mode (or the variable performance performed on the display screen 70), At the timing when there is a new prize to be read in advance, light emission using a light emission pattern exclusively for the third expected performance is started. That is, the light emitting pattern of the board lamp 5 changes at the timing when a new prize to be read ahead is received. Further, at the timing when a new prize to be read ahead is received, a corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 38.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the timing when there is a new prize to be read in advance, the lighting mode of the board lamp changes and the corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 38, which functions as the third expected effect. These effects occur almost simultaneously with the display of the fourth pending icon to be prefetched. Therefore, the player can easily identify that the fourth pending icon is the one with which he or she can expect a jackpot.

FIG. 24(B) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 (see FIG. 24(A)). In order to notify that the number is a "loss", a state is illustrated in which three performance symbols indicating a random number of "854" are pseudo-stopped. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the above symbol showing the winning number of "854" is displayed. The three production symbols stop as they are.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (leftmost pending icon) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scrolling display of the three symbol rows starts (see FIGS. 24(B) and 24(C)). In addition, with the start of the scroll display of these three symbol rows, the first expected performance described later is started, and the performance image related to this first expected performance is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70. The symbol row is displayed in a small size in the lower right area of the display screen 70 until the variable display of the first special symbol, which is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination to be read ahead, starts. 24(C)-(I), see FIGS. 25(A)-(C)).

In this way, with the start of the next symbol change after the symbol change that was being made when there was a new prize that is subject to pre-reading, the pending icon for pre-reading that was displayed as the fourth pending icon will change. , is displayed as the third pending icon, and the first expected performance is started (see FIG. 24(C) and FIG. 26). In this embodiment, the chance mode performance described above functions as the first expected performance, and a chance mode performance image representing a thunderstorm is displayed on the display screen 70, and a performance sound corresponding to the performance image is displayed. It is output from the speaker 38. Furthermore, at the start of the first expected performance (here, chance mode performance), the words "Entering chance mode" are displayed in the center of the display screen 70 in order to clearly notify that the chance mode has been entered ( (See FIG. 24(C)). In this embodiment, this first expected performance is continued until the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination to be read ahead (FIG. 25(B) ~(C), see Figure 26).

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 24(C), although the first expected performance has started, the pending icon to be read ahead has not changed to the special icon. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the hold icon to be read ahead has changed from the default hold icon (white hold icon) to a special icon (hold icon other than white), the hold icon to be read ahead is The pedestal is extended upward, and the pending icon to be read in advance is moved upward to clearly notify which pending icon the first expected performance has started for.

As illustrated in FIG. 24(C), when a first expected performance is executed with a plurality of pending icons displayed, the pending icon corresponding to this first expected performance is identified from other pending icons. A possible identification display (here, an effect display in which the pending icon to be read in advance is moved upward and its pedestal is extended upward) is performed. Note that this identification display continues even after the second expected performance, which will be described later, has started (see FIG. 24(D)), so the pending icons corresponding to the first expected performance and the second expected performance are It can be easily identified by the pending icon.

In the middle of the variable display of the first special symbol started as described above based on FIG. 24(C), the second expected performance is started (see FIG. 24(D) and FIG. 26). This second expected performance is a performance in which one or more characters appear, and is a performance that suggests jackpot reliability based on the number of characters appearing. FIG. 24(D) shows an example of a performance display showing a character gathering strength while being hit by a thunderstorm based on the first expected performance. Furthermore, since the number of characters displayed by the second expected performance is one at this point, the player cannot estimate the jackpot reliability at this point based on the fact that only one character is displayed. It is easy to recognize that it is low.

FIG. 24(E) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 (see FIG. 24(D)). In order to notify that the number is a "loss", three performance symbols indicating a weak chance of "246" are shown in a pseudo-stop state. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and the display screen 70 shows a weak chance of "246". The above three production symbols will stop as they are.

In addition, here, we have explained the case where the real stop occurs after the three effect symbols indicating weak chance eyes have pseudo-stopped, but the real stop may also occur after the three effect figures indicating the weak chance eyes have pseudo-stopped. There is a characteristic that the former case has a higher jackpot reliability than the latter case.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (leftmost pending icon) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 24(E) and 24(F)). In addition, the pending icon that was displayed as the third pending icon is now displayed as the second pending icon, and the pedestal corresponding to the third pending icon is replaced by the second pending icon. A pedestal corresponding to the icon extends upward.

It should be noted that with the start of the scroll display of these three symbol rows, the performance mode of the first expected performance changes (see FIGS. 24(E) to 24(F) and FIG. 26). Specifically, the number of clouds that cause thunderstorms is increased by one to two, and the effect display is switched to a effect display that shows a more severe thunderstorm. The number of clouds displayed during this first expected performance corresponds to the jackpot reliability, and the greater the number of clouds, in other words, the more intense the thunderstorm, the higher the jackpot reliability of the first expected performance. is becoming higher.

In the middle of the variable display of the first special symbol that has been started as described above based on FIG. 24(F), the performance mode of the second expected performance changes (FIGS. 24(F) to (G), (See Figure 26). Specifically, from a state in which a production display showing one character accumulating power is being performed, a new character appears, and two characters work together to accumulate power. The state changes to a state where a performance display representing the situation is performed.

Furthermore, since the first expected performance is performed even after the second expected performance changes in this way, the two characters cooperate while being hit by a thunderstorm falling from two clouds. An effect display will be performed to show how the user is accumulating power (see FIG. 24(G)). Here, since the number of characters related to the second expected performance has increased by one, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot reliability of the second expected performance has improved.

FIG. 24(H) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 (see FIG. 24(G)). In order to notify that the player is a "lose", three performance symbols indicating a strong chance of "531" are shown in a pseudo-stop state. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and the display screen 70 shows a strong chance of "531". The above three production symbols will stop as they are.

In addition, at the end of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol last time, the three production symbols indicating the weak chance came to a pseudo stop and then the main stop (see Fig. 24 (E)), but here, the strong chance The three production symbols shown here make a pseudo stop and then make a real stop, and when comparing the two, it is better to make a weak chance when the three production symbols showing a strong chance make a pseudo stop and then make a real stop. It can be said that the jackpot reliability is higher than when the three effect symbols shown come to a pseudo stop and then the main embankment is made.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (pending icon at the left end: see FIG. 24(H)) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 24(H) and (I)). In addition, the pending icon to be read ahead that was displayed as the second pending icon is now displayed as the first pending icon, and the pedestal corresponding to the second pending icon is replaced by the first pending icon. A pedestal corresponding to the icon extends upward.

In the middle of the variable display of the first special symbol started as described above based on FIG. 24(I), the presentation mode of the second expected presentation changes (see FIG. 24(I) and FIG. 25(A)) ). Specifically, from a state in which a production display showing two characters accumulating power is being performed, one new character appears, and three characters work together to accumulate power. The state changes to a state where a performance display representing the situation is performed.

Furthermore, since the first expected performance is being performed even after the second expected performance changes in this way, the result is that the three characters cooperate while being hit by a thunderstorm falling from two clouds. An effect display will be performed to show how the user is accumulating power (see FIG. 25(A)). Here, since the number of characters related to the second expected performance increases by one to three, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot reliability of the second expected performance has further improved.

In addition, as the performance mode of the second expected performance changes, the pending icon to be prefetched, which is displayed as the earliest pending icon in the pending icon display area 71, changes from a white pending icon to green (Fig. 24(I) and FIG. 25(A)). In this way, the display mode of the pending icon to be read in advance may change during the execution of the expected performance (here, three expected performances, 1st expected performance to 3rd expected performance) (by icon change performance). By the synergistic effect of the expected presentation and the icon change presentation, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for a jackpot.

FIG. 25(B) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 (see FIG. 25(A)). In order to notify that the player is a "lose", three performance symbols indicating a strong chance of "337" are shown in a pseudo-stop state. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows a strong chance number of "337". The above three production symbols will stop as they are.

In addition, at the end of the previous variable display of the first special symbol, the three production symbols indicating the strong chance that do not include the 7 symbols of "531" came to a pseudo stop, and then the actual stop occurred (see Fig. 24 (H)). ), here, the three performance symbols indicating strong chance including the seven symbols of "337" come to a real stop after a pseudo stop, further increasing the reliability of the jackpot.

As mentioned above, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the pending icon (pre-read target pending icon: see FIG. 25(B)) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 25(B) and 25(C)).

Here, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the display area of the performance symbol is returned from the lower right area of the display screen 70 to the performance symbol display area 73, and the first expected performance and second expected performance , and the third expected performance ends at the same time (see FIGS. 25(B) to 25(C) and FIG. 26). In addition, as the pending icon to be prefetched, which is displayed in the pending icon display area 71 as the earliest pending icon, is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, the green pending icon changes to red. The icon changes to the corresponding icon.

In this way, when the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the pending icon to be read ahead is started, the following effect is performed, for example. That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the three symbol rows, a preview performance may be executed (see FIG. 25(D)). An example of this preview performance is the step-up notice described above based on FIG. 11(C).

Next, following the preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance may be performed in which 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the left and right symbols are pseudo-stopped (Fig. 25(E)). reference). This pseudo-continuous effect is as described above based on FIG. 11(D) and the like.

When the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol pseudo-stop due to the pseudo consecutive performance, a pseudo second fluctuating performance following the first pseudo fluctuating performance starts (see FIGS. 25(E) and (F)). ). Specifically, after the characters “×2” indicating the start of the second pseudo-variable effect are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, the characters “×2” are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 70. Along with this, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

Subsequently, while this pseudo second consecutive fluctuating performance is being performed, a preview performance indicating the jackpot reliability may be performed (see FIG. 25(G)). An example of this preview performance is the dialogue preview described above based on FIG. 11(F).

In this way, after the preview effect is executed during the variable effect of the second pseudo continuous effect, the second pseudo continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 25(H)), and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted. Then, the pseudo third series of variation effects is started (see FIG. 25(I)). Although the presentation after the start of the pseudo third fluctuating effect will be omitted, here, since the red icon is displayed in the icon display area 72, the reach effect is at least SP reach or higher. (SP Reach or SPSP Reach) and the winning or losing will be announced. Specifically, it develops into SP Reach and a winning notification performance (or loss notification performance) is executed at the end of SP Reach, or SPSP It develops into a reach, and at the final stage of the SPSP reach, a win notification performance (or a loss notification performance) will be executed.

With reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, an example has been described in which the third expected performance is started at the timing when there is a new prize winning target for pre-reading, but the third expected performance may not be executed. Moreover, although the case where both the first expected performance and the second expected performance are executed has been described as an example, there is a case where only one of the first expected performance and the second expected performance is executed.

(Regarding gaming machine 1 that can execute multiple expected performances)
Up to this point, a plurality of expected performances executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment have been explained with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. However, the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such a plurality of expected performances is as follows. It can be thought of as a gaming machine like this.

A determining means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game);
Reservation means that can reserve the right of judgment up to a predetermined number (the acquired information acquired when a game ball wins in the first starting port 21 is stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4 reserve The acquired information obtained when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 22 is stored in any of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38(A)), and the acquired information is stored in the special drawing 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special drawing 2.・The main CPU 81 stored in either of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38(A));
Before the judgment is made on the rights held by the holding means, a preliminary judgment means (executes the preliminary judgment processing of steps S211 and S219 in FIG. 40) for making a preliminary judgment as to whether or not to execute the special game. main CPU 81),
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling execution of production,
The performance control means is
If the right to judge is reserved, displaying a reservation suggestion image (e.g., a reservation icon) suggesting that;
Based on the result of the preliminary determination, a first expected performance (for example, see FIG. 24(C)) and a second expected performance (for example, see FIG. 24(D) ), it is possible to execute multiple expected performances, including
When executing the first expected effect and the second expected effect while a plurality of the hold suggestion images are displayed, the hold suggestion images corresponding to these expected effects (for example, the hold icon to be read ahead) are Identification display that can be distinguished from the hold suggestion image (for example, displaying the hold icon corresponding to the expected performance at a higher position than other hold icons, and displaying the pedestal located below this hold icon extended upwards) A gaming machine characterized by being able to perform a performance (see FIG. 24(D)).

According to this configuration, when the first expected performance and the second expected performance are executed, an identification display (for example, FIG. 24 ( (see D)) is executed, so the synergistic effect of the first expected performance, the second expected performance, and the identification display can effectively improve the player's expectations for the execution of the special game. This is possible, and the player can easily specify the pending suggestion images corresponding to the first expected performance and the second expected performance based on the identification display.

(Other configurations regarding the first expected performance and the second expected performance)
Up to this point, the first expected performance, second expected performance, and third expected performance executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment have been described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, but in other embodiments, Regarding the first expected performance and the second expected performance, the following configuration may be adopted.

That is, in the present embodiment, the first expected performance is started at the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol that is being performed when there is a new winning of the pre-read target, and The case where the second expected performance is started midway (later than the first expected performance by a predetermined time) has been described (see FIG. 26). On the other hand, in other embodiments, the first expected performance and the second expected performance may be started simultaneously, as illustrated in FIGS. 27(A) and 27(B). In addition, in FIG. 27(A), the first expected performance and the second expected performance are shown at the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol that is being performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead. An example is shown in which they are started at the same time. In addition, in FIG. 27(B), the first expected performance and the second expected performance are shown in the middle of the next variable display of the first special symbol that is being performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead. An example is shown in which they are started at the same time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which both the first expected performance and the second expected performance are performances that are continuously executed over a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 26). On the other hand, in other embodiments, at least one of the first expected performance and the second expected performance may be executed intermittently. Note that FIGS. 27A to 27C illustrate a case where both the first expected performance and the second expected performance are intermittently executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the start timing of the second expected performance is the middle point of the next variable display of the first special symbol that is being performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead. (See Figure 26). On the other hand, in other embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 27(A), the variable display following the variable display of the first special symbol that is being performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead is The start timing may be the start timing of the first expected performance and the second expected performance. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 27(A), each time the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the first expected performance and the second expected performance that continue for a shorter time than the fluctuation time are started. An example is a configuration.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the start time of the variable display following the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed when there is a new prize to be read in advance is the start timing of the first expected performance. (See Figure 26). On the other hand, in other embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 27(B), when there is a new winning of the prefetch target, the variable display after the first special symbol variable display that is being performed is An intermediate point in time may be used as the start timing of the first expected performance and the second expected performance. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 27(B), the end timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol ends every time a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol starts. An example of such a configuration is to start a first expected performance and a second expected performance that continue until the end.

In addition, when both the first expected performance and the second expected performance are executed intermittently, as illustrated in FIG. 27(C), each time the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the variable time A first expected performance that continues for a predetermined period shorter than , is started, and an end timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol ends every time a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol starts. An example of such a configuration is to start a second expected performance that continues until the end of the event.

In addition, up to this point, we have explained the case where the expected performance is executed across three variations, but the expected performance may also be executed when the expected performance is executed across two variations, or the first special There are cases where the process is executed only in the previous variable display of symbols.

Note that the end timing of the first expected performance and the second expected performance is not limited to the start timing of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the pending icon to be read ahead, but may be the following timing. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 27(A), it may be in the middle of the variable display immediately before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the pending icon to be read ahead. Alternatively, the timing may be in the middle of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the pending icon to be pre-fetched (for example, at the ready-to-win timing).

In addition, although FIGS. 26, 27(A), and 27(B) illustrate the case where the first expected performance and the second expected performance end at the same time, the first expected performance and the second expected performance are It may be configured to end at different timings.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which a chance mode performance is executed as the first expected performance, and a performance display showing the character gathering power is executed as the second expected performance, but the first expected performance The performance content of the second expected performance may be any type of performance as long as it can make the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the presentation mode of the first expected presentation changes during the first expected presentation, and the presentation mode of the second expected presentation changes during the second expected presentation. On the other hand, in other embodiments, both or one of the first expected performance and the second expected performance may be a performance whose performance mode remains unchanged.

Further, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 are used to execute the first expected performance and the second expected performance, but in other embodiments, the example shown in this embodiment may be used. The first expected performance and the second expected performance may be executed using different performance means. For example, the frame lamp 37 may be used to execute the first expected effect, and the board lamp 5 may be used to execute the second expected effect. Further, for example, the display screen 70, the board lamp 5, and the speaker 38 may be used to execute the first expected effect, and the frame lamp 37 and the speaker 38 may be used to execute the second expected effect.

(Other configurations regarding identification display)
In addition, in this embodiment, the pending icon to be read ahead is displayed at a higher position than other pending icons, and the pedestal located below the held icon to be read ahead is extended upward, so that the held icon to be read ahead is The icon can now be easily distinguished from other pending icons. On the other hand, in another embodiment, during the expected performance, a performance display that shows a pedestal located directly under the pending icon to be read in advance vibrating may be performed as an identification display. For example, during the expected performance, an identification mark is displayed directly above the pending icon to be read ahead, and when the pending icon to be read ahead shifts, the identification mark is displayed in the same manner as the pending icon to be read ahead. A display effect such as shifting in the direction may be performed as an identification display. Also, for example, during the expected performance, an irradiation effect is performed in which a beam of light is irradiated onto a pending icon to be pre-read, and the irradiation destination of the beam beam changes to follow the pending icon to be read ahead. It may also be used as an identification display.

Furthermore, after the pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, the following configuration may be adopted. When the pending icon to be prefetched is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, the icon to be prefetched can be easily distinguished from other pending icons by, for example, deforming the pedestal of the icon. You can do it like this.

[About light-emitting effects using each light-emitting group]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, a description will be given of the light emitting effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Here, FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram for explaining the arrangement of the first starting port 21 and each light emitting group. FIG. 29 is a time chart for explaining the light emission effect.

(Arrangement of each light emitting group)
As illustrated in FIG. 28, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a first substrate 510 and a second substrate 520 on which a plurality of color LEDs functioning as board lamps 5 are mounted. The second board 520 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 at a position to the left of the display screen 70 when viewed from the front. One first board 510 is provided on the back side of the game board 2, extending to the left from directly below the first starting port 21, and then extending toward the lower end of the second board 520. . In this embodiment, these first board 510 and second board 520 are connected to the lamp control board 120 via a relay board (not shown), and based on the control signal output from the lamp control board 120, Emission control of the color LEDs mounted on the first substrate 510 and the color LEDs mounted on the second substrate 520 is performed. At least the front side of the first board 510 and the front side of the second board 520 of the game board 2 are made of translucent acrylic plates, and the player can watch the light emitted from the color LEDs mounted on the first board 510. The light emitted from the color LEDs mounted on the second board 520 can be visually recognized through the game board 2.

Note that the color LEDs mounted on the first board 510 are controlled in different ways depending on the color LED located directly below the first starting port 21 and the other color LEDs, so the following explanation will not be given. , a plurality of color LEDs arranged in a position close to the first starting port 21 on the first substrate 510 are called a second light emitting group 512 (see FIG. 28), and the remaining color LEDs on the first substrate 510 (second A color LED arranged at a position farther from the first starting port 21 than the light emitting group 512) will be referred to as a first light emitting group 511 (see FIG. 28) to distinguish between the two. On the other hand, since common light emission control is performed for a large number of color LEDs mounted on the second board 520, in the following explanation, a large number of color LEDs mounted on the second board 520 will be This will be referred to as a light emitting group 523 (see FIG. 28).

[Light production of each light emitting group]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of the light emitting effect of each light emitting group when the display color of the pending icon or the icon changes due to the icon change effect. It should be noted that "variation" and "stop" in the symbols in FIG. 29 respectively mean a fluctuating display and a stop display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, in the icons in FIG. 29, "white hold" means a white hold icon, "blue hold" means a blue hold icon, "blue concerned" means a blue concerned icon, and "green concerned""red" means the green icon, and "red" means the red icon.

(First light emission effect of each light emission group)
FIG. 29(A) is a time chart for explaining the first light emission effect of each light emission group. This first light emitting effect displays a white pending icon (white pending) in accordance with this new winning at the timing when there is a new winning that is subject to pre-reading, and replaces this white pending icon with a blue pending icon (blue pending). At the start of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol determination for the prefetch target (prefetch target variation), as the blue pending icon shifts to the icon display area 72, this pending icon This is a light emitting effect that is performed when the green icon is displayed as a green icon, and the green icon is further changed to a red icon during the prefetch target change.

In the example shown in FIG. 29(A), regarding the variation display of the first special symbol performed three times before the look-ahead target variation, all variation patterns are for no-reach loss (see FIG. 10(C)) is selected, and the no-reach performance is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol. For this reason, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 are activated in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the current performance mode based on the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment executed at the start of the variable display of each first special symbol. Emits light. Specifically, for example, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emitting pattern exclusive to the first normal mode. Furthermore, when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emitting pattern exclusive to the second normal mode. Furthermore, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emission pattern exclusive to the third normal mode.

On the other hand, regarding the variation display of the first special symbol, which is the prefetch target variation, as is clear from the fact that the green icon and the red icon are displayed, the variation pattern for jackpot (Figure 10 ( A) or a fluctuation pattern for reach loss (see Figure 10 (B)) is selected, and a reach effect is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, and various preview effects that make you expect a jackpot. (Step-up notices and dialogue notices) will be executed. Therefore, when the look-ahead target variation starts, the first light emission group 511 and the third light emission group 523 perform the reach effect based on the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the look-ahead target variation. It starts emitting light in a light emission pattern that corresponds to fluctuations and previews that correspond to the fluctuating effects and preview effects that will be displayed.

Although not shown in FIG. 29, when transitioning from any of the normal modes from the first normal mode to the third normal mode to the chance mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the first light emitting group 511 and Three light emitting groups 523 emit light. Further, when transitioning from either the normal mode or the chance mode to the intense heat mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emission pattern exclusive to the intense heat mode. In addition, the production mode may shift to chance mode or super hot mode before the start of the pre-reading target change, and in such cases, based on the preliminary judgment result related to the suspension of the first special symbol judgment for the pre-reading target. Thus, the light emission of the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 is controlled. On the other hand, when the production mode shifts to chance mode or super hot mode after the start of the look-ahead target variation, the first light emitting group is 511 and the third light emitting group 523 are controlled.

On the other hand, regarding the second light emitting group 512, the following light emitting effect is performed. That is, when no special icon is displayed in either the hold icon display area 71 or the icon display area 72, that is, even if the hold icon or the icon is displayed, both of these are white icons. At certain times, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a white blinking pattern that slowly blinks (brightens and darkens) in white.

On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 29(A), when the next variable display of the first special symbol that was being performed when there was a new win to be read ahead is started, As the white hold icon changes to a blue hold icon, the second light emitting group 512 starts emitting light in a blue blinking pattern. That is, as the white hold icon changes to a blue hold icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from a white blinking pattern to a blue blinking pattern.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 29(A), when the prefetch target variation is started, the blue pending icon changes to the green icon, and the second light emitting group 512 blinks in green. It starts emitting light in a green blinking pattern. That is, as the blue pending icon changes to the green icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 changes from a blue blinking pattern to a green blinking pattern. After that, at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when reach is established) during execution of the look-ahead target variation, the green icon changes to the red icon, and the second light emitting group 512 blinks in red. Starts emitting light in a pattern. That is, as the green icon changes to the red icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 changes from the green blinking pattern to the red blinking pattern.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to make the second light emitting group 512 flicker in the same color as the pending icon (or the icon), it is based on the preliminary determination result regarding the pending first special symbol determination that is the target of pre-reading. Thus, the light emission of the second light emission group 512 is controlled.

Further, when the loss notification effect is executed in the pre-reading target variation, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is returned from the red blinking pattern to the white blinking pattern as the pre-reading target variation ends.

(Second light emission effect for each light emission group)
FIG. 29(B) is a time chart for explaining the second light emission effect of each light emission group. This second light emission control displays a non-white pending icon (in this case, a blue pending icon) at the timing when there is a new win for the pre-read target, and displays a blue pending icon when the pre-read target change starts. This is a light emitting effect performed when this pending icon is displayed as a green icon as the icon is shifted to the icon display area 72.

In the example shown in FIG. 29(B), regarding the two first special symbol fluctuation displays that are performed before the look-ahead target fluctuation, both are fluctuation patterns for no-reach misses (see FIG. 10(C)) is selected, and the no-reach performance is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, so the first light emission group 511 and the third light emission group 523 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the current performance mode. This is the same as described above based on FIG. 29(A). In addition, as it is clear from the fact that the green icon is displayed, when the look-ahead target change occurs, a reach effect is executed, and various preview effects that make you expect a big win are executed, so when the look-ahead target change , the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 start emitting light in the above-described light emitting pattern corresponding to fluctuations and advance notice.

On the other hand, regarding the second light emitting group 512, the following light emitting effect is performed. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 29(B), before there is a new prize to be read ahead, the special icon is not displayed, so the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a white blinking pattern. There is. On the other hand, as a blue pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71 in response to a new prize to be read in advance, the second light emitting group 512 starts emitting light in a blue blinking pattern. Therefore, a blue pending icon is displayed at the timing when a new prize to be read ahead is received, and almost at the same time, the light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 changes from a white blinking pattern to a blue blinking pattern.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 29(B), when the prefetch target variation is started, the blue pending icon changes to the green icon, and the second light emitting group 512 flashes in a green blinking pattern. starts emitting light. That is, as described above based on FIG. 29(A), as the blue pending icon changes to the green icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 changes from the blue blinking pattern to the green blinking pattern. change into a pattern.

(Third light emission effect for each light emission group)
FIG. 29(C) is a time chart for explaining the third light emission effect of each light emission group. This third light emission control displays a white pending icon in accordance with the new winning at the timing when there is a new winning for the pre-reading target, and when the pre-reading target change starts, the white pending icon is displayed. This is a light emitting effect performed when this pending icon is displayed as a red icon as the icon shifts to the area 72.

In the example shown in FIG. 29(C), in the same way as described above based on FIG. 29(B), in the variation display of the first special symbol performed twice before the prefetch target variation, The first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the mode, and in the prefetch target variation, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned fluctuation/prediction. do.

On the other hand, regarding the second light emitting group 512, the following light emitting effect is performed. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 29(C), before there is a new prize to be read ahead, the special icon is not displayed, so the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a white blinking pattern. . Further, a pending icon is displayed in response to a new winning of a pre-reading target, but this pending icon is a white pending icon, and its display color does not change until the pre-reading target change starts. Therefore, even after a new prize for the pre-read target is won, the second light emitting group 512 continues to emit light in the white blinking pattern until the pre-read target changes start (see FIG. 29(C)). .

Thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 29(C), when the prefetch target variation is started, the white pending icon changes to the red icon, and the second light emitting group 512 flashes in a red blinking pattern. starts emitting light. That is, as the white pending icon changes to the red icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 changes from a white blinking pattern to a red blinking pattern.

Here, the light emission effect of the first light emission group 511 and the third light emission group 523 and the light emission effect of the second light emission group 512 have been explained, but as is clear from the above explanation based on FIG. When an icon change effect that changes the display mode of the icon) from the first display mode to the second display mode is executed, a light emission corresponding to the second display mode that is the display mode after the change of the pending icon (or the icon) is executed. The second light emitting group 512 emits light in a pattern (first light emitting pattern), and when the second light emitting group 512 is emitting light in this first light emitting pattern, the first light emitting group 512 emits light in a second light emitting pattern different from the first light emitting pattern. The light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light.

In this embodiment, since the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the same color as the display color of the hold icon (or the icon) after the change, the player can display the hold icon (or the icon) without looking at it. By looking at the second light emitting group 512, it is possible to easily recognize the display color of the pending icon (or the icon) after the change. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the icon of the prefetch target may be temporarily hidden during the change of the prefetch target, and the second light emission group 512 also emits light in the first light emission pattern at this time. Therefore, even when the icon is temporarily hidden, the player can recognize the display color of the icon.

Further, when the second light emitting group 512 is emitting light in the first light emitting pattern, a second light emitting pattern different from the first light emitting pattern (emission color when the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the first light emitting pattern) is displayed. The first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emitting pattern (emitting light in different colors). Therefore, the light emission of the second light emission group 512 in the first light emission pattern can be highlighted, and the icon change effect of the pending icon (or the icon) and the light emission that causes the second light emission group 512 to emit light in the first light emission pattern. It is possible to further improve the performance effect obtained by the synergistic effect with the performance.

Note that the blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 has the following characteristics. The white blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is set to the longest period in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in white. The light emitting group 512 blinks at a slow speed. In addition, the blue blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is set such that the period in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in blue is set to a longer time, so that the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the blue blinking pattern, The second light emitting group 512 blinks at a low speed. In addition, the green blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is such that the period in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in green is set to a medium time, so the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the green blinking pattern. , the second light emitting group 512 blinks at a medium speed. In addition, the red blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is set to the shortest period in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in red, so when the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the red blinking pattern, The second light emitting group 512 blinks at high speed.

In this way, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the same color as the pending icon (or the icon), and the blinking speed of the second light emitting group 512 becomes faster as the jackpot reliability becomes higher. Expectations can be effectively improved.

(Regarding gaming machine 1 that can perform light emitting effects)
Up to this point, the light emitting effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has been explained with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. It can be seen as an opportunity.

A first light emitting means (for example, first light emitting group 511),
a second light emitting means (for example, second light emitting group 512);
A determining means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game);
Reservation means that can reserve the right of the judgment up to a predetermined number (the acquired information obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 is stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4 reserve The acquired information obtained when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 22 is stored in any of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38(A)), and the acquired information is stored in the special drawing 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special drawing 2.・The main CPU 81 stored in either of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38(A));
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling execution of production,
The performance control means is
Displaying a reservation suggestion image (e.g., a reservation icon) that suggests that the right to make a decision is reserved, and changing the display mode of the reservation suggestion image from a first display mode to a mode that is lower than the first display mode. It is possible to perform a change effect (for example, an icon change effect) that changes the display mode to a second display mode that suggests that there is a high possibility that a special game will be executed;
When the change effect is executed, the second light emitting means is caused to emit light in a first light emitting pattern corresponding to the second display mode, and when the second light emitting means is emitting light in the first light emitting pattern, A gaming machine characterized in that the first light emitting means emits light in a second light emitting pattern different from the first light emitting pattern (for example, see FIG. 29).

According to this configuration, when a change effect (for example, an icon change effect) is executed, the second light emission means (for example, , the second light emitting group 512) emit light, and a synergistic effect of the light emission of the second light emitting means in the first light emitting pattern and the change effect makes it possible to obtain a high effect. Furthermore, while the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern, the first light emitting means emits light in a second light emitting pattern (different from the first light emitting pattern) (for example, see FIG. 29). Therefore, by causing the first light emitting means to emit light in the same first light emitting pattern when the second light emitting means is emitting light in the first light emitting pattern, an effect can be created in which the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem of not being able to obtain sufficient effects.

Although not shown in the drawings, in the game machine 1 of this embodiment, when the second light emitting group 512 is blinking in the same color as the non-white pending icon (or the icon), the light emitted from the first starting port 21 is Even if there is a new prize winning and the pending icon can be displayed as a special icon in response to this new winning, a configuration is adopted in which this pending icon is displayed as a white pending icon, which is the default pending icon. There is. That is, when the second light emitting group 512 is blinking in the same color as the pending icon (or the icon) other than white, execution of the icon change effect for the new pending icon is restricted. For this reason, for example, when the second light emission group 512 is blinking in green to correspond to a green hold icon, the same green hold icon is newly displayed, and the green light emission of the second light emission group 512 is It is possible to effectively suppress the problem of not knowing which pending icon is the corresponding pending icon.

(Other configurations related to light emitting effects)
Regarding the light emission effect, the following configuration may be adopted.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 and the second light emitting group 512 emit light in different colors, that is, when the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 , the case where the second light emitting group 512 and the second light emitting group 512 do not emit light in the same color has been described. It may also be possible to emit light.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in a white blinking pattern when no special icon is displayed. However, in other embodiments, when no special icon is displayed, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in a white blinking pattern. , the second light emitting group 512 may be kept in a non-emitting state, and at the timing when a special icon is displayed, light emission control may be started to cause the second light emitting group 512 to blink in the same color as the special icon.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, for example, when the pending icon to be read ahead changes to a red pending icon, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in red, but the light emitting pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is different from the one to be read ahead. The light emitting pattern is not limited to the light emitting pattern exemplified in this embodiment as long as the light emitting pattern allows the player to recognize that the light emitting pattern corresponds to the display color after the change of the pending icon. That is, for example, when the display color of the pending icon to be read ahead changes to red, the second light emitting group 512 is caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern in which red light emission and white light emission of the second light emitting group 512 are alternately repeated. You can. That is, the light emitting pattern of the second light emitting group 512 may be such that there is a moment when the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a color different from the display color after the pending icon to be read ahead changes. For example, when the pending icon to be read ahead changes to a red pending icon, the second light emitting group 512 may be made to blink in red instead of blinking in red, or the second light emitting group 512 may not emit red light. It may be continued.

In addition, in response to a new prize winning target for pre-reading, a first performance button image imitating the first performance button 35 is displayed as a pending icon, and in response to an operation of the first performance button 35 while this pending icon is displayed. Then, this hold icon may change from the first effect button image to a special icon (for example, a green hold icon). In this case, as the hold icon changes from the first effect button image to the special icon, light emission control may be started to blink the second light emission group 512 in the same color as the special icon.

In this embodiment, as the display color of the hold icon (or the icon) changes, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in the same color as the changed display color of the hold icon (or the icon). Although the case where the effect is started has been described as an example, in other embodiments, even if the display color of the pending icon (or the icon) changes, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-mentioned light emitting effect may not start. You can.

Further, as is clear from the fact that the second light emitting group 512 is arranged close to the first starting port 21, the second light emitting group 512 corresponds to the suspension of the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the pending icon corresponding to the pending first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state changes to a display color other than white, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in the same color as the display color after the change of the hold icon, while the display color of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol judgment in the variable probability game state (or time saving game state) is other than white. When an icon change effect that changes the display color is performed, a configuration is adopted in which the light emission effect that causes the second light emitting group 512 to flicker in the same color as the changed display color of the pending icon is not performed. On the other hand, in other embodiments, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the pending icon corresponding to the pending second special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state (or time saving gaming state) changes to a display color other than white. If this occurs, a light emitting effect may be performed in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in the same color as the changed display color of the pending icon.

Further, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which the second light emitting group 512 is fixed at a predetermined position close to the first starting port 21 on the back side of the game board 2, but other embodiments For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a second light emitting group 512 is provided as a performance accessory that can be operated with respect to the game board 2, and the position of the second light emitting group 512 can be changed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first light emitting group 511 is fixed integrally with the second light emitting group 512, but in other embodiments, the first light emitting group 511 can be operated independently. A configuration in which the first light emitting group 511 and the second light emitting group 512 can operate integrally may be adopted.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the icon is displayed until just before the variable display of the first special symbol ends, and if this icon is a special icon, the second light emitting group is displayed until the icon is erased. The case where the light emission control of 512 is continued has been explained as an example (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, in other embodiments, for example, the icon, which is a special icon, is deleted in the middle of SPSP reach, and the light emission control of the second light emission group 512 is terminated as the icon is deleted. May be adopted. Separately from this, the configuration allows the light emission control of the second light emitting group 512 to continue even after the icon is erased, so that the final display color of the icon can be recognized even after the icon is erased. may be adopted.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the second light emission group 512 continues to emit light in the first light emission pattern even when the icon of the prefetch target is temporarily hidden during the change of the prefetch target. However, in other embodiments, when the icon to be read ahead is temporarily hidden, the second light emitting group 512 interrupts light emission in the first light emission pattern, and the icon to be read ahead is A configuration may be adopted in which the second light emitting group 512 resumes light emission in the first light emission pattern when it is displayed again.

[About advance suggestion performance]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33, the advance suggestion performance executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each effect suggestion image displayed in advance suggestion effect. FIG. 31 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the advance suggestion performance, and FIG. 32 is a screen diagram illustrating the performance after the advance suggestion performance is performed. FIG. 33 is a time chart for explaining the advance suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, as a fluctuating performance that is performed while the first special symbol is being fluctuated, a fluctuating performance that fluctuates and displays decorative symbols, Various preview effects indicating the reliability of the jackpot are executed. The advance suggestion performance executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a performance that suggests in advance that a fluctuating performance will be performed. The advance suggestion effect is, for example, when a pseudo continuous effect, SP reach, and SPSP reach are executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the pseudo continuous suggestion image, the SP reach suggestion image, and the SPSP This is an effect that displays a reach suggestion image to suggest in advance that the pseudo-continuous effect, SP reach, and SPSP reach illustrated in FIG. 30 will be executed.

In the advance suggestion performance, a performance suggestion image suggesting each fluctuating performance is displayed for a plurality of fluctuating performances that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the normal game state. In this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 30, the production suggestion images include a pseudo-coupled suggestion image, a group preview suggestion image, an SP reach suggestion image, a SPSP reach suggestion image, and an accessory production suggestion image. , an image suggesting a chance, and an image suggesting a hot topic are prepared.

The pseudo-coupling suggestion image is a production image that suggests in advance that the pseudo-coupling effect explained based on FIGS. This is a round effect image that includes the character ``ren'' (see FIG. 30). In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability when this pseudo-coupled suggestion image is displayed in advance suggestion effect is set to about 8%. In addition, in the advance suggestion effect, there are cases in which one or two of these pseudo-continuation suggestion images are displayed, and if only one pseudo-continuation suggestion image is displayed, the fluctuating effect is a pseudo-double suggestion image. If it is determined that the variation effect will develop into a third pseudo series, and two pseudo-sequence suggestion images are displayed, it is confirmed that the variation effect will develop into a third pseudo-sequence.

The group preview suggestion image is a production image that suggests in advance that the group preview described above will be executed based on FIG. (See FIG. 30). In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability when this group preview suggestion image is displayed in advance suggestion performance is set to about 45%.

The SP reach suggestion image is a production image that suggests in advance that the SP reach described above will be executed based on FIG. This is a representation image of the shape (see FIG. 30). In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability when this SP reach suggestion image is displayed in advance suggestion effect is set to about 10%. When this SP Reach suggestion image is displayed, there are two cases in which SP Reach is executed and a win/loss notification effect is executed at the end of SP Reach, and a case in which SP Reach progresses to SPSP Reach and a win/loss notification effect is executed in SPSP Reach. The latter has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the former. Therefore, when the SP reach is developed after the SP reach suggestion image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the reach effect will further develop to the SPSP reach.

The SPSP reach suggestion image is a production image that suggests in advance that the SPSP reach described above will be executed based on FIG. (See FIG. 30). In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability when this SPSP reach suggestion image is displayed in advance suggestion effect is set to about 30%. If this SPSP Reach suggestion image is displayed, it will eventually develop into SPSP Reach and a winning notification effect will be executed at the end of SPSP Reach, but it will develop from Normal Reach to SPSP Reach without going through SP Reach. There are cases where it develops from normal reach to SPSP reach via SP reach, and the latter has higher jackpot reliability than the former. Therefore, when the SPSP reach suggestion image is displayed, the player can first enjoy the game while expecting the normal reach to develop into the SP reach.

The accessory performance suggestion image is a performance image that suggests in advance that an accessory performance in which the movable decorative member 14 moves will be performed, and in this embodiment, it is a performance image of an oblong heptagon that includes the word "gimmick". This is an image (see FIG. 30). In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability when this role-playing suggestion image is displayed in advance suggestion presentation is set to about 40%. The movable decorative member 14 is normally placed at an initial position (see FIG. 2), where most of the movable decorative member 14 is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the lower end of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the execution of the development performance (see FIG. 12(B)) performed prior to SPSP reach, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern and displays An accessory effect may be performed in which the object moves as if falling to an operating position that covers most of the screen 70. In this way, the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the role-playing effect is executed along with the development effect than when the role-playing effect is not performed along with the development direction, so we use images that suggest role-playing effects. By executing the displayed advance suggestion performance, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for a jackpot.

In addition, prepare the 1st SPSP reach and the 2nd SPSP reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than the 1st SPSP reach, and if the role performance is not performed during the development performance, it will develop into the 1st SPSP reach. If the winning/losing notification effect is executed at the end of the first SPSP reach, and if the accessory effect is executed during the development effect, it will develop into the second SPSP reach and the winning/losing announcement effect will be executed at the end of the second SPSP reach. They may be adopted together.

The chance suggestion image is a performance image that suggests that there is a higher possibility than usual that a winning notification performance will be executed in the variable display of the first special symbol, and in this embodiment, the text "Chance!" (See FIG. 30). This chance-suggesting image does not imply that any fluctuating effect will be executed afterwards, but the jackpot confidence level is set to about 15% when this chance-suggesting image is displayed in the advance-suggesting effect. Therefore, by displaying the chance-suggesting image, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for a jackpot.

The super hot suggestion image is a production image that suggests in advance that a fluctuating effect (super hot text display effect) that displays super hot characters will be executed, and in this embodiment, it is "super hot!!" This is an effect image showing the characters (see FIG. 30). In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability when this super-hot suggestion image is displayed in advance suggestion performance is set to about 65%, so by displaying the super-hot suggestion image, the player's probability of hitting the jackpot increases. It is possible to dramatically improve expectations.

In addition, if this super hot suggestion image is displayed as a result of advance suggestion production, a reach line including the words "Super hot!!" will be displayed when the reach is established, and a voice saying "Super hot!!" will be output from the speaker 38. (See FIG. 32(D)) and a case where a super hot character display effect is performed that displays the words "Super Hot!!" in large size in the center of the display screen 70 at a predetermined timing. There is.

(Specific example of advance suggestion performance)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the advance suggestion performance and the performance after the advance suggestion performance will be described. In FIG. 31(A), at the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72, it is shown that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "lost". In order to notify the user, a state in which three performance symbols indicating a random number of "625" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the above symbol indicating the winning number of "625" is displayed. The three production symbols stop as they are.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 31(A) and 31(B)).

In this way, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the scroll display of the three symbol rows was started in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect suggestion image described above based on FIG. 30 is acquired. The title of the acquisition challenge effect aiming at the goal is displayed (see FIG. 31(C)). Specifically, while three symbol rows are displayed as small symbols in the upper right area of the display screen 70, the words "Obtain Challenge" are displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 70 (FIG. 31(C)). reference). Subsequently, an explanatory performance of the acquisition challenge performance is performed in which the words "Press the button to get the performance!" are displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 31(D)).

When the acquisition challenge effect is performed, a list of effect suggestion images is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 31(E)). Specifically, the pseudo-connection suggestion image, the group preview suggestion image, the SP reach suggestion image, the SPSP reach suggestion image, the role play suggestion image, the chance suggestion image, and the super hot suggestion image described above based on FIG. 30 are displayed on the display screen. 70 is listed. Note that the display shown in FIG. 31(E) is an example, and includes, for example, a pseudo-coupling suggestion image, a group preview suggestion image, an SP reach suggestion image, a SPSP reach suggestion image, a role performance suggestion image, a chance suggestion image, and The super hot suggesting images may be arranged and displayed in the order of execution of the corresponding effects. In addition, although FIG. 31(E) shows an example in which all effect suggestion images are displayed as a list, some effect suggestion images may be displayed, and effect images showing the word "lost" may be displayed. You may display a list including the list.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the performance suggestion images are displayed as a list as shown in FIG. 31(E), an operation promotion performance is performed that prompts the player to operate the first performance button 35 (see FIG. 31(F)). Note that this operation promotion effect is similar to the first effect button operation promotion effect described above based on FIG. Explanation will be omitted. Further, during the operation promotion performance, a list of performance suggestion images is displayed on the display screen 70, but for convenience of explanation, illustration thereof is omitted in FIG. 31(F).

Next, if the player operates the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the operation promotion performance, or if the validity period ends without operating the first performance button 35, the operation corresponding performance is performed. (See Figure 31(G)). This operation-responsive performance is a performance display that shows how an explosion occurs on the display screen 70 and some of the performance suggestion images displayed on the display screen 70 are erased.

When such an operation-compatible production is performed, a production suggestion image that suggests the production that will be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol remains, and an acquisition production notification production that shows the two characters being happy is displayed. (See FIGS. 31(H) and (I)). This acquisition performance notification performance is a performance equivalent to the advance suggestion performance described above. Figures 31 (H) and (I) show a pseudo-coupling suggestion image that suggests in advance that a pseudo-coupling effect will be executed, an SP reach suggestion image that suggests in advance that it will develop into SP reach, and an SP reach suggestion image that suggests that it will develop into SP SP reach. The SPSP reach suggestion image that suggests in advance that the content will be executed, and the super hot suggestion image that suggests in advance that the fluctuating effect that displays super hot text (super hot text display production) is being displayed. Illustrated.

Note that the number of effect suggestion images displayed in the advance suggestion effects illustrated in FIGS. 31(H) and (I) is not particularly limited; , if the judgment result of the current first special symbol judgment is "lose" and the variation pattern of the first special symbol with a relatively short variation time is selected), the number of production suggestion images to be displayed If the jackpot reliability is relatively high (i.e., if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot", or if the fluctuation time is relatively long even if it is a "loss"), 1), a configuration may be adopted in which the number of performance suggestion images to be displayed is increased.

If such a configuration is adopted, the player can more easily recognize the jackpot reliability based not only on the contents of the fluctuating effect suggested by each effect suggestion image but also based on the number of effect suggestion images displayed. becomes possible.

When the above-described acquisition performance notification performance (advance suggestion performance) based on FIGS. 31(H) and (I) ends, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows in the performance symbol display area 73 is restarted (FIG. 31(I) and FIG. 32(A)). In this way, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the scrolling display of the three symbol rows in the performance symbol display area 73 was restarted, a preview performance indicating the jackpot reliability is displayed, for example, the jackpot reliability increases as the stage progresses to a higher level. A step-up notice with a higher level of performance is executed (see FIG. 32(A)). Note that here we will explain the case where a step-up notice is executed as a preview performance, but other preview performances (for example, the content of the lines uttered by the character, the color of the characters and frames indicating the lines), etc. will be explained as an example. In some cases, a line preview indicating the reliability of the jackpot is executed.

In this way, when the preview effect that suggests jackpot reliability is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect that was suggested in advance by the advance suggestion effect (see Figure 31 (I)) is executed (see Figure 32 (B)). , the pseudo second series of variation effects is started (see FIG. 32(C)). After that, as the 7 symbols on the left and the 7 symbols on the right come to a pseudo-stop and a reach is established, the super hot characters that were suggested in advance by the advance suggestion effect (see Figure 31 (I)) are displayed during the fluctuation. As a performance, a super hot text display performance is performed in which a reach line with the characters "Super Hot!!" written on it is displayed superimposed on the reach pattern (see FIG. 32(D)).

After the reach is established in this way, the normal reach is executed (see Figure 32 (E)), the SP reach effect suggested by the advance suggestion effect is executed (see Figure 32 (F)), and the The suggested SPSP reach is executed (see FIG. 32(G)). When approaching the final stage of this SPSP reach, the first performance button operation promotion performance described based on FIG. 12(F) is executed (see FIG. 32(H)), and the effective When the first performance button 35 is operated by the player during the period, a cut-in occurs (see FIG. 32(I)). Note that FIG. 32(I) exemplifies how a cut-in image including one character and expressed in green is displayed superimposed on the SPSP reach effect image currently being displayed on the display screen 70.

Although the flow of the effect after the cut-in is omitted in FIG. 32, at the end of the SPSP reach, the second effect button operation promotion effect is executed (see FIG. 12 (H)), and this When the second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the second performance button operation promotion performance, a winning notification performance (or a loss notification performance) is executed. Note that FIG. 12(I) shows an example of how the winning notification effect is performed in response to the operation of the second effect button 36.

(Production flow when advance suggestion production is executed)
FIG. 33 exemplifies the flow of the series of effects described above based on FIGS. 31 and 32. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 33, immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the super hot suggestion image, the pseudo consecutive suggestion image, and the SP reach suggestion image are displayed. , a preliminary suggestion effect (see FIGS. 31(H) and (I)) that displays an SPSP reach suggestion image may be executed.

When such a prior suggestion performance is executed, thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 33, a step-up notice may be given before the pseudo continuous performance suggested by the advance suggestion performance is performed. (See FIG. 31(I) and FIGS. 32(A) to (B)). Then, after the step-up notice, a pseudo continuous effect is executed, and at the timing when reach is established during the pseudo second variable effect, a super hot character display effect is executed (see FIGS. 33 and 32 (D)) .

When the reach is established in this way, the normal reach that is not suggested by the advance suggestion performance is executed (see Fig. 33, Figure 32 (E)), and the SP reach suggested by the advance suggestion production is executed (Fig. 33, (See FIG. 32(F)), and the SPSP reach that was also suggested by the advance suggestion effect is executed (See FIGS. 33 and 32(G)). After that, when approaching the final stage of SPSP reach, the first performance button operation promotion performance is performed (see FIG. 32(H)), and the first performance button 35 is pressed during the validity period related to this first performance button operation promotion performance. When operated, a cut-in occurs (see FIG. 33 and FIG. 32(I)). The flow of the performance after this cut-in occurs is as described above.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 that can execute advance suggestion effects)
Up to this point, the advance suggestion performance executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been explained with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. However, the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such advance suggestion performance is It can be viewed as a gaming machine.

A determining means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game);
When the determination is made, a symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is displayed variably on a predetermined symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41), and then a symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. A symbol display control means (main CPU 81 that executes steps S311 and S315 in FIG. 42),
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling execution of production,
The performance control means is
A fluctuating performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance, a group notice, an SP reach, a SPSP reach, a character performance, a super hot character display performance, etc.) that is performed while the symbol is being fluctuated, and that the fluctuating performance is performed. It is possible to perform advance suggestion effects (for example, see FIGS. 31(H) and (I)),
After performing the advance suggestion performance regarding a part of the plurality of fluctuating performances that are performed during the fluctuating display of the symbol, executing the fluctuating performance that is not suggested by the prior suggestion performance, and then, A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the part of the fluctuating performance suggested by the advance suggestion performance (see FIG. 33).

According to such a gaming machine, before the fluctuating performance suggested by the advance suggestion performance (in the examples shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, pseudo continuous performance, super hot character display performance, SP reach, SPSP reach) , since a fluctuating performance (for example, step-up notice: see FIG. 32(A)) that is not suggested by the advance suggestion performance is performed (see FIG. 33), it is possible to make the player feel a sense of surprise. By the way, if the advance suggestion performance is executed for all of the multiple fluctuating performances, the player will not be able to enjoy the game while guessing the fluctuating performance that will be performed afterwards, and as a result, the advance suggestion performance will not be executed. This may cause problems such as reducing the interest of the performance during fluctuations. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, since a fluctuating performance that is not suggested by the advance suggestion performance may be executed, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

(Other configurations related to advance suggestion performance)
Regarding the advance suggestion performance, the following configuration may be adopted.
That is, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 30, an SU notice suggestion image that suggests in advance that a step-up notice will be executed is not prepared, and FIGS. The explanation has been given by taking as an example a case where a step-up notice is executed after the above-mentioned advance suggestion effect is performed based on the above-mentioned information. On the other hand, in another embodiment, an SU preview suggestion image that can be displayed by advance suggestion effect is prepared, and in the list display described above based on FIG. 32(E), a list including this SU preview suggestion image is displayed. After that, in the advance suggestion performance described above based on FIGS. 32(H) and (I), the advance suggestion performance in which the SU preview suggestion image is not displayed is performed, and then the step-up of FIG. 32(A) is performed. It is also possible to perform a flow effect such as executing a notice.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the advance suggestion performance is executed immediately after the fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is started, and the fluctuating performance suggested by this advance suggestion performance is executed within the same fluctuation. was explained using an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, a preliminary judgment process is performed on the variable display of this first special symbol as a pre-reading target variation, and based on the result of this preliminary judgment process, a fluctuating production that is executed with the pre-reading target variation. may be specified, and based on this identification result, a prior suggestion effect may be executed before the prefetch target variation is started.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the advance suggestion effect is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the operation promotion effect illustrated in FIG. 31(F) may be executed. Instead, the advance suggestion effect may be executed regardless of the operation of the first effect button 35.

[About the first omen performance and the second omen performance]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first precursor performance and the second precursor performance that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining two types of precursor performances (an example of a first expected performance and a second expected performance) and four types of suggestion performances.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the above-mentioned no-reach effect (an example of the fourth suggestion effect) based on FIG. 9(B), and the normal reach effect (first suggestion effect) described above based on FIG. 9(F) etc. example), the pseudo third series variation effect (an example of the second suggestion effect) based on FIG. 11(H), etc., and the SPSP reach (third suggestion effect) described above based on FIG. example) can be executed.

FIGS. 34(A) to (D) show these non-reach effects, normal reach, pseudo third consecutive variable effects, and SPSP reach. Among these four types of effects, if the probability of a winning notification effect being executed in normal reach (see FIG. 34(B)) is the first degree, in this embodiment, this first degree is about 2%. It is set. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when two pseudo continuous effects are executed and develop into a pseudo third continuous variable effect, a reach effect (SP reach or SPSP reach) that is greater than or equal to SP reach is executed. Since it is certain that the winning notification effect will be executed when the pseudo third consecutive sequence develops, the possibility that the winning notification effect will be executed in the normal reach is higher than the possibility that the winning notification effect will be executed in the normal reach. Then, in this embodiment, this second degree is set to about 15%.

Further, assuming that the possibility that a winning notification effect will be executed in SPSP reach (see FIG. 34(D)) is a third degree, in this embodiment, this third degree is set to about 30%. Furthermore, since the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment adopts a configuration in which the hit notification effect is not executed unless the reach effect is executed, if the no-reach effect is performed (see FIG. 34(A)), When the possibility that the notification effect will be executed is set to a fourth degree, in this embodiment, this fourth degree is set to 0%.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the right to determine the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is reserved, a jackpot game is executed before the first special symbol determination is performed for that right. In addition to pre-determining whether or not to do so, a pre-determination process is performed to pre-determine which variation pattern will be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the first special symbol determination is performed. On the other hand, since the sub ROM 92 of the sub control board 90 stores information indicating the correspondence between the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the production pattern of the variation production using production symbols, the sub CPU 91 Based on the preliminary determination result (prior determination information) obtained from the main control board 80, it is determined whether or not a no-reach effect will be executed due to a pre-read target variation, whether or not a normal reach will be executed due to a pre-read target variation, and whether a pre-read target variation will be executed. It is possible to specify before the start of the look-ahead target variation whether or not this will develop into a pseudo third series of variation effects, and whether SPSP reach will be executed with the look-ahead target variation.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since it is possible to specify the performance to be performed based on the prefetch target variation, based on this identification result, the game machine 1 can give the player a jackpot before the prefetch target variation starts. It is preferable to create an effective performance that arouses expectations.

(First omen performance)
Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the preliminary determination result, a first expectation effect that makes the player expect that a winning notification effect will be executed due to the prefetched target variation before the prefetched target variation is started. As a result, the first omen effect will be executed. This first omen effect may be any type of effect as long as it can make the player expect a jackpot, but in this embodiment, the first omen effect is displayed on the display screen 70. The background image representing the daytime situation is changed to the background image representing the evening situation, and the background image representing the evening situation is displayed on the display screen 70, and the speaker 38 produces a corresponding effect corresponding to this background image. A performance that outputs sound is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal reach which suggests that the probability that the winning notification effect will be executed is at the first level, and the first level which indicates that the possibility that the winning notification effect will be executed is higher than the first level. A configuration in which the above-mentioned first precursor effect is executed before the start of the look-ahead target variation, on the condition that at least one of the pseudo third consecutive variation effects that suggest that the change is of a degree 2 is executed in the look-ahead target variation. is adopted. In other words, when the first precursor performance is executed, a configuration is adopted in which at least one of the normal reach and the pseudo third consecutive variation performance is executed in the prefetch target variation.

According to this configuration, at the time when the first precursor effect is executed, a normal reach is executed with the look-ahead target variation, a pseudo third consecutive variation effect is executed with the look-ahead target variation, and a pseudo reach is executed with the look-ahead target variation. It can be said that this is an effective performance in making the player expect that the winning notification performance will be executed because it is confirmed that either the third consecutive variable performance will develop or the normal reach will be executed.

(Second omen performance)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the preliminary determination result, a second expectation that makes the player expect that a winning notification effect will be executed with the prefetched target variation before the prefetched target variation is started. As a performance, a second omen performance will be executed. This second omen effect may be any type of effect as long as it can make the player expect a jackpot, but in this embodiment, the second omen effect is displayed on the display screen 70. The background image representing the daytime situation is changed to a background image representing the nighttime situation, and the background image representing the nighttime situation is displayed on the display screen 70, and a corresponding effect corresponding to this background image is transmitted from the speaker 38. A performance that outputs sound is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the SPSP reach that suggests that the probability that the winning notification effect will be executed is the third degree (higher than the first degree), and the possibility that the winning notification effect will be executed is On the condition that either one of the no-reach effects suggesting a fourth degree (lower than the first degree) is executed in the look-ahead target variation, the second above-mentioned A structure is adopted in which a foreshadowing effect is executed. In other words, when the second precursor performance is executed, a configuration is adopted in which either the SPSP reach or the no-reach performance is executed in the prefetch target variation.

According to this configuration, at the time when the second precursor effect is executed, it is determined that either the no-reach effect will be executed due to the change in the pre-read target or the SPSP reach effect will be executed due to the change in the read-ahead target. In other words, if a no-reach effect is executed due to a change in the look-ahead target after the second omen effect is executed, the second omen effect functions as a so-called fake effect, while a change in the look-ahead target occurs after the second omen effect is executed. When SPSP reach is executed, the second omen performance functions as a big chance performance. In addition, if the second omen performance functions as a big chance performance, an SPSP reach that can be expected to be a bigger hit than the normal reach that is confirmed by the execution of the first omen performance or the pseudo third consecutive variable performance will be executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the second omen performance is a great chance performance.

In addition, if the pseudo third consecutive variation effect is executed due to the look-ahead target variation, it is certain that a reach effect greater than or equal to SP reach will be executed at that point, so the first At the time when the precursor performance is executed, it is confirmed that some kind of reach performance will be executed due to the change in the prefetched target. On the other hand, when the second omen effect is executed, it may be determined that the no-reach effect will be executed due to the change in the look-ahead target as described above, so the first omen effect and the second omen effect are executed at the same time. It is not desirable to do so.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is prohibited that the first precursor performance and the second precursor performance are executed at the same time, and the execution conditions for the first precursor performance and the execution conditions for the second precursor performance are different. If both conditions are satisfied, one of the foreshadow effects is executed.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 that can execute the first omen performance and the second omen performance)
Up to this point, with reference to FIG. 34, we have described the first precursor performance and the second precursor performance that are executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, but it is possible to execute such a first precursor performance and second precursor performance. The gaming machine 1 can be regarded as the following gaming machine.

A determining means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game);
When the determination is made, a symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is displayed variably on a predetermined symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41), and then a symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. A symbol display control means (main CPU 81 that executes steps S311 and S315 in FIG. 42),
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling execution of production,
The performance control means is
Based on the result of the determination, execute a winning notification effect to notify that the special game will be executed or a loss notification effect to notify that the special game will not be executed (see FIG. 9(G));
As an expectation performance that causes expectations that the winning notification performance will be executed, a first expectation performance (e.g., first omen performance: see FIG. 34) or a second expectation performance (e.g., second omen performance: see FIG. 34) is used. is feasible and
When the first expected performance is executed, a first suggestion performance (for example, normal reach: see FIG. 34(B)) that suggests that the probability that the winning notification performance will be executed is a first degree; at least one of a second suggestive effect that suggests that the possibility is of a second degree higher than the first degree (for example, a pseudo third series variation effect: see FIG. 34(C)); Run
When the second expected performance is executed, a third suggestive performance that suggests that the possibility is at a third degree higher than the first degree (for example, SPSP reach: see FIG. 34(D)) or a fourth suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility is at a fourth degree lower than the first degree (for example, no reach effect: see FIG. 34(A)). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when the first expected performance is executed, the first suggestive performance (for example, normal reach) that suggests that the possibility that the special game will be executed is of the first degree, and the above-mentioned possibility At least one of the second suggestive performances (for example, the pseudo third consecutive fluctuating performance) that suggests that the nature is of a second degree higher than the first degree is executed. Therefore, when the first expected performance is executed, the player may be aware that the second suggestion performance will be executed rather than the first suggestion performance, or that both the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance will be executed. You can enjoy the game while looking forward to it. In addition, when the second expected performance is executed, a third suggestion performance (for example, SPSP A fourth suggestion effect (for example, a no-reach effect) that suggests that the above-mentioned possibility is a fourth degree lower than the first degree is executed. Therefore, when the second expected performance is executed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the third suggestion performance to be executed rather than the fourth suggestion performance.

(Other configurations regarding the first omen performance and the second omen performance)
In this embodiment, the case where the third possibility is higher than the second possibility has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the third possibility is higher than the first possibility, and , may be lower than the second possibility. In other words, when the second precursor effect is executed, it is confirmed that a no-reach effect will be executed (as in the present embodiment), or a pseudo third consecutive effect with higher jackpot reliability than the normal reach effect is confirmed. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that a performance with a lower jackpot reliability than a variable performance will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first suggestion performance is a normal reach, the second suggestion performance is a pseudo third consecutive variation performance, the third suggestion performance is an SPSP reach, and the fourth suggestion performance is a no reach performance. Although a certain case has been described as an example, the first to fourth suggestion effects may be effects different from those exemplified in this embodiment.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first omen effect is an effect in which a background image representing the evening scene is displayed on the display screen 70 and a corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 38. However, other examples may be used. In the embodiment, for example, an effect using at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the speaker 38 may be performed as the first precursor effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second omen effect is an effect in which a background image representing a night scene is displayed on the display screen 70 and a corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 38. However, other examples may be used. In the embodiment, for example, an effect using at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the speaker 38 may be performed as the second precursor effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where either the first precursor effect or the second precursor effect is executed before the pre-read target change is started based on the preliminary determination result regarding the pre-read target change is explained as an example. However, in other embodiments, immediately after the variable display of the first special symbol is started based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the first special symbol determination is executed. Either one of the first omen effect and the second omen effect may be executed.

[About icon proliferation]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the icon proliferation effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each icon displayed during the third normal mode. FIG. 36 is a screen diagram illustrating an icon proliferation effect in which the effect images related to the hold suggestion display proliferate. FIG. 37 is a screen diagram illustrating an icon multiplication effect in which the effect images related to the variation suggestion display proliferate.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, it is based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the reservation suggestion display that suggests that the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved. Then, from the first display state in which the first number of effect images related to the hold suggestion display are displayed (for example, the state in which one helicopter icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71: see FIG. 36(D)) , a second display state in which a second number of performance images greater than the first number related to the reservation suggestion display is displayed (for example, a state in which two helicopter icons are displayed in the reservation icon display area 71: FIG. 36). A pending icon multiplication effect that changes the display state to (see E)) may be performed.

In addition, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, the first display state ( For example, from a state in which two helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72 (see FIG. 37(F)), a second number of performance images that is greater than the first number related to the change suggestion display is displayed. The icon multiplication effect may be performed to change the display state to the second display state (for example, a state in which three helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72: see FIG. 37(G)).

<Icons displayed during 3rd normal mode>
FIG. 35 shows the type of each icon that is displayed as a pending icon or the icon when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode in the normal gaming state, the display mode of each icon, and the jackpot reliability of each icon. and whether or not each icon can be multiplied (whether the icon multiplication effect is possible or not) are written in association with each other.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, the pending icon (or the icon) is a white pending icon (white icon) illustrated in FIG. 35, a helicopter icon, An airplane icon, a gold icon, and a rainbow icon can be displayed.

(white icon)
The white hold icon is a default hold icon that is displayed even when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode or the second normal mode.

(heli icon)
The helicopter icon is an icon that resembles a helicopter, and the jackpot reliability when this helicopter icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71 (or the icon display area 72) is set to about 5% in this embodiment. ing. In addition, this helicopter icon is an icon that can perform an icon multiplication effect, and can be used to perform a pending icon multiplication effect that multiplies the helicopter icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 or displayed in the icon display area 72. An icon multiplication effect that multiplies helicopter icons may be executed.

As a pending icon multiplication effect targeting this helicopter icon, a pending icon multiplication effect that multiplies one helicopter icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 into two helicopter icons (for example, FIG. 36(D) to ( Examples include (see E)) and a pending icon multiplication effect in which two helicopter icons displayed in the pending icon display area 71 are multiplied into three helicopter icons. In addition, the icon multiplication effect that targets helicopter icons includes the icon multiplication effect that multiplies one helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 into two helicopter icons (for example, FIG. 37(D) to (E)) or the icon multiplication effect (see, for example, FIGS. 36(F) to (G)) that multiplies the two helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 into three helicopter icons. Can be mentioned.

(Airplane icon)
The airplane icon is an icon imitating an airplane, and the jackpot reliability when this airplane icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71 (or the icon display area 72) is set to about 25% in this embodiment. ing. In addition, this airplane icon is an icon that can perform an icon multiplication effect, and can perform a pending icon multiplication effect that multiplies the airplane icons displayed in the pending icon display area 71 or displayed in the icon display area 72. An icon multiplication effect that multiplies airplane icons may be executed.

The pending icon multiplication effect that targets this airplane icon includes a pending icon multiplication effect that multiplies one airplane icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 into two airplane icons, and a pending icon multiplication effect that multiplies one airplane icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 into two airplane icons. An example of this is a pending icon multiplication effect that multiplies two airplane icons into three airplane icons. In addition, the icon multiplication effect that targets airplane icons includes an icon multiplication effect that multiplies one airplane icon displayed in the icon display area 72 into two airplane icons, and an icon multiplication effect that multiplies one airplane icon displayed in the icon display area 72 into two airplane icons. An example of this icon multiplication effect is to multiply two airplane icons into three airplane icons.

Although the helicopter icon and the airplane icon have different display styles and jackpot reliability, both are icons that can be the target of icon multiplication effects, and it is important to know how many pseudo-series the variation effect will develop in the look-ahead target variation. The two have something in common in that they have a suggestive function. For this reason, for example, an icon change effect may be executed in which one or more helicopter icons displayed in the pending icon display area 71 change to the same number of airplane icons as the helicopter icons. Further, an icon change effect may be performed in which one or more helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 change to the same number of airplane icons as the helicopter icons. 37(H) and (I), which will be described later, illustrate how the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 change to the same three airplane icons.

As described above, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect in which one or more helicopter icons change into the same number of airplane icons as the helicopter icons may be executed. The jackpot reliability is approximately 5%, and the jackpot reliability when an airplane icon is displayed is approximately 25%, so an icon change effect in which one or more airplane icons change to the same number of helicopter icons as airplane icons is created. It will never be executed.

(gold icon)
The gold icon is a golden icon that resembles a spaceship, and its jackpot reliability is set to about 68% in this embodiment. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of pseudo sequences of the variable performance performed during the variable display of the first special symbol is developed depending on the number of helicopter icons (or airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72. Since this does not further develop to the pseudo 4th series after the pseudo 3rd series has developed, after the pseudo 3rd series has developed, the helicopter icon or airplane icon is displayed in the icon display area 72. There is little need to keep it. Therefore, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 may be a "jackpot" or a "loss". Also, if a variation pattern for reach loss with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 ) may change to a gold icon.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the gold icon, like the white icon, has a function of indicating how many pseudo series the variable performance performed during the variable display of the first special symbol will develop. do not have. Therefore, the icon multiplication effect targeting the gold icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is not executed.

Also, as is clear from the notation in Figure 35, the jackpot reliability when the gold icon is displayed is the same as the jackpot reliability when the helicopter icon is displayed and the jackpot reliability when the airplane icon is displayed. Compared to this, the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 may change to gold icons because they are set to a higher value than the icon display area 72. A configuration is adopted in which the gold icon displayed on the screen never changes to a helicopter icon (or airplane icon).

By the way, since the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment adopts a configuration in which the gold icon does not change to a helicopter icon (or airplane icon), if the gold icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, the change will occur. A problem arises in that it is no longer possible to suggest how many pseudo sequences the production will develop. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a problem, the gold icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 71, and three heli icons (or After three airplane icons) are displayed, a gold icon is displayed instead of these icons.

It should be noted that if only two helicopter icons (or airplane icons) are displayed in the icon display area 72, the reliability of the jackpot is extremely low because the fluctuating effect only develops to the second pseudo series. In addition, when the two helicopter icons (or two airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to gold icons, it is suggested whether or not the variable effect will develop to the pseudo third series. I become unable to do so. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, while executing an icon change effect that changes the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 to gold icons, the icon display area 72 A configuration is adopted in which an icon change effect for changing the two helicopter icons (or two airplane icons) displayed in the area 72 into gold icons is not executed.

(Rainbow icon)
The above-mentioned FIG. 21 illustrates icons that are displayed when the performance is controlled in a performance mode other than the third normal mode, such as the first normal mode, second normal mode, chance mode, or intense heat mode. However, as is clear from the notations in FIGS. 21 and 35, the rainbow icon is an icon that can be displayed regardless of the performance mode, and its jackpot reliability is set to 100% in this embodiment. Therefore, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is not a "jackpot", the rainbow icon will not be displayed in the icon display area 72.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, only when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 is a "jackpot" , an icon change effect that changes the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 into rainbow icons, or an icon change effect that changes the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 into An icon change effect may be performed in which the two airplane icons are changed to a gold icon and then to a rainbow icon.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rainbow icon, like the white icon and the gold icon, has the function of indicating how many pseudo series the variable performance performed during the variable display of the first special symbol will develop. The icon multiplication effect for the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 72 will not be executed.

Moreover, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 35, the jackpot reliability when the rainbow icon is displayed is the jackpot reliability when the helicopter icon is displayed, the jackpot reliability when the airplane icon is displayed, It is set to a higher value than the jackpot reliability when the gold icon is displayed. Therefore, the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 may change to rainbow icons, or the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 may change to rainbow icons. Although the airplane icon) may change to a gold icon and then to a rainbow icon, the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 72 may change to a helicopter icon (or airplane icon), or A configuration is adopted in which the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 72 does not change to a gold icon.

By the way, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the rainbow icon does not change to a helicopter icon (or airplane icon), so if the rainbow icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, the change will occur. A problem arises in that it is no longer possible to suggest how many pseudo sequences the production will develop. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a problem, the rainbow icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 71, and three heli icons (or When three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) are displayed, or when a gold icon is displayed instead of these three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons), display a rainbow icon instead of these icons. It is said that

It should be noted that if only two helicopter icons (or airplane icons) are displayed in the icon display area 72, the reliability of the jackpot is extremely low because the fluctuating effect only develops to the second pseudo series. In addition, when the two helicopter icons (or two airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to a rainbow icon, it is suggested whether or not the variable effect will develop to the pseudo third sequence. I become unable to do so. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect that changes the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 into rainbow icons, and While performing an icon change effect that changes the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) shown in the image to gold icons and then to rainbow icons, the two helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are executed. (or two airplane icons) to a gold icon, or two helicopter icons (or two airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 to a gold icon and then a rainbow icon. A configuration is adopted in which the icon change effect to be changed is not executed.

(Specific example of pending icon multiplication effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a specific example of a pending icon multiplication effect that multiplies the helicopter icons displayed in the pending icon display area 71 will be described. In FIG. 36(A), the first starting hole is displayed while the first special symbol (and production symbol) corresponding to the icon (here, the white icon) displayed in the icon display area 72 is displayed. 21, the game ball wins, and a helicopter icon is newly added to the pending icon display area 71 as the third pending icon (pre-read target pending icon) corresponding to the third pending related to the first special symbol determination. An example of how it is displayed is shown.

In addition, here, we will explain the case where the third hold icon is displayed as a helicopter icon from the beginning, but for example, the timing when the third hold related to the first special symbol determination occurs (see FIG. 36(A)), a white pending icon is displayed, and at the start of the next symbol variation (see FIG. 36(C)), a white pending icon is displayed. The hold icon may change to a helicopter icon.

FIG. 36(B) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 (see FIG. 36(A)). In order to notify that the number is a "loss", a state is illustrated in which three performance symbols indicating a random number of "486" are pseudo-stopped. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the above symbol indicating the winning number of "486" is displayed. The three production symbols stop as they are.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (the leftmost pending icon in the pending icon display area 71 in FIG. 36(B)) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 36(B) and (C)). At that time, the remaining pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 71 are shifted in the direction closer to the icon display area 72, and the helicopter icon, which is the pending icon to be prefetched, is displayed as the second pending icon. (See FIG. 36(C)).

FIG. 36(D) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 (see FIG. 36(C)). In order to notify that the number is a "loss", a state is illustrated in which three performance symbols indicating a random number of "245" are pseudo-stopped. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the above symbol indicating the winning number of "245" is displayed. The three production symbols stop as they are.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (the leftmost pending icon in the pending icon display area 71 in FIG. 36(D)) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 36(D) and (E)). At that time, a hold icon multiplication effect is performed that targets the helicopter icon (see FIG. 36(D)) that was displayed at the position where the second hold icon is displayed (second position) in the hold icon display area 71. As a result, the helicopter icon is displayed at both the position (first position) where the earliest hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 and the second position (see FIG. 36(E)). The pending icon multiplication effect here is realized, for example, by moving the helicopter icon displayed at the second position to the first position and by newly displaying the helicopter icon at the second position.

Note that when the display in FIG. 36(E) is being performed, the pending icon to be read ahead is composed of two helicopter icons, the helicopter icon placed at the first position and the helicopter icon placed at the second position. Therefore, in FIG. 36(E), the arrow of the line extending from the characters "prefetch target" is directed toward these two heli icons.

By the way, if the game ball does not enter the first starting port 21 even though the player continues to play left-handed, the number of pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 71 decreases, and as a result, the player may cause discomfort.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pending icon multiplication effect targeting the helicopter icon displayed in the second position as described above is executed, the 1 Although the number of pending special symbol judgments has decreased, a new helicopter icon is displayed in the second position, so as a result, the state in which the helicopter icon is displayed in the second position will be maintained (Fig. 36(D) and (E)), it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of reservations is not decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem of causing discomfort to the player as described above.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when one (or two) pseudo consecutive presentation is executed and the variable presentation develops into a pseudo second consecutive presentation (or pseudo third consecutive presentation), ( A configuration is adopted in which the possibility of a jackpot is higher than in the case where the variable performance does not develop beyond the second pseudo series (because the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed). On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned pending icon proliferation effect, it is confirmed at the timing when the helicopter icon multiplies into two that the variation effect will develop to at least the second pseudo sequence in the look-ahead target variation, so It is also possible to improve the expectations of the players. In addition, players expect that a further hold icon increase effect will be performed and the number of helicopter icons will increase from two to three (that is, the change effect will develop into a pseudo third series due to the change in the look-ahead target). can be done.

In addition, here, explanation has been given using an example of a pending icon multiplication effect in which the helicopter icon displayed in the second position of the pending icon display area 71 is multiplied into two helicopter icons. A pending icon multiplication effect may be performed in which the helicopter icon displayed at the third position where the pending icon is displayed is multiplied into two helicopter icons. This pending icon multiplication effect is realized, for example, by moving the helicopter icon displayed at the third position to the second position and by newly displaying the helicopter icon at the third position.

Furthermore, as described above, when the next symbol variation is started with the helicopter icon being displayed in both the second and third positions in the pending icon display area 71, the helicopter icon is displayed in the second position. The current helicopter icon is moved to the first position, the helicopter icon displayed in the third position is moved to the second position, and a new helicopter icon is displayed in the third position. A pending icon multiplication effect that multiplies into a helicopter icon may also be performed.

Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 36, a case has been described in which the hold icon multiplication effect is performed in a state where the helicopter icon is displayed at the third position in the hold icon display area 71, but the game of this embodiment In aircraft 1, the icon multiplication effect is not performed for the helicopter icon displayed in the fourth position where the fourth pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71 for the following reason.

That is, if the hold icon proliferation effect is executed with the helicopter icon displayed in the fourth position of the hold icon display area 71, the fourth position will not be released because the helicopter icon will be newly displayed in the fourth position. When a new game ball enters the first starting slot 21, a problem may arise in which the pending icon corresponding to the winning cannot be displayed in the fourth position. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent such problems from occurring, the helicopter icon may be displayed in the fourth position; The icon multiplication effect will not be performed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 36, FIG. 36(F) shows that at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 (see FIG. 36(E)), In order to notify that the determination result of the 1 special symbol determination is a "lose", a state in which three performance symbols indicating a winning combination of "311" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the above symbol indicating the winning number of "311" is displayed. The three production symbols stop as they are.

When a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 (Fig. 36 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the leftmost pending icon (coli icon) in the pending icon display area 71 (F) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the helicopter icon that is the earliest pending icon is displayed from the pending icon display area 71. At the same time as shifting to the area 72, scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 36(F) and (G)). At this time, the helicopter icon displayed at the second position in the hold icon display area 71 is shifted to the first position and displayed like the first hold icon.

In this manner, when the prefetch target variation is started, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the same way as described above based on FIG. 11(D) (see FIG. 36(H)). Specifically, the scrolling speed of the symbol column in the left column decreases and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the symbol column in the right column decreases (the pseudo-stop occurs first). The right symbol (different from the left symbol) (e.g. 8 symbol) pseudo-stops, then the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols decreases, and the 7 symbol pseudo-stops as the middle symbol to notify the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. .

In this way, after the different performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol have pseudo-stopped, when the 7 symbols in the middle row have pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second fluctuating performance that follows the pseudo-first fluctuating fluctuating performance is started. (See FIGS. 36(H) and (I)). Specifically, after the characters “×2” indicating the start of the second pseudo-variable effect are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, the characters “×2” are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 70. Along with this, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

In addition, in FIGS. 36(H) and (I), the helicopter icon (second The helicopter icon) moves to the icon display area 72, and two helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72. However, the pseudo continuous effect is executed after the prefetch target variation starts. (i.e., from the time the display in Figure 36 (G) is displayed until the time the display in Figure 36 (H) is performed), or during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (the display in Figure 36 (H)). 2), the second helicopter icon may move from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72.

Here, based on FIGS. 36(G) to (I), one helicopter icon is moved from the pending icon display area 71 to the corresponding icon display area at the start of the prefetch target variation and at the start of the second pseudo series. The case of moving to 72 has been explained. On the other hand, if the pending icon proliferation effect is performed twice targeting the helicopter icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71, at the start of the look-ahead target variation, at the start of the second pseudo series, and at the start of the pseudo second series. At the start of the third series, each helicopter icon moves from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72.

However, the movement of the helicopter icon after the start of the prefetch target variation is not limited to this; for example, if the prefetch target variation is started with two helicopter icons displayed in the pending icon display area 71. In this case, these two helicopter icons may be moved together to the icon display area 72 with the start of the prefetch target change. For example, if a prefetch target variation is started with three helicopter icons displayed in the pending icon display area 71, these three helicopter icons are displayed together with the start of the prefetch target variation. It may be moved to area 72.

Although not shown in the figure, when a pseudo second series of variable effects develops as illustrated in FIG. 36(I), during this pseudo second series of variable effects, the icon display area 72 An icon multiplication effect is performed in which the helicopter icons displayed in the icon multiply from two to three, and then a (second) pseudo continuous effect is performed, which develops into a pseudo third continuous variation effect. There are cases. Furthermore, when a pseudo second fluctuating performance develops as illustrated in FIG. 36(I), a (second) pseudo continuous performance is performed during the pseudo second fluctuating performance, and When the series variation effect is started, the icon multiplication effect may be performed in which the number of helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 is multiplied from two to three.

Furthermore, when a pseudo second fluctuating performance develops as illustrated in FIG. 36(I), during this pseudo second fluctuating performance, the two helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 Similarly, an icon change effect in which the icon changes to two airplane icons, and an icon multiplication effect in which the airplane icon multiplies from two to three are performed, and then a (second) pseudo-continuous effect is performed to create a pseudo It may develop into a third series of variable effects. Furthermore, as illustrated in FIG. 36(I), when a pseudo second fluctuating performance develops, a (second) pseudo continuous performance is performed during this pseudo second fluctuating performance, resulting in a pseudo three consecutive fluctuating performance. When the eye variation effect is started, the icon multiplication effect may be performed in which the number of helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 is multiplied from two to three.

In addition, when the pseudo third continuous variation effect develops, an icon change effect is performed in which the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 also change to three airplane icons, or the icon display area 72 When an icon change effect is performed in which the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 change to gold icons (or rainbow icons), the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 change to three airplane icons. The icon may change to a gold icon (or rainbow icon) after that.

(Specific example of the icon proliferation effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a specific example of the icon multiplication effect that multiplies the helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 will be described. In FIG. 37(A), the first starting hole is displayed while the first special symbol (and production symbol) corresponding to the icon (here, the white icon) displayed in the icon display area 72 is displayed. 21, a game ball wins, and a helicopter is placed in the first position of the pending icon display area 71 as the first pending icon (pre-read target pending icon) corresponding to the first pending related to the first special symbol determination. An example of how the icon is newly displayed is illustrated.

In addition, here, we will explain the case where the first pending icon, which is the pending icon for pre-reading, is displayed as a helicopter icon from the beginning, but for example, if the first pending icon related to the first special symbol determination has occurred. At the timing (timing when the display in FIG. 37(A) is performed), a white pending icon is displayed, and at the start of the symbol variation following the symbol variation illustrated in FIG. 37(A), that is, the prefetch target variation, a white When the pending icon moves to the icon display area 72, it may change to a helicopter icon.

FIG. 37(B) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 (see FIG. 37(A)). In order to notify that the number is a "loss", a state is illustrated in which three performance symbols indicating a random number of "265" are pseudo-stopped. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the above symbol indicating the winning number of "265" is displayed. The three production symbols stop as they are.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first pending symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 71 A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (the leftmost pending icon in the pending icon display area 71 in FIG. 37(B): helicopter icon) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the helicopter icon moves from the first position of the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time as the shift, scrolling display of the three symbol rows, which are prefetch target variations, is started (see FIGS. 37(B) and (C)).

In this way, when the prefetch target variation is started, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the same way as described above based on FIG. 11(D) (see FIG. 37(D)). Specifically, the scrolling speed of the symbol column in the left column decreases and the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the symbol column in the right column decreases (the pseudo-stop occurs first). The right symbol (different from the left symbol) (for example, 4 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols decreases, and the 7 symbols pseudo-stop as the middle symbol to notify the execution of the pseudo-series effect. .

In this way, after the different performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol have pseudo-stopped, when the 7 symbols in the middle row have pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second fluctuating performance that follows the pseudo-first fluctuating fluctuating performance is started. (See FIGS. 37(D) and (E)). Specifically, after the characters “×2” indicating the start of the second pseudo-variable effect are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, the characters “×2” are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 70. Along with this, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

In addition, in FIGS. 37(D) and (E), the number of helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 increases from one to two as the second pseudo-variable effect starts. Although this icon multiplication effect is shown as an example, this icon multiplication effect may also be executed while the first pseudo continuous variation effect is being performed or during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. be.

As exemplified in FIG. 37(E), when a pseudo second series fluctuating performance develops, a second pseudo continuous performance may be performed while this pseudo second fluctuating performance is being performed. (See Figure 37(F)). FIG. 37(F) illustrates a state in which 6 symbols are pseudo-stopped as left symbols, 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped as right symbols, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as middle symbols.

In this way, after the different performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol have pseudo-stopped, when the 7 symbols in the middle row have pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-third fluctuating performance that follows the pseudo-second fluctuating fluctuating performance is started. (See FIGS. 37(F) and (G)). Specifically, after the characters “×3” indicating the start of the pseudo third fluctuating performance are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, the characters “×3” are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 70. Along with this, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

In addition, in FIGS. 37(F) and (G), the number of helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 increases from two to three as the third pseudo series variable effect starts. This icon multiplication effect is shown as an example, but this icon multiplication effect is executed while the second pseudo continuous variation effect is being performed or during the execution of the second pseudo continuous effect. In some cases.

In this way, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the development of the pseudo third fluctuating effect, a reach is established with, for example, three symbols (see FIG. 37(H)). At that time, an effect display showing a shooting star colliding with the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 is performed (see FIG. 37(H)), and the three helicopter icons become three airplane icons. There are cases where a changing icon change effect is performed (see FIGS. 37(H) and (I)).

Note that when three helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72, if the display of these three helicopter icons continues or if these three helicopter icons change to gold icons, these three helicopter icons may change to a gold icon and then to a rainbow icon.

In addition, if the pseudo third consecutive fluctuating effect develops, the normal reach develops into SP reach and the winning/losing notification effect is performed at the end of SP reach, or the normal reach does not go through SP reach (or the SP reach (via) SPSP Reach, and at the end of SPSP Reach, a winning/losing notification performance is performed.

By the way, the helicopter icon and airplane icon indicate how many pseudo consecutive sequences the fluctuating effect will develop due to the change in the look-ahead target, so these icons may not be used during SP reach or SPSP reach when pseudo consecutive effects are not performed. There is little need to display the icon. Therefore, for example, the helicopter icon (or airplane icon) displayed in the icon display area 72 is deleted at a predetermined timing such as when SP reach develops, during SP reach, when SPSP reach develops, or during SPSP reach. You can do it like this.

(Regarding gaming machine 1 that can perform icon multiplication effect)
Up to this point, the icon multiplication effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has been explained with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. However, the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such an icon multiplication effect is as follows. It can be viewed as a gaming machine.

A determining means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game);
Reservation means that can reserve the right of judgment up to a predetermined number (the acquired information acquired when a game ball wins in the first starting port 21 is stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4 reserve The acquired information obtained when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 22 is stored in any of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38(A)), and the acquired information is stored in the special drawing 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special drawing 2.・The main CPU 81 stored in either of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38(A));
Before the judgment is made on the rights held by the holding means, a preliminary judgment means (executes the preliminary judgment processing of steps S211 and S219 in FIG. 40) for making a preliminary judgment as to whether or not to execute the special game. main CPU 81),
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling execution of production,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a reservation suggestion display (for example, display of an icon in the reservation icon display area 71) that suggests that the right to judge is reserved;
Based on the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the suspension suggestion display, the corresponding It is possible to change the display state to a second display state (for example, see FIG. 36(E)) in which a second number of effect images that are greater than the first number related to the hold suggestion display are displayed. A gaming machine with special features.

According to such a gaming machine, from a first display state in which a first number of effect images related to a hold suggestion display is displayed, a second number of effect images (more than the first number) related to the hold suggestion display are displayed. may change to a second display state where is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to give the player the impression as if the number of pending judgment rights has increased, and as a result, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the pending suggestion display.

A determining means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game);
When the judgment is made, a symbol display control means (for example, the first special symbol display 41) causes a predetermined symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41) to display symbols in a variable manner, and then stops displaying a symbol indicating the result of the determination. 1 a main CPU 81) that controls the special symbol display 41;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling execution of production,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a variation suggestion display (for example, display of an icon in the icon display area 72) that suggests that the symbol is being displayed in a variation manner;
From a first display state in which a first number of effect images related to the variation suggestion display are displayed (for example, see FIG. 37(F)), a second number of effects greater than the first number related to the variation suggestion display is changed. A gaming machine characterized in that the display state can be changed to a second display state in which an image is displayed (for example, see FIG. 37(G)).

According to such a gaming machine, from a first display state in which a first number of effect images related to a variation suggestion display is displayed, a second number of effect images (more than the first number) related to the variation suggestion display are displayed. may change to a second display state where is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the variation suggestion image a change that is not present in a variation production that changes the display color of the production image related to the variation suggestion display (variation suggestion image), and effectively increase the interest of the production using the variation suggestion image. It is possible to improve.

(Other configurations related to icon proliferation effects)
Note that the following configuration may be adopted regarding the icon proliferation effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the icon proliferation effect (the pending icon proliferation effect or the icon proliferation effect) is executed only in the third normal mode. On the other hand, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the icon proliferation effect can be executed also in the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the chance mode, and the super hot mode. Further, the icon multiplication effect may be performed not only when the game is controlled in the normal game state but also when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state or the time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above based on FIGS. 36(D) and (E), in order to increase the number of helicopter icons displayed at the second position in the pending icon display area 71, the start of symbol variation Accordingly, the helicopter icon displayed in the second position is moved to the first position, and the helicopter icon is newly displayed in the second position, so that the helicopter icon is displayed in both the first and second positions. The explanation has been given using the case where the display state is set as an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, when moving the helicopter icon displayed in the second position to the first position with the start of symbol variation, the helicopter icon is multiplied into two, and the helicopter icon is multiplied into two. Both helicopter icons may be displayed at the first position.

Hereinafter, the RAM configuration of each control board for realizing the game control and performance control described based on the drawings up to FIG. 37, and the processing performed by each control board will be described.

[Example of configuration of main RAM 83]
FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining storage areas of the main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area. As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), the main RAM 83 includes a judgment storage area 830, a special memory area 830 as a storage area for storing acquired information etc. acquired when a game ball wins in the first starting port 21. FIG. 1: A first reservation storage area 831, a special figure 1 and second reservation storage area 832, a special figure 1 and third reservation storage area 833, and a special figure 1 and fourth reservation storage area 834 are provided. In addition, the main RAM 83 has the above-mentioned judgment storage area 830, special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 as a storage area for storing acquired information etc. acquired when a game ball wins in the second starting port 22. , a special figure 2/second reservation storage area 836, a special figure 2/third reservation storage area 837, and a special figure 2/fourth reservation storage area 838 are provided.

The determination storage area 830 is a storage area in which various information used for special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834 are storage areas in which various information related to the first special symbol determination are stored, and the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special figure 2/4th reservation storage area 838 is a storage area in which various information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. When both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are pending, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the determination storage area 830, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, when executing the reserved special symbol determination, if the second special symbol determination is suspended, the information is stored in the special symbol 2/first reservation storage area 835. Various information is shifted, and when only the first special symbol determination is pending, various information stored in the special symbol 1/first pending storage area 831 is shifted.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(B), the reservation storage areas 831 to 838 are areas for storing information for reserving the right to judge special symbols, and each of the reservation storage areas 831 to 838 is an area for storing information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol. It includes an area for storing , an area for storing symbol random numbers, an area for storing reach random numbers, an area for storing fluctuating pattern random numbers, an area for storing preliminary determination information which is information indicating the preliminary determination results, etc.

Here, the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number are as described above. The preliminary determination information is information obtained by a preliminary determination process (see FIG. 41), which will be described later, based on the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number. Specifically, the preliminary judgment information includes winning starting opening information, information indicating whether the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, information indicating what type of jackpot it is, It includes information indicating a variation pattern of special symbols, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Here, the winning starting opening information is obtained when the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number stored in the same reserved storage area are triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 21. This is information indicating whether the game ball was acquired as a result of winning the game ball in the second starting slot 22. The preliminary determination information including these pieces of information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number used in the preliminary determination process.

In the gaming machine 1, each time a game ball enters the first starting port 21, the five pieces of information explained based on FIG. - Stored in any of the first reserved storage area 831 to special figure 1/fourth reserved storage area 834. In addition, each time a game ball enters the second starting port 22, the above five pieces of information are stored in order from the special figure 2 first reservation storage area 835 to the special figure 2 first reservation storage area 835 to the special figure 2. It is stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838.

For example, in a state where information is stored in the determination storage area 830 and information is not stored in any of the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834, the first When a game ball wins in the starting hole 21, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired according to the winning are stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831. Further, for example, when five pieces of information are stored in each of the judgment storage area 830, the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831, and the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832, the first starting port 21 is stored. When the game ball wins, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired in accordance with the prize are stored in the special symbol 1/3rd reservation storage area 833.

In addition, when the information stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 is shifted to the judgment storage area 830 when executing the first special symbol determination, the information stored in the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832 and subsequent The information stored in the reserved storage area related to the first special symbol determination is shifted to the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 side. For example, while information is stored in each of the special figure 1/first pending storage area 831 to special figure 1/3rd pending storage area 833, the information stored in the special figure 1/first pending storage area 831 is When shifted to the judgment storage area 830, the information stored in the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832 is shifted to the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831, and the information stored in the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 831 is The information stored in the area 833 is shifted to the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832.

Such information shift processing is similarly performed in the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special figure 2/4th reservation storage area 838 where information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are pending, that is, the special symbol 1/first pending storage area 831 and the special symbol 2/first pending storage area If information is stored in both of the storage areas 835, prior to the shift process targeting the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834, the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 834 is stored. Shift processing targeting the 1st reservation storage area 835 to the special figure 2/4th reservation storage area 838 is performed with priority.

By the way, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 or the second starting hole 22 and various random numbers are obtained during the special symbol fluctuation display or jackpot game, the special symbol judgment and special symbol fluctuation display cannot be performed. It cannot be done immediately. For this reason, when various random numbers are acquired under such circumstances, the main CPU 81 stores the acquired various random numbers etc. in the reservation storage area 831 as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols, as described above. -838. On the other hand, if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not pending, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 81 generates various random numbers etc. obtained in response to the start-up win. It is directly stored in the determination storage area 830.

[Interrupt processing by main control board 80]
Next, interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process executed in the main control board 80. The main control board 80 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 39 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the main control board 80 described based on the flowcharts from FIG. 39 onwards is performed according to instructions issued by the main CPU 81 based on a program stored in the main ROM 82.

First, the main CPU 81 executes a random number update process to update various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a fluctuation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are incremented by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for processing step S1, and after each random number reaches a preset maximum value, it is returned to "0" and updated.

Following the process in step S1, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers in response to input of detection signals from the first starting port sensor 211, the second starting port sensor 221, and the gate sensor 251. Sensor detection processing including processing is executed (step S2). This sensor detection process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 40.

Following the process of step S2, the main CPU 81 executes special symbol determination, causes the first special symbol display 41 or second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then displays the result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying a special symbol indicating , etc. is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 42.

Following the process in step S3, the main CPU 81 executes normal symbol determination, including processing to cause the normal symbol display 43 to variably display the regular symbol, and then stop and display the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

Following the processing in step S4, the main CPU 81 controls the second starting port solenoid 222 that operates the opening/closing member 23 when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened as a result of normal symbol determination. A second starting port opening/closing control process for opening and closing the second starting port 22 is executed (step S5).

Following the process of step S5, the main CPU 81 determines that it is a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination process executed in the special symbol process of step S3. A big winning opening opening/closing control process is executed to open and close the first big winning opening 26 (or the second big winning opening 28) by controlling the mouth solenoid 282) (step S6). This big winning opening opening/closing control process will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 46 to 48.

Following the process of step S6, the main CPU 81 executes a prize ball process to control the payout of prize balls according to winning of game balls (step S7).

Following the processing in step S7, the main CPU 81 transmits to the sub-control board 90 information necessary for determining the various commands and performance contents set (stored) in the main RAM 83 in the processing steps before step S7. Processing is executed (step S8).

[Sensor detection processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 40, following the random number update process in step S1, the main CPU 81 determines whether the gate sensor 251 allows the game ball to pass through the gate 25 based on whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate sensor 251. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step S201). Here, if it is determined that the gate sensor 251 has detected the passing of the game ball to the gate 25 (step S201: YES), the pending number F of normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is set to the preset normal It is determined whether the maximum number of reservations for symbol determination is less than Fmax ("4" in this embodiment) (step S202).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations F is less than "4" (step S202: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the number of reservations F to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S203), and the random number update process of step S1 is performed. Regarding the normal symbol random number that is updated every time the game is played, the value of the timing at which the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 is detected is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S204).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S204 and determines that the gate sensor 251 has not detected the passing of the game ball to the gate 25 (step S201: NO), the number of reservations F is less than "4". If it is determined that it is not (step S202: NO), the second starting port sensor 221 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 221. It is determined whether or not (step S206). Here, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 221 has detected the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 (step S206: YES), the number of pending second special symbol determinations stored in the main RAM 83 T2 It is determined whether or not is less than the preset maximum pending number T2max (“4” in this embodiment) of the second special symbol determination (step S207).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations T2 is less than "4" (step S207: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the number of reservations T2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S208), and the random number update process of step S1 is performed. Regarding the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number that are updated every time the game is played, the values of the timing at which winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 22 is detected are respectively obtained (step S209).

In this way, in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that winning of a game ball to the second starting port 22 is detected in a state where the number of reservations T2 is less than the maximum number of reservations T2max, various random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are be obtained. In addition, if various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are obtained depending on the situation, these random numbers are stored in any one of the special figure 2 first reservation storage area 835 to the special figure 2 fourth reservation storage area 838.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S209, the main CPU 81 determines whether the current state is a high base state (step S210). The main RAM 83 stores a time saving game flag. This time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" when controlling the operation of the opening/closing member 23 so that the game ball enters the second starting port 22 in a low base state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 22. This is a flag that is set to "ON" when controlling the operation of the opening/closing member 23 so that it is in a high base state where it is easy to win a prize. In step S210, the main CPU 81 determines whether the current state is a high base state based on whether or not this time-saving game flag is set to "ON".

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is a high base state (step S210: YES), that is, when the time-saving game flag is set to "ON", the main CPU 81 performs a preliminary determination regarding the suspension of the second special symbol determination. Processing is executed (step S211). Specifically, based on various random numbers obtained when a game ball enters the second starting port 22, jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 43) and fluctuation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 44), which will be described later, are executed. Prior to this, it is determined in advance whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the various random numbers obtained in the process of step S209, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol is determined when the second special symbol determination is executed. Pre-determination processing is performed to pre-determine which variation pattern is to be selected as a pattern. The preliminary determination information that is the result of this preliminary determination process is stored in the same pending storage area where the jackpot random numbers and the like used in the preliminary determination process are stored.

In addition, if a game ball enters the second starting port 22 when the number of pending special symbols T2 in the second special symbol determination is "0" and the game ball is not in the middle of a jackpot game or while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, The obtained various random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the second special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the second special symbol determination is not suspended, the preliminary determination process related to the second special symbol determination is not performed. Such preliminary determination processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 41.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S211, or when it is determined that it is not in a high base state (step S210: NO), the main CPU 81 sets a pending command related to the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S212). This suspension command is a command that notifies that the second special symbol determination is suspended, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. Note that if the process of step S212 is performed without performing the preliminary determination process of step S211, a pending command that does not include preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the process in step S212 is performed after the preliminary determination process in step S211 is performed, a hold command including preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S212 and determines that the second starting port sensor 221 has not detected the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 (step S206: NO), the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S212. When it is determined that the pending number T2 of the special symbol determination is not less than "4" (step S207: NO), the first starting port sensor 211 is activated based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 211. It is determined whether or not winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21 is detected (step S214). Here, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 211 has detected the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21 (step S214: YES), the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is less than the preset maximum pending number T1max (“4” in this embodiment) of the first special symbol determination (step S215).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations T1 is less than "4" (step S215: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the number of reservations T1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S216), and the random number update process of step S1 is performed. Regarding the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number that are updated every time the game is played, the value of the timing at which winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 21 is detected is obtained (step S217).

In this way, in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that winning of a game ball to the first starting port 21 is detected in a state where the number of reservations T1 is less than the maximum number of reservations T1max, various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination are be obtained. In addition, if various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed immediately, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are obtained depending on the situation, these random numbers are stored in any of the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S217, the main CPU 81 determines whether the current state is the high base state (step S218), similarly to the process of step S210. Here, if it is determined that the current state is not a high base state (step S218: NO), that is, if the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF", advance determination processing related to suspension of the first special symbol determination (Step S219). Specifically, based on various random numbers obtained in response to the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 21, jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 43) and fluctuation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 44), which will be described later, are executed. Prior to this, it is determined in advance whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the various random numbers obtained in the process of step S217, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is determined when the first special symbol determination is executed. Pre-determination processing is performed to pre-determine which variation pattern is to be selected as a pattern. The preliminary determination information that is the result of this preliminary determination process is stored in the same pending storage area where the jackpot random numbers and the like used in the preliminary determination process are stored.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the number of pending special symbols T1 in the first special symbol determination is "0" and the game ball is not in a jackpot game or while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, The obtained various random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the first special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the first special symbol determination is not suspended, the preliminary determination process related to the first special symbol determination is not performed. Such preliminary determination processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 41.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S219 or determines that the high base state is present (step S218: YES), the main CPU 81 sets a pending command related to the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S220). This suspension command is a command to notify that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. Note that if the process of step S220 is performed without performing the preliminary determination process of step S219, a hold command that does not include preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the process in step S220 is performed after the preliminary determination process in step S219 is performed, a hold command including preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub control board 90.

[Pre-determination processing by main control board 80]
The preliminary determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described below with reference to FIG. 41. Here, FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination process in steps S211 and 219 of FIG. 40. In addition, here, we will explain the preliminary judgment process that is performed when the right for the first special symbol judgment is reserved, but the right for the second special symbol judgment is different, except that the random numbers and tables used are different. A similar preliminary determination process is performed when the request is suspended.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is in a high base state in the process of step S210 in FIG. 40 (step S210: YES), or if it determines that it is not in a high base state in the process of step S218 in FIG. 40 (step S218: NO), a jackpot determination process is executed (step S2191). Specifically, when the probability state is low (in this embodiment, the "normal gaming state" corresponds to this state), the jackpot random number table for low probability situations (see FIG. 6(A)) is read out from the main ROM 82. Set it in main RAM83. On the other hand, if the state is a high probability state (in this embodiment, the "probability variable gaming state" corresponds to this state), the high probability jackpot random number table (see FIG. 6(A)) is read out from the main ROM 82 and stored in the main RAM 83. set. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot random number obtained in the process of step S209 in FIG. 40 (or the process in step S217 in FIG. 40) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 83. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be determined at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is determined that there is a jackpot at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result of step S2191 (step S2192). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot at the start of the variation (step S2192: YES), the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10(A)) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83. (Step S2193).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that there is no jackpot at the start of the variation (step S2192: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a reach effect is performed during the variation (step S2194). Specifically, based on whether the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2191 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82, It is determined whether a reach effect is performed during the fluctuation.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the reach effect will be performed (step S2194: YES), the main CPU 81 reads out the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 10(B)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2195).

By the way, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose" and the reach effect is not performed during the fluctuation, the first special symbol will be changed based on the number of reservations of the first special symbol determination at the start of the fluctuation. The variation pattern of is determined. This is as described above based on FIG. 10(C). Then, the number of pending first special symbol determinations may be different before and after the suspended first special symbol determinations are exhausted. For this reason, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the first special symbol determination is completed may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the first special symbol determination is actually resolved. be. That is, for the right of the first special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the fluctuation, an accurate fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol may not be obtained prior to the first special symbol determination.

Therefore, if the main CPU 81 determines that the reach effect will not be performed (step S2194: NO), the fluctuation pattern random number determination process of step S2196 and the process of storing advance determination information of step S2197, which will be described later, are performed. The process proceeds to step S212 (or step S220) in FIG. 40 without being interrupted. Therefore, if the determination result of the special symbol determination is "lose" and a no-reach performance will be performed, a hold command that does not include advance determination information will be set.

After setting the jackpot variation pattern selection table or the reach-loss variation pattern selection table, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern random number determination process (step S2196). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern random number obtained at the time of winning the starting opening together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2191 is one of the random numbers specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83. The variation pattern of the special symbol that will be selected in the special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation is specified based on which random number value matches.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S2196, the main CPU 81 generates preliminary determination information and stores it in the main RAM 83 (step S2197). The area where this preliminary determination information is stored is as described above based on FIG. 38.

In this way, the main CPU 81 generates a jackpot based on the obtained information such as a jackpot random number obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22). Prior to the determination process and the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern (that is, variation time) of the first special symbol (or second special symbol) is acquired.

[Special pattern processing by main control board 80]
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control board 80 will be explained with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 39.

As illustrated in FIG. 42, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being played based on whether the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" ( Step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game, and set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (step S301: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, if it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number T2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, if it is determined that the number of reservations T2 is greater than or equal to "1" (step S303: YES), the number of reservations T2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S304).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations T2 is not equal to or greater than "1" (step S303: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is equal to or greater than "1". (Step S305). Here, if it is determined that the number of reservations T1 is greater than or equal to "1" (step S305: YES), the number of reservations T1 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S306).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 81 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 83 (step S307). Specifically, when executing the process of step S307 following the process of step S304, a shift process is executed to shift the information stored in the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to the determination storage area 830. do. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage area after the special figure 2 second reserved storage area 836, a shift process is performed to shift this information to the special figure 2 first reserved storage area 835 side. Also execute. On the other hand, when performing a shift process following the process of step S306, a shift process is performed to shift the information stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the determination storage area 830. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage area after the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 832, a shift process is performed to shift this information to the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 side. Also execute.

When the main CPU 81 stores information necessary for second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination), such as jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers, in the determination storage area 830 through the shift process in step S307, the , executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 and the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S309.

In addition, the game ball is not in the middle of a jackpot game, is not in the process of displaying fluctuations in special symbols, and when the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination and the number of reservations T2 of the second special symbol determination are both "0", the game ball makes its first start. When a prize is won in the opening 21 (or the second starting opening 22), information such as a jackpot random number and a random symbol number obtained in accordance with the winning is directly stored in the determination storage area 830. In such a case, the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process will be executed without executing the shift process in step S307.

The main CPU 81 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S308). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) is determined. Then, special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 83. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 43.

Following the jackpot determination process in step S308, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern selection process to select a variation pattern of the special symbol (step S309). This variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 44.

Following the process of step S309, the main CPU 81 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S308, this special symbol setting information, is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. A fluctuation start command is set in the main RAM 83, including information indicating whether the processing is related to the above, setting information of the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of step S309, information regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, etc. (step S310). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the performance associated with the variable display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, a variable performance including a variable display of the performance symbols on the display screen 70 is started.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 81 starts variable display of the special symbol based on the setting information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command set in the process of step S310 (step S311). At that time, if the processing from step S308 to step S310 is performed with the information related to the first special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 41 Starts displaying fluctuations in . On the other hand, when the processing from step S308 to step S310 is performed with the information related to the second special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 42 is Start variable display.

Next, the main CPU 81 starts measuring the elapsed time after starting the variable display of the special symbol in step S311 (step S312). When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S312 or determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: YES), the elapsed time from which measurement was started in the process of step S312 is changed to the change in step S309. It is determined whether the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the pattern selection process has been reached (step S313). Here, if it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached the variable time (step S313: NO), the process proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the elapsed time has reached the variable time (step S313: YES), it sets a variable end command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the variable display of the special symbol ends (step S314). This variation end command is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, a process is performed in which the performance symbols that have been variably displayed on the display screen 70 are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the determination result of the special symbol determination.

Following the process of step S314, the main CPU 81 ends the variable display of the special symbols started in the process of step S311 (step S315). Specifically, the special symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) set in the process of step S308 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device that was variably displaying the special symbol. Note that this stop display of the special symbol continues until at least a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 81 causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then displays the special symbol (jackpot symbol or loss symbol) that indicates the determination result of the jackpot determination process. The first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Following the process in step S315, the main CPU 81 resets the elapsed time from which the measurement was started in the process in step S312 (step S316), and when the special figure is stopped, including a process to start a jackpot game if it is a jackpot. The process is executed (step S317). This special figure stop processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 45.

[Jackpot determination processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. The main CPU 81 first executes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S3081). Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on whether the jackpot random number stored in the judgment storage area 830 matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6(A)). judge. The winning value here is the jackpot winning value defined in the jackpot random number table for high probability times or the jackpot random number table for low probability times. When a jackpot determination is executed in a high probability state (this embodiment corresponds to the "probability variable gaming state"), the winning value stored in the high probability jackpot random number table is used. On the other hand, when a jackpot determination is executed in a low probability state (in this embodiment, "normal gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" correspond to this state), the jackpot random number table for low probability states is stored in the jackpot random number table for low probability states. The winning value will be used.

In this way, the main CPU 81 performs a startup process in which acquired information such as a jackpot random number obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 is stored in the judgment storage area 830. When the conditions are met, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the process of step S3081, the main CPU 81 determines whether the determination result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" (step S3082). Here, if it is determined that the determination result of the jackpot determination is not a "jackpot" (step S3082: NO), that is, if the determination result of the jackpot determination is a "lose", the setting information of the losing symbol is set in the main RAM 83. (Step S3083). As a result, during the process of step S315, the losing symbol set here will be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, no jackpot game is played.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" (step S3082: YES), the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 A jackpot symbol selection process is executed to select (step S3084). Specifically, if the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 830 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3081 is related to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is , one of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which jackpot symbol matches the random number value defined in the first starting opening winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6(B)). In addition, if the symbol random number is related to the second special symbol determination, the symbol random number is one of the jackpot symbols specified in the second starting opening winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6(C)). One of the jackpot symbols is selected based on whether it matches the random value of .

Then, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected jackpot symbol in the main RAM 83 (step S3085). As a result, during the process of step S315, the jackpot symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and thereafter, a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol is played. will be held.

[Variation pattern selection processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, the main CPU 81 determines whether the determination result in step S3081 is a jackpot (step S3091). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3091: YES), the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10(A)) is read out from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3092).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3091: NO), the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82 (reach effect effect). Based on whether or not the game player matches the corresponding random number value), it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that makes the player expect a jackpot (step S3093). Here, if it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S3093: YES), the variable pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 10(B)) is read out from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3094). On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach effect is not to be performed (step S3093: NO), the variation pattern selection table for no reach loss (see FIG. 10(C)) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3095). .

The main CPU 81 refers to the variation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 by the process of step S3092, the process of step S3094, or the process of step S3095, and executes the variation pattern random number determination process (step S3096). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern selection table for jackpot or the fluctuation pattern selection table for reach loss is set in the main RAM 83, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is set. One variation pattern is selected by reading from the variation pattern selection table. In addition, when the variation pattern selection table for no-reach loss is set in the main RAM 83, based on the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination (or the number of reservations T2 of the second special symbol determination) stored in the main RAM 83. One fluctuation pattern is selected by specifying the number of reservations and reading the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the specified number of reservations from the fluctuation pattern selection table for no-reach loss. By selecting the special symbol variation pattern in this way, the special symbol variation time is inevitably determined.

When the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 83 (step S3097). This fluctuation pattern setting information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 83 by the jackpot determination process in step S308 described above.

[Special figure stop processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 45 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol stop processing in step S317 of FIG. 42. After resetting the elapsed time through the process in step S316, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, as illustrated in FIG. S3171). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3171: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main CPU 81 sets the variable probability game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3173), and sets the time-saving game flag also stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3174). ). Here, the variable probability game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol determination is in a high probability state where the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is relatively high.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by setting the variable probability game flag and the time saving game flag. That is, when controlling the gaming state to the "probability variable gaming state", both the probability variable game flag and the time saving game flag are set to "ON". Further, when controlling the gaming state to the "normal gaming state", both the variable probability gaming flag and the time saving gaming flag are set to "OFF". Further, when controlling the gaming state to the "time-saving gaming state", the variable probability game flag is set to "OFF" and the time-saving gaming flag is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S3174, the main CPU 81 sets an opening command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the jackpot game is started (step S3175). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 26 (or the second big winning hole 28 or the V winning hole 287) during the jackpot game, and is sent in the transmission process of step S8. It is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3171: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176). Here, if it is determined that the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), that is, if the special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state, the high probability stored in the main RAM 83 The remaining number of games K is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3177). This high probability game remaining number K indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the high probability state.

Following the process of step S3177, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of high probability games K is "0" (step S3178). Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of high probability games K is "0" (step S3178: YES), the variable probability game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3179). As a result, special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state.

If the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S3179, if it determines that the variable probability game flag is not set to "ON" (step S3176: NO), or if the remaining number of high probability games K is not "0", If it is determined (step S3178: NO), it is determined whether the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180). Here, if it is determined that the time-saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180: YES), the remaining number of time-saving games J stored in the main RAM 83 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3181). This time saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the time saving state (high base state).

Following the process of step S3181, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of time saving games J is "0" (step S3182). Here, when it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving games J is "0" (step S3182: YES), the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3183). As a result, the support function that facilitates the winning of game balls into the second starting port 22 is no longer provided.

[Big prize opening/closing control process by main control board 80]
46 to 48 are detailed flowcharts of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39. Following the second starting port opening/closing control process in step S5 in FIG. 39, the main CPU 81 determines whether the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" as illustrated in FIG. 46 (step S601). ). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the opening command related to the jackpot game by the process of step S3175 (see FIG. 45), for example. Based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the jackpot game is in progress (step S602).

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S602: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). Here, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7. On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax, operation pattern, validity period, etc. of the jackpot game, and stores the setting information in the main RAM 103 ( Step S604). For example, if setting information for any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X4 (see FIG. 6(B)) is set in the main RAM 83 in the process of step S3085 in FIG. 43, the number of rounds Rmax is set to "5", and the jackpot When setting information for symbol Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) is set, the number of rounds Rmax is set to "9". In addition, for example, when executing a jackpot game of "5R probability variation A", "5R probability variation B", "5R normal A", and "5R normal B" related to the first special symbol determination, the second jackpot game The operation pattern of the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 is set so that the winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened and closed in the opening/closing pattern described above based on FIG. 7. Further, for example, when executing a jackpot game of "7R probability change" (see FIG. 6(C)) related to the second special symbol determination, the operation pattern of the opening/closing member 29, the sliding member 285, and the opening/closing member 27 is set. . In addition, "5R probability variation A" related to the first special symbol determination, "5R probability variation B" related to the first special symbol determination, "5R probability variation" related to the second special symbol determination, "7R probability variation" related to the second special symbol determination. ” or “9R Probability Variation” related to the second special symbol determination, when executing any of the jackpot games, a valid period during which the V winning is valid is set. In addition, when executing the jackpot game of "5R normal A" or "5R normal B" related to the first special symbol determination, no valid period is set.

By executing the process of step S604, various times related to the jackpot game, such as the interval time that is the time from the end of a round game until the start of the next round game, and the ending time after the end of the final round game, are also determined. It is also set.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S604, the main CPU 81 updates the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S605). This round number R is set to "0" before the jackpot game is started, and is updated to a value in which "1" is added each time the process of step S605 is performed.

Following the process in step S605, the main CPU 81 determines whether the number of rounds R updated in the process in step S605 is less than or equal to "5" (step S606). In this embodiment, regarding all jackpots, the second big winning hole 28 is used for the 1st to 5th round games, and the first big winning hole 26 is used for the 6th and subsequent round games (Fig. 6(B) and (C)). Therefore, when the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R is "5" or less (step S606: YES), the main CPU 81 enters the second grand prize via the second grand prize opening solenoid 282 (and the V winning opening solenoid 286). The second big winning hole opening/closing control for controlling the opening and closing of the opening 28 (and the V winning hole 287) is started (step S607). In addition, since this second big prize opening/closing control is as described above based on FIG. 7, detailed explanation here will be omitted.

Following the process of step S607, the main CPU 81 determines whether the current round game to be started is a valid round based on the valid period set in the process of step S604 and the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605. It is determined whether or not it is a game (step S608). Here, if it is determined that the current round game is a valid round game (step S608: YES), a valid round game start command that notifies that a valid round game is started is set in the main RAM 83 (step S609). . On the other hand, if it is determined that the current round game is not a valid round game (step S608: NO), a second grand prize opening opening/closing round game start command is sent to notify that a round game that is not a valid round game is to be started. It is set in the main RAM 83 (step S610).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605 is not less than "5" (step S606: NO), the main CPU 81 connects the first big winning hole 26 to the first big winning hole solenoid 262. The first big prize opening opening/closing control for controlling opening/closing of the opening/closing is started (step S611). Specifically, a long-open round game is started in which the first big prize opening 26 is opened long. In addition, as described above, this first grand prize opening opening/closing control is performed after 10 game balls enter the first grand prize opening 26 or after the first grand prize opening 26 is opened (the first This continues until 25 seconds have elapsed (without 10 game balls entering the grand prize opening 26).

Following the processing in step S611, the main CPU 81 sets in the main RAM 83 a first big prize opening opening/closing round game start command that notifies that a round game for opening and closing the first big winning opening 26 is started (step S612). ).

In addition, the valid round game start command set in the process of step S609, the second grand prize opening opening/closing round game start command set in the process of step S610, and the first grand prize opening opening/closing round set in the process of step S612. The game start command is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the transmission process of step S8 in FIG.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S602 that the opening period of the jackpot game is not in progress (step S602: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is in the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending period is in progress based on whether the elapsed time after the end of the final round of the jackpot game has reached a predetermined ending time. Here, if it is determined that the ending period is in progress (step S613: YES), the process proceeds to step S626 (see FIG. 48), which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the ending period in the jackpot game is not in progress (step S613: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the ending period in the jackpot game is in progress (step S613: NO). It is determined whether or not (step S614). Here, if it is determined that it is not during the interval period (step S614: NO), the process proceeds to step S617 (see FIG. 47), which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is in the interval period (step S614: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the interval time set in the process of step S604 has elapsed since the previous round game ended. (Step S615). Here, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S605: NO), the process proceeds to prize ball processing in step S7. Conversely, if it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S615: YES), the processes from step S605 described above are executed.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is not during the interval period (step S614: NO), that is, when a round game is in progress, as illustrated in FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not it is within the validity period (step S617). Here, if it is determined that the validity period is not valid (step S617: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later. On the contrary, if it is determined that it is within the valid period (step S617: YES), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 287 based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the V winning hole sensor 283. (Step S618). Here, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the V winning hole 287 (step S618: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 287 (step S618: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "ON" (step S619). This V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 287 during a valid round game, and although it is normally set to "OFF", When the passage of a game ball is detected by the sensor 283, it is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S619, the main CPU 81 sets a V winning command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the game ball has won a V prize during the valid round game (step S620).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S620, when it determines that the validity period is not in effect (step S617: NO), or when it determines that the game ball has not passed through the V winning hole 287 (step S618: NO), it is determined whether the second big winning opening opening/closing control started in the process of step S607 (or the first big winning opening opening/closing control started in the process of step S611) has ended (step S621). Here, if it is determined that the grand prize opening/closing control has not been completed (step S621: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the grand prize opening opening/closing control has ended (step S621: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 matches the number of rounds Rmax set in the process of step S604. It is determined whether or not (step S622). Here, if it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: YES), it starts measuring the ending time, which is the elapsed time since the ending period started (step S623), and determines whether the ending period is the same as the ending period. An ending command notifying the start is set in the main RAM 83 (step S624). This ending command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the ending period is in progress in the process of step S613 in FIG. 46 (step S613: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed, as illustrated in FIG. (Step S626). Specifically, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed based on whether the ending time whose measurement was started in the process of step S623 has reached the ending time set in the process of step S604. Here, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S626: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S626: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S627). Here, if it is determined that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S627: YES), the probability variable game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S628), and the The remaining number of high probability games K stored in the RAM 83 is set to "80" (step S629). As a result, after the jackpot game ends, the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) will be performed in a high probability state, with the upper limit being 80 times.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S629 or determines that the V winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S627: NO), the main CPU 81 sets the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to " "ON" (step S630), and updates the remaining number of time-saving games J, which is also stored in the main RAM 83, to "80" (step S631). As a result, the above-mentioned support function is enabled (that is, the game is controlled in a high base state) until the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is performed a maximum of 80 times.

[Main processing by sub control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the main processing executed in the sub control board 90 will be described. Here, FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating the main processing executed in the sub control board 90. Note that the processing performed by the sub control board 90, which will be explained based on the flowcharts from FIG. 49 onwards, is performed according to instructions issued by the sub CPU 91 based on the program stored in the sub ROM 92.

That is, the sub CPU 91 first executes initial setting processing (step S41). Specifically, it executes stack settings, constant settings, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), etc., and resetting of flags, status, counters, etc. stored in the sub-RAM 93. Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether the power-off signal is "ON" (step S42). Here, if it is determined that the power-off signal is "ON" (step S42: YES), the process proceeds to step S45, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the power-off signal is not "ON" (step S42: NO), it is determined whether the storage contents of the sub-RAM 93 are normal (step S43). Here, if it is determined that the storage contents of the sub RAM 93 are normal (step S43: YES), the process proceeds to step S45. Conversely, if it is determined that the storage contents of the sub-RAM 93 are not normal (step S43: NO), a RAM initialization process for initializing the sub-RAM 93 is executed (step S44).

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S44, when it determines that the power-off signal is "ON" (step S42: YES), when it determines that the storage contents of the sub RAM 93 are normal (step S43: YES), interrupt processing is prohibited (step S45), and random number update processing is performed to update various random numbers for determining whether or not to execute various effects, and determining the effect pattern when executing them. (Step S46).

Following the process in step S46, the sub CPU 91 transmits commands stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 through the first interrupt process in step S51 and the second interrupt process in step S53, which will be described later, to the image and acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board. 120 is executed (step S47). On the other hand, the image and sound control CPU 101 performs processing based on this command to control the execution of the effect using the image display device 7 and the speaker 38, and the lamp CPU 121 performs processing based on this command to control the frame Execution of effects using the lamp 37, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the vibration motor 128, etc. is controlled.

Following the process of step S47, the sub CPU 91 determines whether the hold effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to "ON" (step S48), and sets the hold effect flag to "ON". If it is determined that the hold effect flag is set to "OFF" (step S48), the hold effect flag is set to "OFF" (step S48). Note that this suspension effect flag will be explained in detail later.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S49, or when it is determined that the pending production flag is not set to "ON" (step S48: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes an interrupt permission process to permit execution of the interrupt process. By executing this interrupt permission process (step S50), it becomes possible to execute the first interrupt process in step S51 and the second interrupt process in step S53.

Note that after the second interrupt process in step S53 is executed, the process returns to step S45, and the process from step S45 onwards is repeatedly executed.

[First interrupt processing by sub control board 90]
The first interrupt process executed in the sub control board 90 will be described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the first interrupt processing in step S51 of FIG. 49. In this first interrupt process, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not it has received the hold command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S212 or the process of step S220 in FIG. 40 (step S511). ). Here, if it is determined that the pending command has not been received (step S511: NO), the first interrupt process ends and the process proceeds to the second interrupt process of step S53 (see FIG. 49).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the hold command has been received (step S511: YES), the sub CPU 91 updates the hold number of special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 93 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S512). Specifically, when a suspension command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the number of reservations in the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and a suspension command related to the second special symbol determination is updated. If received, the pending number of second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1".

Following the process in step S512, the sub CPU 91 determines whether the pending command received from the main control board 80 includes advance determination information (step S513). Here, if it is determined that the received hold command does not include advance determination information (step S513: NO), a hold icon display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S514). The pending icon display command set by the process of step S514 is a command that instructs display of a pending icon, and does not include setting information for icon change effects.

When this hold icon display command is sent to the audiovisual control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process of step S47 in FIG. 49, a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71. Icon change performance will not be performed for the pending icon.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received hold command includes advance determination information (step S513: YES), the sub CPU 91 sets the hold effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 to "ON" (step S515). ). Here, the hold effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not processing related to various pre-read effects based on advance determination information included in the hold icon command received from the main control board 80 has been executed, and is a flag in step S517 to be described later. - This is a flag that is set to "ON" when the process of step S523 is executed.

Following the processing in step S515, the sub CPU 91 stores the preliminary determination information included in the pending command in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 (step S516), and performs the icon change effect pattern setting process based on this preliminary determination information. (step S517), executes the expected image change effect pattern setting process (step S518), executes the expected effect pattern setting process (step S519), executes the omen effect pattern setting process (step S521), and suspends the process. An icon display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S523). This hold icon display command is transmitted to the image-acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process of step S47 in FIG.

If the setting information for the icon change effect is set in the process of step S517, a pending icon display command including the setting information for this icon change effect is set in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, the icon change effect described above based on FIGS. 21, 35, etc. is realized by transmitting a pending icon display command including setting information for this icon change effect to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120. That will happen. Note that the icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517 will be described in detail later based on FIG. 51.

Furthermore, if the setting information for the expected image change effect is set in the process of step S518, a pending icon display command including the setting information for this expected image change effect is set in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting the pending icon display command including the setting information of this expected image change effect to the image/acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the expected image change effect described above based on FIGS. 21 to 23 is realized. will be done. Note that the expected image change effect pattern setting process in step S518 will be described in detail later based on FIG. 52.

Further, when the setting information of the expected performance is set in the process of step S519, a pending icon display command including the setting information of this expected performance is set in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting the pending icon display command including the setting information of this expected performance to the image-acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the expected performance described above based on FIGS. 24 to 26 is realized. Become. Note that the expected performance pattern setting process in step S519 will be described in detail later based on FIG. 53.

Further, when the setting information of the omen effect is set in the process of step S521, a pending icon display command including the setting information of this omen effect is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting a pending icon display command including the setting information of this foreshadowing effect to the audiovisual control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the foreshadowing effect described above based on FIG. 34 is realized. Note that the precursor effect pattern setting process in step S521 will be described in detail later based on FIG. 54.

[Icon change effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the icon change effect pattern setting process executed in the sub-control board 90 will be described. Here, FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517 of FIG.

After executing the process of step S516 in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 91 executes an icon change effect lottery (step S5171). Specifically, an icon change effect random number is obtained and stored in the sub RAM 93. This icon change effect random number is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process of step S46 described above based on FIG. get. Then, based on whether or not this icon change performance random number matches any of the random values related to icon change performance random numbers stored in advance in the sub ROM 92, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change performance.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores the preliminary determination result (“jackpot” or not) related to the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the above-mentioned icon change effect. A table is stored in which random numbers are associated with random values. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table and determines that the acquired icon change effect random number is the determination result of the first special symbol determination specified from the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). , and the random number values associated with the variation pattern of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change performance. In addition, in this table, regarding the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random numbers are associated with "jackpot" than with "loss". Furthermore, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol, the more random numbers are associated with the variation pattern. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the icon change effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the harder it is to execute the icon change effect.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to perform the icon change effect based on the lottery result in step S5171 (step S5172), and if it is determined that the icon change effect is to be performed (step S5172: YES), the icon change effect is executed (step S5172: YES). Icon change effect pattern information is set in the sub RAM 93 as change effect setting information (step S5173).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores an icon change effect pattern selection table for selecting an icon change effect pattern for each effect mode. In these icon change performance pattern selection tables, the judgment result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the number of pending first special symbol determinations when starting the icon change performance, and the display of the icon. The change pattern of the aspect is associated with the random value. When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the icon change effect (step S5172: YES), the sub CPU 91 reads the icon change effect pattern selection table corresponding to the current effect mode from the sub ROM 92 and sets it in the sub RAM 93. Then, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the preliminary judgment information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the pending number of the first special symbol judgment updated in the process of step S512. , one change pattern related to the icon change effect is read out from the icon change effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93, the change pattern corresponding to the icon change effect random number obtained when the hold command is received. select. Then, icon change effect pattern information indicating the change pattern selected in this way is set in the sub-RAM 93.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, in addition to the icon change performance similar to that performed in other performance modes, the game machine 1 performs the icon change performance based on FIGS. 35 to 37. The above-described pending icon proliferation effect and the icon proliferation effect are executed. For this reason, in the icon change performance pattern selection table for the third normal mode, the performance pattern for the icon change performance, the performance pattern for the suspended icon proliferation performance, and the performance pattern for the icon proliferation performance correspond as the change pattern for the icon display mode. By referring to the icon change performance pattern selection table for the third normal mode and executing the process of step S5173, the performance pattern of the pending icon proliferation performance and the performance pattern of the icon proliferation performance are determined. will be done.

In addition, here, when selecting the change pattern of the icon change effect, the same icon change effect random number as that used for the icon change effect lottery in step S5171 is used. Alternatively, another random number may be used to select the change pattern of the icon change effect.

Note that here, an example has been described in which the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the icon change performance and the lottery for selecting the performance pattern for the icon change performance are separate lottery results. Whether or not to do so, and if so, what effect pattern to use for the icon change effect may be determined in a single lottery.

[Expected image change performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the expected image change effect pattern setting process executed in the sub-control board 90 will be described. This expected image change performance pattern setting process is performed based on the performance pattern of the expected image change performance that changes the first expected image to the second expected image, or changes the first expected image to the third expected image, as described above based on FIGS. 21 to 23. A process for setting a performance pattern for an expected image change performance that directly changes an image, a performance pattern for an expected image change performance that changes a first expected image to a second expected image, and then changes it to a third expected image, etc. be. Here, FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the expected image change effect pattern setting process in step S518 of FIG.

Following the icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not a ready-to-reach effect is performed based on the pre-read target variation, as illustrated in FIG. 52 (step S5181). Specifically, the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected regarding the prefetch target variation specified by the advance determination information stored in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S513 is the variation pattern for jackpot and the variation pattern for reach loss. Based on either of these, it is determined whether a reach effect is performed based on the change in the pre-read target. Here, if it is determined that the reach effect will not be performed due to the change in the look-ahead target (step S5181: NO), the expected image change effect pattern setting process ends, and the process proceeds to the expected effect pattern setting process in step S519. It will be done.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the expected image illustrated in FIG. 23, for example, indicates the jackpot reliability in cooperation with a pending icon as a special icon (a pending icon with a display color other than white). For this reason, a configuration is adopted in which when only the default hold icon (white hold icon) is displayed, the expected image is not displayed. For this reason, when the sub CPU 91 determines that a reach effect will be performed due to the change in the look-ahead target (step S5181: YES), in order to not display the expected image if a special icon is not displayed as a pending icon, Execute the following processing.

That is, when the sub CPU 91 determines that a reach effect is performed due to the change in the pre-read target (step S5181: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether a special icon is displayed as a pending icon for the pre-read target (step S5182). Specifically, the process of step S5173 is executed, and the setting information of the icon change effect for displaying the pending icon as a special icon is set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S5173. , it is determined whether a special icon is to be displayed in the pending icon display area 71 as a pending icon to be read ahead.

Here, if it is determined that the special icon is not displayed as the pending icon to be read ahead (step S5182: NO), the expected image change effect pattern setting process ends and the process proceeds to the expected effect pattern setting process in step S519. It will be done. In this case, since the process of step S5189, which will be described later, is not executed, the expected image change effect is not performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that a special icon is displayed as a pending icon to be read ahead (step S5182: YES), it executes an expected image change effect lottery (step S5183). Specifically, an expected image change performance random number is obtained and stored in the sub-RAM 93. This expected image change performance random number is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process of step S46 described above based on FIG. Obtain as a random number. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the expected image change effect based on whether or not this expected image change effect random number matches any of the random values related to the expected image change effect random numbers stored in advance in the sub ROM 92. .

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores the preliminary determination result (“jackpot” or not) related to the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the above-mentioned expected image change. A table is stored in which random numbers related to performance random numbers are associated with each other. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table and determines the first special symbol determination in which the acquired expected image change effect random number is specified from the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). Based on the result and whether or not it matches any of the random numbers associated with the variation pattern of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not to execute the expected image change performance. In addition, in this table, regarding the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random numbers are associated with "jackpot" than with "loss". Furthermore, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol, the more random numbers are associated with the variation pattern. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the expected image change effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the expected image change effect.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the expected image change effect based on the lottery result in step S5183 (step S5184). Here, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the expected image change effect is not to be executed (step S5184: NO), the expected image change effect pattern setting process ends, as in the case where it is determined "NO" in step S5182. Then, the process proceeds to the expected performance pattern setting process of step S519.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the expected image change effect (step S5184: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment indicated by the preliminary judgment information stored in the sub RAM 93 is a "jackpot". It is determined whether or not (step S5185). Here, if it is determined that it is a "jackpot" (step S5185: YES), the expected image change production pattern selection table for jackpot is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5186), and it is determined that it is not a "jackpot". If it is determined (step S5185: NO), the expected image change performance pattern selection table for reach loss is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S5187).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the expected image change effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5186 or the process of step S5187, and selects the effect pattern of the expected image change effect. (Step S5188).

Although not shown in the figure, in the expected image change performance pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92, the judgment result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the start of the expected image change performance The number of reservations for the first special symbol determination, the change pattern of the expected image, and the random number value are associated with each other. In the process of step S5188, the sub CPU 91 uses the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the first special symbol that has been updated in the process of step S512. 1. By reading out the change pattern corresponding to the pending number of special symbol determination and the expected image change effect random number obtained when receiving the hold command from the expected image change effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93, Select one change pattern of the expected image.

In addition, when the expected image change performance pattern selection table for jackpot is referred to, the first expected image is changed to the second expected image or the third expected image, compared to when the expected image change performance pattern selection table for hit loss is referred to. A characteristic of this method is that it is difficult to select a change pattern that does not change the expected image. In addition, when the expected image change performance pattern selection table for jackpot is referred to, the first expected image is changed to the second expected image or the third It has the characteristic that a change pattern that changes to an expected image is easily selected.

In addition, here, when selecting the expected image change pattern, the same expected image change effect random number as that used for the expected image change effect lottery in step S5183 is used. The change pattern of the expected image may be selected using a random number different from the random number.

Here, an example will be explained in which the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the expected image change performance and the lottery for selecting the performance pattern of the expected image change performance (change pattern of the expected image) are separate lottery. However, whether or not to execute the expected image change effect and, if so, what effect pattern to use for the expected image change effect may be determined in a single lottery.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 sets the expected image change effect pattern information indicating the change pattern of the expected image selected in the process of step S5188 in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the expected image change effect (step S5189).

[Expected performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the expected performance pattern setting process executed in the sub-control board 90 will be described. This expected performance pattern setting process is a process for setting the performance patterns of the first expected performance and the second expected performance described above based on FIGS. 24 to 26. Here, FIG. 53 is a detailed flowchart of the expected performance pattern setting process in step S519 of FIG.

Following the expected image change effect pattern setting process in step S518, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not a reach effect is performed based on the prefetch target change, as illustrated in FIG. 53 (step S5191). The determination process in step S5191 is performed in the same manner as the process in step S5181 described above. Here, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the reach effect will not be performed due to the change in the look-ahead target (step S5191: NO), the expected effect pattern setting process is completed, and the process proceeds to the precursor effect pattern setting process of step S521. You can proceed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the reach effect will be performed due to the change in the pre-read target (step S5191: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the first expected effect lottery (step S5192). Specifically, the first expected performance random number is obtained and stored in the sub RAM 93. This first expected performance random number is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process of step S46 described above based on FIG. Obtain as a random number. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the first expected performance based on whether or not this first expected performance random number matches any of the random values related to the first expected performance random number stored in advance in the sub ROM 92. .

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores the preliminary determination result (“jackpot” or not) related to the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the above-mentioned first expectation. A table is stored in which random numbers related to performance random numbers are associated with each other. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table and determines the first special symbol determination in which the acquired first expected effect random number is specified from the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). Based on the result and whether or not it matches any of the random numbers associated with the variation pattern of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not to execute the first expected performance. In addition, in this table, regarding the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random numbers are associated with "jackpot" than with "loss". Furthermore, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol, the more random numbers are associated with the variation pattern. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the first expected performance, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the first expected performance.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the first expected performance based on the lottery result in step S5192 (step S5193). Here, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the first expected performance is not to be executed (step S5193: NO), the process proceeds to step S5199, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the first expected performance (step S5193: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination indicated by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 is a "jackpot". It is determined whether or not (step S5194). Here, if it is determined that it is a "jackpot" (step S5194: YES), the first expected performance pattern selection table for jackpot is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5195), and it is determined that it is not a "jackpot". If it is determined (step S5194: NO), the first expected performance pattern selection table for reach loss is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S5196).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the first expected performance pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5195 or the process of step S5196, and selects the performance pattern of the first expected performance. (Step S5197).

Although not shown in the figure, in the first expected performance pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92, the judgment result of the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the start of the first expected performance The number of reservations for the first special symbol determination when performing the game, the performance pattern of the first expected performance, and the random number value are associated with each other. In the process of step S5197, the sub CPU 91 uses the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the first special symbol updated in the process of step S512. 1. By reading out the production pattern corresponding to the pending number of special symbol determination and the first expected production random number obtained when receiving the suspension command from the first expected production pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93, One performance pattern of the first expected performance is selected.

In addition, when the first expected performance pattern selection table for jackpot is referred to, the first expected performance pattern selection table is It is characterized by the fact that the performance pattern of the performance changes easily.

In addition, here, when selecting the performance pattern of the first expected performance, the same first expected performance random number as that used for the first expected performance lottery in step S5192 is used. The performance pattern of the first expected performance may be selected using a random number different from the expected performance random number.

Note that here, an example has been explained in which the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first expected performance and the lottery for selecting the performance pattern of the first expected performance are separate lottery. Whether or not to perform the first expected performance and, if so, what performance pattern to use for the first expected performance may be determined in a single lottery.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 sets first expected performance pattern information indicating the performance pattern of the first expected performance selected in the process of step S5197 in the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the first expected performance (step S5198).

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S5198, or when it determines not to execute the first expected performance (step S5193: NO), it executes the second expected performance lottery (step S5199). Specifically, the second expected performance random number is obtained and stored in the sub RAM 93. This second expected performance random number is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process of step S46 described above based on FIG. Obtain as a random number. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the second expected performance based on whether or not this second expected performance random number matches any of the random values related to the second expected performance random number stored in advance in the sub ROM 92. .

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores the preliminary determination result (“jackpot” or not) related to the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the second expectation described above. A table is stored in which random numbers related to performance random numbers are associated with each other. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table and determines the first special symbol determination in which the acquired second expected effect random number is specified from the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). Based on the result and whether or not it matches any of the random numbers associated with the variation pattern of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not to execute the second expected performance. In addition, in this table, regarding the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random numbers are associated with "jackpot" than with "loss". Furthermore, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol is, the more random numbers are associated with it. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier the second expected performance is to be executed, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the second expected performance.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the second expected performance based on the lottery result in step S5199 (step S5200). Here, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the second expected performance is not to be executed (step S5200: NO), the process proceeds to the precursor performance pattern setting process of step S521.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the second expected performance (step S5200: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination indicated by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 is a "jackpot". It is determined whether or not (step S5201). Here, if it is determined that it is a "jackpot" (step S5201: YES), the second expected performance pattern selection table for jackpot is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5202), and it is determined that it is not a "jackpot". If it is determined (step S5201: NO), the second expected effect pattern selection table for reach loss is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S5203).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the second expected performance pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5202 or the process of step S5203, and selects the performance pattern of the second expected performance. (Step S5204).

Although not shown in the figure, in the second expected performance pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92, the judgment result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the start of the second expected performance The number of reservations for the first special symbol determination when performing the game, the performance pattern of the second expected performance, and the random number value are associated with each other. In the process of step S5204, the sub CPU 91 uses the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the first special symbol updated in the process of step S512. 1. By reading out the performance pattern corresponding to the pending number of special symbol determination and the second expected performance random number obtained when receiving the hold command from the second expected performance pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93, One performance pattern of the second expected performance is selected.

In addition, when the second expected performance pattern selection table for jackpot is referred to, the second expected performance pattern is It is characterized by the fact that the performance pattern of the performance changes easily.

In addition, here, when selecting the performance pattern of the second expected performance, the same second expected performance random number as that used for the second expected performance lottery in step S5199 is used. The performance pattern of the second expected performance may be selected using a random number different from the expected performance random number.

Note that here, an example has been explained in which the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the second expected performance and the lottery for selecting the performance pattern of the second expected performance are separate lottery. Whether or not to perform the second expected performance and, if so, what performance pattern to use for the second expected performance may be determined in a single lottery.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 sets second expected performance pattern information indicating the performance pattern of the second expected performance selected in the process of step S5204 in the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the second expected performance (step S5205).

Note that the process of selecting the performance pattern of the third expected performance (see FIG. 26) and setting the information indicating the selection result in the sub-RAM 93 as the third expected performance pattern information differs in the random numbers and tables used. Except for this, the process related to the first expected performance and the process related to the second expected performance described above based on FIG. 53 are performed, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

[Obvious effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the precursor effect pattern setting process executed in the sub-control board 90 will be described. This omen performance pattern setting process is a process for setting the effect pattern for either the first omen effect or the second omen effect described above based on FIG. 34. Here, FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of the portent effect pattern setting process in step S521 of FIG.

Following the expected performance pattern setting process in step S519, the sub CPU 91 executes a portent performance lottery as illustrated in FIG. 54 (step S5211). Specifically, a precursor effect random number is obtained and stored in the sub RAM 93. This portent effect random number is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process of step S46 described above based on FIG. 49 is performed, and the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the portent effect random number . Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the omen effect based on whether or not this omen effect random number matches any of the random numbers related to the omen effect random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the omen effect based on the lottery result in step S5211 (step S5212). Here, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the omen effect is not to be executed (step S5212: NO), the process proceeds to step S523 in FIG. 50.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the precursor effect (step S5212: YES), it specifies whether each suggestion effect is to be executed (step S5213). Specifically, the preliminary determination information related to the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 in FIG. In addition to the information shown, information showing the variation pattern of the first special symbol is included. Therefore, based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 91 determines whether the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the prefetch target variation is a variation pattern for a no-reach loss. Determine whether or not. Here, if it is determined that the variation pattern is for a no-reach loss, no reach effect will be performed due to the pre-reading target variation. )) is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the look-ahead target fluctuation is not a fluctuation pattern for a no-reach loss, that is, a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot or a fluctuation pattern for a reach loss. If so, the sub CPU 91 refers to the variable performance pattern selection table for ready-to-reach stored in the sub ROM 92 and specifies the performance to be performed with the pre-read target variation. In this variable performance pattern selection table for with reach, multiple types of variable performance patterns with reach are associated with each combination of the judgment result of the first special symbol determination and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. However, the variable performance patterns of the multiple types of reach performances here differ only in the manner of variation of the performance symbols, and the flow of the variable performance itself is the same. Therefore, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol can be specified, it is possible to specify the flow of the variation performance performed in the pre-read target variation. Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the prefetch target fluctuation is not a fluctuation pattern for a no-reach loss, the sub CPU 91 uses the information included in the advance determination information to Then, by specifying the judgment result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol and reading out the variation production pattern of the corresponding reach effect, the flow of the variation production performed with the prefetch target variation is specified. . Through such processing, it is possible to determine whether a normal reach (an example of the first suggestion effect: see FIG. 34(B)) is performed in the look-ahead target variation, and whether or not a pseudo third consecutive variation effect (an example of the second suggestion effect: see FIG. 34(B)) is performed. It is possible to specify whether SPSP reach (an example of the third suggestion effect: see FIG. 34(D)) is performed or not.

In this way, in the process of step S5213, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a no-reach effect, whether to perform a normal reach, whether to execute a pseudo third series variation effect, and whether to execute a SPSP reach in the prefetch target variation. Once the presence/absence is specified, based on the identification result, it is specified whether or not the first precursor effect can be executed (step S5214). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 34, at least one of the normal reach (see FIG. 34(B)) and the pseudo third consecutive variable performance (see FIG. 34(C)) is It is set in advance to execute a first precursor effect (an example of a first expected effect) prior to a change in the prefetch object, on the condition that it is executed in the change in the prefetch object. For this reason, the sub CPU 91 determines whether at least one of the normal reach and the pseudo third consecutive variation performance is executed in the prefetch target variation based on the identification result in the process of step S5213, and the first It is determined whether or not a precursor effect can be executed.

Following the process of step S5214, the sub CPU 91 specifies whether or not the second precursor effect can be executed (step S5215). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 34, either the no reach effect (see FIG. 34(A)) or the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 34(D)) is It is set in advance to execute a second precursor effect (an example of a second expected effect) prior to the prefetch target change, on the condition that it is executed. For this reason, the sub CPU 91 determines whether either the no-reach effect or the SPSP reach effect will be executed due to the change in the look-ahead target based on the identification result in the process of step S5213, and executes the second precursor effect. Determine if it is possible.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether either the first portent performance or the second portent performance is executable based on the identification result of step S5214 and the identification result of step S5215 ( Step S5216). For example, if SPSP Reach is executed after a pseudo third fluctuating effect develops in the look-ahead target variation, both the execution conditions for the first omen effect and the execution conditions for the second omen effect are met, so which There is no problem with performing a foreshadowing performance.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that either of the foreshadowing effects is executable (step S5216: YES), the sub CPU 91 selects either the first omen effect or the second omen effect by, for example, performing a lottery using random numbers. , information indicating the selection result is set in the sub RAM 93 as setting information for the omen effect (step S5217).

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that neither of the foreshadowing performances is executable (step S5216: NO), that is, only one of the execution conditions for the first foreshadowing performance and the execution condition for the second foreshadowing performance is satisfied. If not, it is determined whether or not the executable precursor performance is the first precursor performance based on the identification result of step S5214 and the identification result of step S5215 (step S5218). Here, if it is determined that it is the first omen effect (step S5218: YES), the setting information of the first omen effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5219), and if it is determined that it is not the first omen effect (step S5218: NO), that is, if the second omen effect is executable, setting information for the second omen effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5220).

[Second interrupt processing by sub control board 90]
The second interrupt process executed in the sub control board 90 will be described below with reference to FIG. 55. Here, FIG. 55 is a detailed flowchart of the second interrupt processing in step S53 of FIG. 49.

Following the first interrupt process in step S51 in FIG. 49, the sub CPU 91 executes a command reception process in which, when a command (other than the pending command) is received from the main control board 80, processing is performed according to the command. Step S10). This command receiving process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 56.

Following the process of step S10, the sub CPU 91 performs the first effect button detection sensor 96 shown in FIG. It is determined whether the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 has been operated (step S30). Here, if it is determined that the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 has been operated (step S30: YES), an operation command for notifying the effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S31). By transmitting this operation command to the image-acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, processing for realizing a production effect according to the operation of the first production button 35 or the second production button 36 is performed. .

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S31, or when it is determined that neither the first effect button 35 nor the second effect button 36 is operated (step S30: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes the data transfer process. (Step S33). Specifically, since data related to image and sound control is transmitted from the image and sound control board 100, the data is transferred to the lamp control board 120. As a result, the performance by the performance means such as the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the vibration motor 128, etc. is controlled by the lamp control board 120 so as to be synchronized with the performance performed by the image display device 7 and the speaker 38. Ru.

[Command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 56 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 56, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not a command (command other than the pending command) has been received from the main control board 80 (step S14). Here, if it is determined that no command has been received (step S14: NO), the process proceeds to step S30 described above.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that a command from the main control board 80 has been received (step S14: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines that the command is the fluctuation start command sent from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S310 in FIG. It is determined whether there is one (step S15). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not a fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the process proceeds to step S17, which will be described later.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes fluctuation start command reception processing (step S16). This variation start command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 57.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines that the command is a fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S314 in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S17). If the sub CPU 91 determines that it is a variation end command (step S17: YES), it ends the variation display of the production symbols and stops the production symbols in a manner that shows the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation. A variable effect end command that instructs execution of the display process is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S18).

This variation production end command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process of step S47 (see FIG. 49), thereby determining the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination). As the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42), the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is indicated. The performance symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen 70.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a variation end command (step S17: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines whether the command is an opening command sent from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S3175 in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S19). Here, if it is determined that the received command is an opening command (step S19: YES), an image is displayed to announce the start of an opening effect that notifies the type of jackpot or encourages the player to play right during the opening period of the jackpot game. An opening performance start command for instructing the sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S20). For example, when receiving the opening command related to "5R fixed variation A", if the three production symbols showing the double number of "777" or "333" are immediately stopped, then the above-mentioned command based on FIG. 13(A) If the opening performance start command that instructs the execution of the opening performance is set, and the other three performance symbols indicating the number of doubles are immediately stopped, the above-mentioned operation is performed based on FIGS. 14(A) to (C). Set an opening performance start command to instruct execution of the opening performance.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not an opening command (step S19: NO), the command is a valid round game transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S609 in FIG. The start command, the second grand prize opening opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S610 in FIG. 46, and the command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S612 in FIG. It is determined whether the round game start command is one of the first big prize opening opening/closing round game start commands (step S21).

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a round game start command (step S21: YES), it executes a round game start command reception process that performs processing according to the received round game start command (step S23). . This round game start command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 63.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a round game start command (step S21: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines that the command is the V winning command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S620 in FIG. It is determined whether there is one (step S25). Here, if it is determined that the received command is a V-winning command (step S25: YES), a V-winning command reception process is executed in accordance with the V-winning command (step S26). This V winning command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 64.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a V winning command (step S25: NO), it executes an ending command reception process (step S27). Specifically, when the three production symbols showing doubles of "777" or "333" are brought to a final stop, on the condition that the V winning command is received before receiving the ending command, " An ending performance start command is set in the sub-RAM 93 that instructs execution of an ending performance that notifies the start of a performance in a performance mode named ``Fighting Battle RUSH'' that definitively informs the player that the game is in a "definitely variable game state." . In addition, even though the three production symbols showing doubles of "777" or "333" have been stopped, if the V winning command is not received before receiving the ending command, the "Probable Variable Game State" ” or a “time-saving gaming state”. An ending performance start command is written to the sub-RAM 93 that instructs execution of an ending performance that notifies the start of a performance in a performance mode named “Challenge Mode”. set. On the other hand, if the three production symbols showing doubles other than "777" and "333" are stopped, the ending production starts, which instructs the execution of the ending production that notifies the start of the production in challenge mode. Set the command in the sub RAM 93.

These ending commands are transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. As a result, the ending effect described above based on FIG. 13(F) and the ending effect described above based on FIG. 14(I) are realized.

[Variation start command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. If the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes a series of fluctuation start command reception processes illustrated in FIG. 57.

That is, the sub CPU 91 acquires the value at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 regarding the random number update process (step S46 in FIG. 49) appropriately updated by the random number update process in the sub control board 90, and stores it in the sub RAM 93. (step S161). Then, the received variation start command is analyzed (step S162).

As described above, this fluctuation start command includes symbol setting information indicating the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process, and whether this symbol setting information is related to the first special symbol judgment or the second special symbol judgment. It includes winning start opening information indicating whether the game is a special symbol, setting information for a variation pattern of special symbols, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of special symbol determination can be specified. That is, it is possible to specify whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and if it is a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is. In addition, by identifying whether the fluctuation pattern is a losing fluctuation pattern based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform a reach performance or a no-reach performance. . Also, based on the setting information of the variation pattern, the variation time of the special symbol can be specified. Further, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

After analyzing the variation start command, the sub CPU 91 executes a variation production pattern setting process for setting a variation production pattern of variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S163). By executing this fluctuation performance pattern setting process, the variation mode of the performance symbol, the presence or absence of a reach performance, the presence or absence of a pseudo continuous performance, the type of performance symbols that make up the reach pattern, the type and content of the reach performance, the pseudo continuous performance, etc. , the type of effect pattern to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 58.

Following the process of step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes various preview performances (for example, step-up performances, dialogue announcements, group announcements, (step S164). This preview effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 59.

Following the process of step S164, the sub CPU 91 executes a stage suggestion performance pattern setting process for setting a performance pattern of the stage suggestion performance described above based on FIGS. 15 to 19 (step S172). This stage suggestion effect pattern setting process is as described above based on FIG. 17.

Next, the sub CPU 91 sends a variable effect start command to the sub CPU 91 that instructs to start a variable effect in the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and to execute a preview effect in the preview effect pattern set in the process of step S164. It is set in the RAM 93 (step S174).

This variable effect start command includes at least information indicating the variable effect pattern set by the process of step S163 and information indicating the preview effect pattern set by the process of step S164, and includes the command of step S47. The information is transmitted to the image/acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the transmission process (see FIG. 49). As a result, the variable effects and preview effects whose effect patterns are determined by the sub-control board 90 are realized by the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

In addition, in the step S172 step S172 step S172 described above based on FIG. A variable performance start command that instructs to start a variable performance, perform a preview performance using the preview performance pattern set in the process of step S164, and execute a stage suggestion performance using the stage suggestion performance pattern set in the process of step S172 is stored in the sub-RAM 93. is set to Then, when this variable performance start command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the image and sound control board 90 performs the fluctuation performance, preview performance, and stage suggestion performance for which the performance pattern has been determined. This is realized by the control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Following the process in step S174, the sub CPU 91 updates the pending number stored in the sub RAM 93 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S175). Specifically, if the variation start command received from the main control board 80 is to notify the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the number of pending determinations of the first special symbol. Update to. On the other hand, when the received variation start command notifies the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the number of pending determinations of the second special symbol is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1".

[Variation effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 58 is a detailed flowchart of the variable performance pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. The process will be explained. Following the process of step S162, the sub CPU 91 sets a performance symbol to be finally displayed (actual stop) on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the first special symbol (or second special symbol) (step S1631). Specifically, based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80, whether a special symbol indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed at the end of symbol variation, or It is specified whether a special symbol indicating a loss (loss symbol) is stopped and displayed. When it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed in a stopped state, a performance symbol for notifying the jackpot (for example, a performance symbol that shows a double) is set as the performance symbol to be stopped, and the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is determined that a loss has occurred, a performance pattern is set to notify the user of the loss. In addition, when setting a performance pattern for notifying a loss, if a reach effect is performed and then a loss is notified, a reach effect must be set as the effect pattern to notify a loss and a reach effect is performed. In the case where a loss is to be notified without any loss, a random number is set as a performance pattern for notifying the loss.

For example, when receiving a variation start command related to the first special symbol determination that includes symbol setting information indicating that 5R probability variation A or 5R probability variation B has been won, the first confirmed effect symbol stored in the sub ROM 92 Refer to the selection table and select the effect pattern to be displayed. In this first confirmed effect symbol selection table, "777" is associated with 15 random numbers, "333" is associated with 15 random numbers, "111", "222" ”, “444”, “555”, “666”, “888”, and “999”, respectively, and ten random numbers are associated with each of the seven types. The sub CPU 91 obtains the value at the time of receiving the variation start command as the selected random number regarding the selected random number that is updated as appropriate every time the random number update process described above is performed, and selects the three effect symbols corresponding to the obtained selected random number. By reading out the combination from the first confirmed effect pattern selection table, the effect patterns to be confirmed and displayed are selected. Note that in this embodiment, the selected random number can take 100 random numbers from "0" to "99". Therefore, the rate at which "777" or "333" is selected is 15% (=15/100 x 100), and the rate at which combinations of the other seven types of three production symbols are selected is is also 10% (=10/100×100).

For this reason, when "777" and "333" are selected as the three performance symbols to be confirmed and displayed, and the performance described above based on FIG. There is a case where the above-mentioned effect based on FIG. 14 is executed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol determination including symbol setting information indicating that 5R normal A or 5R normal B has been won is received, the second confirmed effect stored in the sub ROM 92 Refer to the symbol selection table and select the effect symbol to be displayed. In this second confirmed effect symbol selection table, 15 random numbers are associated with each of the six types of "111", "222", "444", "666", "888", and "999". It is being Ten random numbers are associated with "555", and no random numbers are associated with "777" and "333". The sub CPU 91 obtains the value at the time of receiving the variation start command as the selected random number regarding the selected random number that is updated as appropriate every time the random number update process described above is performed, and selects the three effect symbols corresponding to the obtained selected random number. By reading out the combination from the second confirmed effect pattern selection table, the effect symbols to be confirmed and displayed are selected. As mentioned above, since the selection random number can take 100 random values, the proportion of "111", "222", "444", "666", "888", or "999" being selected is 15% (=15/100 x 100), the percentage of "555" selected is 10% (=10/100 x 100), and the percentage of "777" or "333" selected is: It is 0%.

In this way, when 5R normal A or 5R normal B is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, three production symbols showing "777" and "333" will be displayed as confirmed. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the effect illustrated in FIG. 13 is not executed, but the effect illustrated in FIG. 14 is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether it is necessary to perform a reach effect in conjunction with the current variation display of the special symbol, based on the setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the received variation start command. is determined (step S1632). Here, if it is determined that there is no need to perform the reach effect (step S1632: NO), a variable effect pattern of the reach effect is set (step S1633). For example, from the non-reach variable performance pattern selection table in which multiple types of non-reach variable performance patterns are associated with each special symbol variation pattern, any one of the effects corresponding to the random number obtained in step S161 is selected. The variable performance pattern is read out, and information indicating the variable performance pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that it is necessary to perform the reach effect (step S1632: YES), it sets a variable effect pattern for the reach effect (step S1634). For example, in step S161, from the variable effect pattern selection table for ready-to-reach effects in which multiple types of variable effect patterns for effects with reach are associated with each combination of the judgment result of special symbol determination and the variable pattern of special symbols, Any one variable performance pattern corresponding to the random performance number obtained in the process is read out, and information indicating the variable performance pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93.

By performing the process of step S1633 or step S1634, it is possible to determine in what kind of variation pattern the performance symbols are to be displayed in a variable manner, which reach effect is to be performed when performing a reach effect, and when developing a reach effect. This will determine how the reach performance will be developed.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a variable performance start command instructing to start a variable performance in the variable performance pattern set in the process of step S1633 (or process of step S1634) is sent from the sub-control board 90 to the image and sound control board. 100 (and the lamp control board 120), a variable effect including a variable display of effect symbols is realized.

[Advance presentation pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 59 is a detailed flowchart of the preview effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. Following the variable performance pattern setting process in step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes a basic preview performance pattern setting process as illustrated in FIG. 59 (step S165). Examples of the basic preview performances here include the above-mentioned step-up notice, dialogue notice, group notice, cut-in, and the like. The basic preview effect pattern setting process in step S165 will be described in detail later based on FIG. 60.

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a performance pattern of the final notification performance that is executed when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, variable probability gaming state, or time-saving gaming state, among the final notification performances described above based on FIG. A final notification effect pattern setting process for setting is executed (step S166). The final notification effect pattern setting process in step S166 will be described in detail later based on FIG. 61.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 executes advance suggestion effect pattern setting processing for setting the effect pattern of the advance suggestion effect described above based on FIGS. 30 to 33 (step S167). The advance suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S167 will be described in detail later based on FIG. 62.

Following the process of step S167, the sub CPU 91 determines whether the pending effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to "ON" (step S168). Here, if it is determined that the hold effect flag is set to "ON" (step S168: YES), the hold effect flag is set to "OFF" (step S169).

[Basic preview performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 60 is a detailed flowchart of the basic preview performance pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. Following the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163, the sub CPU 91 acquires and stores a basic preview effect random number as illustrated in FIG. 60 (step S1651). Specifically, the basic preview effect random number is updated to a value in which "1" is added each time the random number update process of step S46 (see FIG. 49) described above is performed, and the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command. The count value of is acquired as a basic preview performance random number, and the acquired basic preview performance random number is stored in the sub-RAM 93.

Following the process of step S1651, the sub CPU 91 determines whether the pending effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to "ON" (step S1652). Here, if it is determined that the pending effect flag is not set to "ON" (step S1652: NO), the basic preview effect pattern selection table for the first control state is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1652: NO). S1653). Conversely, if it is determined that the pending performance flag is set to "ON" (step S1652: YES), the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the second control state is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1652: YES). S1654).

Following the process of step S1653 or the process of step S1654, the sub CPU 91 executes a basic preview performance pattern selection process (step S1655). In the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the first control state set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1653 and the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the second control state set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1654, the first The judgment result of the special symbol judgment (jackpot or loss), the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and various basic preview performances (in this embodiment, step-up notice, dialogue notice, group notice, cut-in, etc.) The performance pattern and the random number value are associated with each other. In step S1655, the sub CPU 91 uses the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, and the basic information acquired in the process of step S1651. One basic preview performance pattern is selected by reading the performance pattern of the basic preview performance corresponding to the preview performance random number from the basic preview performance pattern selection table set in a sub-RAM 93. As a result, a step-up preview performance pattern, a dialogue preview performance pattern, a group preview performance pattern, and a cut-in performance pattern are selected. Then, information indicating the selected basic preview performance pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93 as basic preview performance setting information (step S1656).

The variable effect start command including the basic preview effect setting information set in step S1656 is sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process in step S47 (see FIG. 49). be done. As a result, the basic preview performance for which the performance pattern is set on the sub-control board 90 is realized by the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120).

(About the basic preview effect pattern selection table for the first control state)
In this embodiment, the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the first control state, which is set in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S1653, is configured as follows. That is, in the basic notice performance pattern selection table for the first control state, eight types of performance patterns are defined for step-up notices, including "no step-up notice". Furthermore, regarding dialogue previews, six types of performance patterns are defined, including "no dialogue previews". Regarding group notices, two types of performance patterns are defined including "no group notice". Furthermore, regarding cut-in, five types of performance patterns including "no cut-in" are defined. Therefore, it can be said that 17 (=8 types + 6 types + 2 types + 5 types - 4) basic preview performances are prepared in the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the first control state.

(About the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the second control state)
On the other hand, the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the second control state, which is set in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S1654, is configured as follows in this embodiment. That is, in the basic preview effect pattern selection table for the second control state, three types of effect patterns including "no step-up notice" are defined regarding the step-up notice. Furthermore, regarding dialogue previews, three types of performance patterns are defined including "no dialogue announcements". Regarding group notices, two types of performance patterns are defined including "no group notice". Regarding cut-in, three types of performance patterns including "no cut-in" are defined. Therefore, it can be said that seven (=3 types + 3 types + 2 types + 3 types - 4) basic preview performances are prepared in the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the second control state.

In this way, in the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the first control state, 17 basic preview performances are prepared, whereas in the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the second control state, 17 basic preview performances are prepared for the first control state. Seven basic preview performances are prepared, which is 10 fewer than the 17 in the basic preview performance pattern selection table.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the hold effect flag is set to "ON" (when it is determined as "YES" in step S1652), the hold effect flag is set to "OFF". There is an advantage that the process related to the basic preview performance pattern setting process of FIG. 60 can be reduced, compared to the case where the determination is "NO" in step S1652. In addition, since the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the second control state has fewer stipulated performance patterns than the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the first control state, its data capacity is smaller than the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the first control state. It is smaller than the pattern selection table.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the sub CPU 91 receives the hold command from the main control board 80 in the first interrupt process of step S51 in FIG. 49, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 50, the icon changes. A setting process related to the effect (step S517), a setting process related to the expected image change effect (step S518), a setting process related to the expected effect (step S519), and a setting process related to the omen effect (step S521) are performed. be exposed. Therefore, when a pending command is received in the first interrupt process, the sub CPU 91 has to process more. In other words, if the first control state is a state in which the sub CPU 91 does not receive a pending command, the sub CPU 91 receives a pending command and becomes a second control state in which more processing is required than in the first control state. Become.

In this way, when the sub CPU 91 is in the second state, it is determined that a command has been received in the second interrupt processing (step S53 in FIG. 49) following the first interrupt processing (step S14 in FIG. 56). If the command is determined to be a fluctuation start command (if the determination is “YES” in step S15 in FIG. 56), the series of processes illustrated in FIG. This will be executed consecutively with one interrupt process, and there is a concern that the burden on the sub CPU 91 will increase.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the process proceeds from step S516 in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1652 of FIG. 60 that the hold effect flag is set to "ON", the basic notice effect is normally set with reference to the basic notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state. The pattern is set by referring to the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the second control state instead of the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the first control state. As a result, as described above, the processing related to the basic preview effect pattern setting process of FIG. 60 is reduced, and it is possible to suppress the burden on the sub CPU 91 from becoming excessive.

The gaming machine 1 that switches the basic preview performance pattern selection table and executes the basic preview performance pattern setting process of FIG. 60 based on such a suspended performance flag can be regarded as the following gaming machine.

A determining means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 in FIG. 42) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game);
A special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes the big prize opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39) that executes the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance execution means (image display device 7, speaker 38, frame lamp 37, board lamp 5, movable decorative member 14, vibration motor 128, etc.) that performs a performance in a predetermined performance pattern;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 91) for controlling execution of production,
The performance control means is
When setting the effect pattern in the first control state (for example, in the first interrupt process in FIG. 50, the processes after step S516 are not executed, and the sub CPU 91 executes steps S1655 and S1656 when the pending effect flag is "OFF") ) and when setting the effect pattern in a second control state that has more processing than the first control state (for example, when the processing from step S516 onwards is executed in the first interrupt processing in FIG. 50). , when the sub CPU 91 executes the processing of steps S1655 and S1656 with the pending production flag in the “ON” state),
In the second control state, the gaming machine sets a performance pattern of a performance that does not include a predetermined performance (for example, a predetermined basic preview performance) for which a performance pattern is set in the first control state. .

In this embodiment, in the first control state, the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the first control state is referred to, so as described above, 17 basic preview performances are prepared. On the other hand, in the second control state, the basic preview performance pattern selection table for the second control state is referred to, so only seven basic preview performances are prepared. Therefore, in the second control state, the performance pattern of the basic preview performance that does not include the 10 (= 17 - 7) basic preview performances for which the performance pattern may be set in the first control state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the burden on the sub CPU 91 from becoming excessive.

[Determined notification performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 61 is a detailed flowchart of the final notification effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. Following the basic preview performance pattern setting process in step S165, the sub CPU 91 executes the following process illustrated in FIG. 61. That is, the sub CPU 91 performs the current first special symbol determination based on information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80. It is determined whether the determination result is a "jackpot" (step S1661). Here, if the sub CPU 91 determines that it is not a "jackpot" (step S1661: NO), the process proceeds to advance suggestion performance pattern setting processing (see FIG. 59) of step S167, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the result of the current first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1661: YES), the sub CPU 91 obtains and stores a confirmed notification effect random number (step S1662). Specifically, the final notification effect random number is updated to a value in which "1" is added each time the above-described random number update process of step S46 (see FIG. 49) is performed, and the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command. The count value of is acquired as a final notification performance random number, and the acquired final notification performance random number is stored in the sub-RAM 93.

Following the process of step S1662, the sub CPU 91 reads the final notification performance pattern selection table from the sub ROM 92 and sets it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1663), and executes the final notification performance pattern selection process (step S1664).

In the above confirmed notification effect pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the first special symbol (variation pattern for jackpot), the effect pattern of various confirmed notification effects in the normal gaming state (see Figure 20), and the random value correspond to each other. It is attached. The sub CPU 91 uses the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command related to the "jackpot" of the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80 in step S1664, and the process in step S1662. The performance pattern of the final notification performance is selected by reading the performance pattern of the final notification performance corresponding to the acquired final notification performance random number from the final notification performance pattern selection table set in a sub-RAM 93. Then, information indicating the performance pattern of the selected final notification performance is set in the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the final notification performance (step S1665). The fixed notification effect is realized by transmitting the variable effect start command including the setting information of the confirmed notification effect to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, two or more performance patterns of the final notification performance may be set by executing the final notification performance pattern setting process described above based on FIG. 61. In this case, two or more confirmed notification effects will be executed within the same variation of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. In addition, in the confirmed notification performance pattern selection table, a random value is also associated with the performance pattern "No confirmed notification performance", so if it is a "big hit", the confirmed notification performance will always be executed. Instead, the confirmation notification effect is executed for a part of the case where the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot". Further, since the execution conditions, execution timing, presentation mode, etc. of the final notification effect are as described above based on FIG. 20, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Also, here, while the game is being controlled in the normal gaming state, the confirmed notification performance pattern selection process that is executed when the sub CPU 91 receives a fluctuation start command related to the "jackpot" of the first special symbol determination will be described. explained. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command related to the second special symbol determination while the game is being controlled in the variable probability gaming state (or the time saving gaming state), it is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1663. Since the same process as described above based on FIG. 61 is performed except for the difference in the confirmed notification performance pattern selection table, the confirmed notification in the variable probability gaming state (or time-saving gaming state) described above based on FIG. A description of the final notification performance pattern setting process regarding the performance will be omitted.

[Advance suggestion performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 62 is a detailed flowchart of the advance suggestion performance pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. 59, and is a flowchart illustrating the process of setting the performance pattern of the advance suggestion performance described above based on FIGS. 30 to 33.

Following the final notification performance pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. 59, the sub CPU 91 executes the following process illustrated in FIG. 62. That is, the sub CPU 91 acquires and stores the advance suggestion effect random number (step S1671). Specifically, the advance suggestion effect random number is updated to a value in which "1" is added each time the above-described random number update process of step S46 (see FIG. 49) is performed, and the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command. The count value of is acquired as a prior suggestion performance random number, and the acquired advance suggestion performance random number is stored in the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the advance suggestion performance based on whether the acquired advance suggestion performance random number matches any of the random numbers related to the advance suggestion performance stored in advance in the sub ROM 92. Determination is made (step S1672). Here, if it is determined that the advance suggestion effect is not to be executed (step S1672: NO), the process proceeds to step S168 in FIG. 59 described above.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the advance suggestion effect (step S1672: YES), the sub CPU 91 includes, for example, information indicating the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and the basic notice set in the process of step S165. Based on the information indicating the performance pattern, the performance to be performed during the current variable display of the first special symbol is specified (step S1673).

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines the number of effects suggested in advance (that is, the number of effect suggestion images to be displayed when displaying the effects shown in FIGS. 31(H) and (I)) based on the preliminary suggestion effects (step S1674 ). In this embodiment, the number of performances suggested in advance is selected by lottery using random numbers. For example, a table in which the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the number of effects suggested in advance, and a random value are associated with each other is stored in the sub ROM 92, and a variation start command is stored in the sub-ROM 92. The number of pre-suggested productions corresponding to the random number of pre-suggested productions obtained at the received timing, the judgment result of the first special symbol specified based on the fluctuation start command, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol as described above. An example of a method is to determine the number of effects to be suggested in advance by reading from a table. In this case, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment this time is "lose" and the variation pattern of the first special symbol whose variation time is relatively short is selected, the number of effects suggested in advance is If the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot" or if the variation pattern of the first special symbol whose variation time is relatively long even if it is a "loss" is selected. It is preferable to allocate random values so that the number of effects suggested in advance is large.

Following the process of step S1674, the effect suggested in advance is selected (step S1675). For example, if there are 7 performances specified in the process of step S1673, and the number of previously suggested performances determined in the process of step S1674 is "4", 4 performances are selected from the above 7 performances. A lottery will be held and four performances will be selected. Then, information indicating a performance suggestion image (see FIG. 30) corresponding to the selected performance is set in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the advance suggestion performance (step S1676). By transmitting the variable performance start command including the setting information of this advance suggestion performance to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the advance suggestion performance described above is realized based on FIGS. 30 to 33. Become.

[Round game start command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 63 is a detailed flowchart of the round game start command reception process in step S23 of FIG. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is a round game start command (step S21: YES), it executes the following processing. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 63, it is determined whether the received command is a valid round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S609 in FIG. 46 (step S231). ). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not a valid round game start command (step S231: NO), the process proceeds to step S236, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a valid round game start command (step S231: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the opening command related to the jackpot of the first special symbol determination has been received. Then, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the first hit (step S232). Here, if it is determined that it is not a first hit (step S232: NO), that is, if it is a jackpot of the second special symbol determination, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 6(C), the second special symbol determination is a jackpot. Since there is usually no jackpot (in which no effective round game is executed), a command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct execution of a launch promotion performance that encourages the launch of a game ball aimed at the V winning hole 287 (step S233). By transmitting this command to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) through the command transmission process in step S47 in FIG. 49, the launch promotion effect described above based on FIGS. It will be executed.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the current jackpot is the first hit (step S232: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the current jackpot game is a jackpot game that was started in response to the alignment of specific symbols. (Step S234). Specifically, by the process of step S1631 in FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not three performance symbols that notify a jackpot of "777" or "333" have been selected. Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot game started according to the alignment of the specific symbols (step S234: YES), that is, the double number of "777" or "333" is confirmed and the jackpot game starts. If so, the process of step S233 described above is executed.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the current jackpot game is not a jackpot game that is started according to the alignment of specific symbols (step S234: NO), in other words, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the current jackpot game is not a jackpot game that is started according to the alignment of specific symbols, When a jackpot game is started in accordance with the alignment, a command for executing a mid-round performance without a launch promotion performance is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S235). By transmitting this command to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) through the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, the in-round effects described above based on FIGS. It will be executed.

Next, when the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S233, when the process of step S235 is executed, or when it is determined that the received command is not a valid round game start command (step S231: NO), the sub CPU 91 receives the It is determined whether the command is the second grand prize opening opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S610 in FIG. 46 (step S236).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is the second big winning hole opening/closing round game start command (step S236: YES), the sub CPU 91 starts the round related to the second big winning hole opening/closing game that opens and closes the second big winning hole 28. A command for executing the medium effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S237). By transmitting this command to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) through the command transmission process in step S47 in FIG. 49, for example, the in-round effect described above based on FIG. Based on steps 14 (F) to (H), the above-mentioned in-round effects will be executed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above based on FIG. Judgment rights are reserved, the reserved rights include what will be determined as a "jackpot", and it is decided whether or not to execute a special winning sound output performance. A special winning sound output performance as a confirmed notification performance is executed on the condition that the player wins the performance lottery for the winning prize.

The sub CPU 91 executes, for example, the following processing in order to realize such a special winning sound output effect. That is, following the process of step S237, it is determined whether or not the current round game is a predetermined round (for example, the first round) in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed (step S238). In addition, in this embodiment, since the predetermined round is set as the first round, the sub CPU 91 adds "1" to the number of receptions each time it receives the second big prize opening/closing round game start command. The process of updating the value is executed, and based on whether the number of receptions after the update is "1", the current round game is determined to be the predetermined round (for example, the first round) in which the second grand prize opening 28 is opened and closed. ) is the round game.

Next, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the current round game is a round game of a predetermined round (for example, the first round) in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened and closed (step S238: YES), the game is put on hold. It is determined whether or not the second special symbol determination right that is determined to be a "jackpot" is included (step S239). Specifically, among the one or more pieces of preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 through the process of step S515 in FIG. 50, there is a preliminary determination indicating that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a "jackpot". Based on whether or not information is included, it is determined whether or not the reserved second special symbol determination rights include one that will be determined as a "jackpot".

Subsequently, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the pending second special symbol determination rights include one that will be determined as a "jackpot" (step S239: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines the special winning prize. A performance lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the sound output performance (step S240). Specifically, regarding the special winning sound output effect random number that is updated as appropriate every time the random number update process is performed, the count at the time when the first 2nd big winning opening opening/closing round game start command is received in this jackpot game. The value is acquired as a special winning sound output performance random number, and it is based on whether the special winning sound output performance random number matches the random value (winning value) regarding the special winning sound output performance random number stored in advance in the sub ROM 92. Then, it is determined whether or not to perform a special winning sound output effect.

The sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to perform a special winning sound output performance based on the lottery result in step S240 (step S241), and when it is determined to perform a special winning sound output performance (step S241: YES), a special winning sound output performance is performed (step S241: YES). Setting information for the winning sound output performance is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S242). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 281 during the second big winning hole opening/closing game in which the second big winning hole 28 is opened and closed, a winning notification is sent to notify that fact. A command is sent to the sub control board 90 by the main CPU 81. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 receives the above-mentioned winning notification command during the second big winning opening opening/closing game of the first round, the sub CPU 91 recognizes that the setting information for the special winning sound output effect is set in the sub RAM 93. As a condition, a special winning sound output production command is set in the sub RAM 93. This special winning sound output performance command is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, thereby realizing the special winning sound output performance.

In addition, the setting information of the above-mentioned special winning sound output performance is, for example, the timing when the second big prize opening opening/closing round game start command is received, which notifies that the second round of the second big winning opening opening/closing game is started. Since the winning sound is discarded from the sub-RAM 93, the special winning sound output effect will not be performed after the second big winning opening opening/closing game of the first round is completed.

Following the process of step S242, the sub CPU 91 sets the confirmed notification flag stored in the sub RAM 93 to "ON" (step S243). This confirmed notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed notification effect (here, special winning sound output effect) is executed during the jackpot game, and is a flag that indicates whether or not the confirmed notification effect (in this case, special winning sound output effect) is executed. ” is set.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, during the 5th round game in which the 2nd big prize opening 28 is opened (the 5th round game for opening and closing the 2nd big prize opening), the above-mentioned special event based on FIG. There are cases where a V winning notification effect is executed, but this special V winning notification effect includes one that will be judged as a "jackpot" in the pending second special symbol judgment right. It has the same function as the special winning sound output performance in that it is a confirmed notification performance that notifies you that there is a winner. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the special V winning notification effect is not performed when the special winning sound output effect is executed, and the sub CPU 91 determines whether the special V winning notification effect is executed or not. Referring to the above-mentioned confirmed notification flag indicating whether or not to execute the special V winning notification effect, a process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the special V winning notification effect. Note that this process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 64.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 63, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the second big prize opening/closing round game start command (step S236: NO), that is, the received command is If it is the first big prize opening opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 by the process, a command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct execution of a predetermined round performance related to the first big winning opening opening/closing game. do. This command is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 in FIG. A round game related to this will be realized.

[V winning command reception processing by sub control board 90]
FIG. 64 is a detailed flowchart of the V winning command reception process in step S26 of FIG. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is a V winning command (step S25: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is a V winning command (step S25: YES). Then, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the first hit (step S261). Here, if it is determined that it is not the first hit (step S261: NO), that is, the second special symbol determination in the "probability variable gaming state" or "time-saving gaming state" becomes a jackpot, and the current jackpot game is executed. If so, it is determined whether the confirmed notification flag stored in the sub-RAM 93 is set to "ON" (step S264). Here, if it is determined that the confirmed notification flag is set to "ON" (step S264: YES), the confirmed notification flag is set to "OFF" (step S265). In this way, when the confirmed notification flag is set to "ON", since the special winning sound output effect has been executed, a command to instruct the execution of the normal V winning notification effect is set in the sub-RAM 93. (Step S263). By transmitting this command to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) through the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, the V winning prize notification effect described above based on FIG. 13(D) is realized. It turns out.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the current jackpot is the first hit (step S261: YES), the current jackpot game is determined based on the alignment of the specific symbols, similar to the determination process of step S234 in FIG. 63. It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot game that has been started (step S262). Here, if it is determined that the current jackpot game is a jackpot game that was started according to the alignment of the specific symbols (step S262: YES), that is, if the number of doubles indicates "777" or "333" When the current jackpot game has started with two performance symbols confirmed and displayed, the process of step S263 is executed to realize the above-mentioned V winning notification performance based on FIG. 13(D). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot game is not a jackpot game that was started according to the alignment of specific symbols (step S262: NO), that is, if it is determined that the current jackpot game is not a jackpot game that is started according to the alignment of specific symbols (step S262: NO), that is, if the number of doubles is 3 other than "777" and "333" When the current jackpot game is started with two performance symbols confirmed and displayed, as described above based on FIG. 14, in order to prevent the V winning notification performance from being executed even if the game ball wins a V prize The series of V winning command reception processes is completed without executing the process of step S263, and the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 55.

In addition, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the confirmed notification flag is not set to "ON" (step S264: NO), the sub CPU 91 performs the pending second special symbol determination, similar to the process of step S239 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the rights include something that will be determined as a "jackpot" (step S266). Here, if it is determined that there is no item that would be determined to be a "jackpot" (step S266: NO), the process proceeds to step S263.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the reserved second special symbol determination rights include one that will be determined as a "jackpot" (step S266: YES), the sub CPU 91 in FIG. A process similar to that of step S240 is performed to execute a performance lottery for determining whether or not to perform the special V winning notification performance (step S267). Then, based on the result of the performance lottery, it is determined whether or not to perform the special V winning notification performance (step S268), and if it is determined not to perform the special V winning notification performance (step S268: NO), the above The process of step S263 is executed. Conversely, when it is determined that the special V winning notification performance is to be executed (step S268: YES), a special V winning notification performance command that instructs the execution of the special V winning notification performance is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S269). This special V winning notification performance command is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. A V prize announcement performance will be realized.

[Interruption processing by image and sound control board 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, an explanation will be given of the interrupt processing executed in the image and sound control board 100. Here, FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process executed in the image and sound control board 100. The image-acoustic control board 100 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 65 at fixed time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. .

First, the image-acoustic control CPU 101 executes image display control processing to control image display on the display screen 70 based on commands received from the sub-control board 90 (step S71). This image display control process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 66.

Following the process of step S71, the image sound control CPU 101 executes a production sound output control process for outputting various production sounds from the speaker 38 in synchronization with the screen display performed on the display screen 70 or asynchronously. (Step S72).

Following the processing in step S72, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes data transmission control processing (step S73). Specifically, data regarding the image and sound control performed in the image and sound control board 100 is transmitted to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, the sub-control board 90 transfers the data received from the image-acoustic control board 100 to the lamp control board 120 through the data transfer process in step S33 of FIG. As a result, the frame lamp 37, board lamp 5, movable decorative member 14, etc. are controlled in synchronization with the effects performed by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

[Image display control processing by image and sound control board 100]
FIG. 66 is a detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. 65. The image and sound control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S711). Here, if it is determined that no command has been received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, when the image and sound control CPU 101 determines that a command from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S711: YES), it sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 103 (step S712). Based on the setting information set in the control RAM 103, it determines how the effect image should be displayed on the display screen 70, creates a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 104, and stores it in a predetermined area of the control RAM 103. (step S713), and set the display list in the display list storage area of the VRAM 106 (step S714). By the VDP 104 executing the drawing process based on the display list set in the display list storage area, the effect display instructed by the sub-control board 90 is realized.

[Timer interrupt processing by lamp control board 120]
Next, interrupt processing executed in the lamp control board 120 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed in the lamp control board 120. The lamp control board 120 receives commands from the sub-control board 90 and commands transmitted from the image-acoustic control board 100 via the sub-control board 90 during normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. A series of processes illustrated in FIG. 67 are repeatedly executed at fixed time intervals based on data related to image and sound control.

The lamp CPU 121 of the lamp control board 120 first executes a data reception process to receive data related to image and sound control transmitted from the image and sound control board 100 via the sub-control board 90 (step S801). The lamp CPU 121 controls the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the vibration motor so as to synchronize with the display screen 70 and the presentation by the speaker 38, based on the data related to image and sound control received through the process of step S801. 128 etc.

Following the process of step S801, the lamp CPU 121 determines whether or not the fluctuation effect start command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S802). Here, if it is determined that the variable effect start command has been received (step S802: YES), the light emission pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variable effect start command is read from the lamp ROM 122 and set in the lamp RAM 123. By doing so, the light emitting pattern of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, the LED built in the movable decorative member 14, etc. is set (step S803). Then, the lamp CPU 121 starts controlling the light emission of each light emitting means based on the set light emission pattern data (step S804).

In this manner, by the lamp CPU 121 executing the processing in steps S803 and S804, the light emission of the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 described above based on FIGS. 28 and 29 is controlled by the lamp CPU 121. become.

Following the process in step S804, the lamp CPU 121 is instructed to perform an accessory effect that moves the movable decorative member 14 in the current symbol variation based on the setting information included in the received variation effect start command. It is determined whether or not there is one (step S805). Specifically, for example, based on whether or not the setting information indicating the preview effect pattern included in the received variable effect start command is information indicating that the effect effect is to be executed, the effect effect may be executed. Determine whether you are instructed to do so. Here, if it is determined that an instruction has been given to perform the accessory effect (step S805: YES), operation pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variable effect start command is read out from the lamp ROM 122, and the operation pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variable effect start command is read out from the lamp ROM 122 and The operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is set by setting it in the RAM 123 (step S806). Although not shown in FIG. 67, if the received variable effect start command includes setting information instructing execution of the effect using the vibration motor 128 (see FIG. 20), the received variable effect start command The vibration pattern of the vibration motor 128 is set by reading vibration pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the lamp ROM 122 and setting it in the lamp RAM 123. Then, based on the data related to the image and sound control received in the process of step S801, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the effect using the vibration motor 128, and when it is determined that the execution timing has arrived, the data is set in the lamp RAM 123. Drive control of the vibration motor 128 is executed based on the vibration pattern data. Thereby, the effect using the vibration motor 128 described above based on FIG. 20 is realized.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 67, when the lamp CPU 121 executes the process of step S806, when it determines that the variable effect start command has not been received (step S802: NO), or when the lamp CPU 121 is instructed to perform the accessory effect. If it is determined that the movement pattern data of the movable decoration member 14 is not set in the lamp RAM 123 (step S805: NO), it is determined whether the movement pattern of the movable decoration member 14 is set based on whether or not the movement pattern data of the movable decoration member 14 is set in the lamp RAM 123. Determination is made (step S807). Here, if it is determined that the movement pattern of the movable decorative member 14 has been set (step S807: YES), for example, the movable decorative member 14 is It is determined whether or not it is the operation start timing (step S808).

When the lamp CPU 121 determines that it is the timing to start the operation of the movable decorative member 14 (step S808: YES), the lamp CPU 121 executes a movable decorative member control process to operate the movable decorative member 14 according to the operation pattern set in the process of step S806. (Step S809).

When the lamp CPU 121 executes the process of step S809, when it determines that the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is not set (step S807: NO), when it determines that it is not the timing to start the operation of the movable decorative member 14 (Step S808: NO), it is determined whether or not a variation production end command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 has been received (Step S810). Here, if it is determined that the variable performance end command has been received (step S810: YES), light emission control for a confirmed performance to notify a win or loss is executed (step S811). Specifically, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the movable decorative member 14 are read out from the lamp ROM 122 and set in the lamp RAM 123, thereby reading out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variable production end command. Set the light emitting pattern of the built-in LED, etc. Then, the lamp CPU 121 executes light emission control of each light emitting means based on the set light emission pattern data until the fixed time elapses.

When the lamp CPU 121 executes the process of step S811, or when it is determined that the variation effect end command has not been received (step S810: NO), the lamp CPU 121 receives the pending icon display command transmitted from the sub control board 90. It is determined whether or not (step S812). Here, if it is determined that the pending icon display command has not been received (step S812: NO), the series of interrupt processing ends and the processing returns to step S801. Although not shown in FIG. 67, if it is determined in step S812 that the pending icon display command has not been received, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in white as described above with reference to FIG. Then, the lamp CPU 121 controls the light emission of the second light emitting group 512.

On the other hand, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that the pending icon display command has been received (step S812: YES), the icon change effect pattern information set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S5173 in FIG. It is determined whether it is included in the command (step S813). Here, if the icon change effect pattern information is not included in the received pending icon display command, a white pending icon is displayed, and since this white pending icon does not change to a special icon, step S812 is performed. As in the case where the determination is "NO", the lamp CPU 121 controls the light emission of the second light emitting group 512 so that the second light emitting group 512 blinks in white.

If the lamp CPU 121 determines that icon change effect pattern information is included in the received pending icon display command (step S813: YES), it executes a pending lighting pattern setting process (step S814). Specifically, by reading the light emission pattern data of the second light emission group 512 corresponding to the icon change effect pattern information included in the received pending icon display command from the lamp ROM 122 and setting it in the lamp RAM 123, the second light emission is performed. A light emission pattern for group 512 is set.

Note that the lamp CPU 121 can specify the timing at which the pending icon to be read ahead and the display mode of the icon change, based on the data related to the image and sound control received in the process of step S801. Therefore, the lamp CPU 121 adjusts the light emitting pattern of the second light emitting group 512 based on the set light emitting pattern and the timing at which the pending icon and the display mode of the icon are changed, which are specified based on the data related to image and sound control. At the same time, the light emission pattern is changed at the necessary timing. As a result, as described above with reference to FIGS. 29(A) to 29(C), the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the same color as the display color of the prefetch target pending icon (or the icon) after the change. The performance will be realized.

[Modified example]
Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may have the following embodiments, for example. That is, in the above embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", the second major prize opening 28 (and The case where a jackpot game using the mouth 287) is executed has been explained as an example (see FIG. 6(B) and FIG. 7). On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", the second major prize opening 28 (and the V prize A jackpot game may be executed using both the opening 287) and the first big winning opening 26.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the effective round game (the 1st round game in FIG. 7(A) and the 3rd round game in FIG. 7(B) correspond to this) is the second big prize opening 28 (and The case has been explained by taking as an example the case where the V winning hole 287) is made up of one short opening and one long opening. On the other hand, in other embodiments, these effective round games are round games in which the second big winning hole 28 (and V winning hole 287) is opened long only once (without short opening), Alternatively, it may be a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 (and the V prize opening 287) is opened briefly (without long opening) a plurality of times.

Further, in the above embodiment, the four types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 6(B)) are all jackpots in which only 2R worth of prize balls can be obtained as an example. In other embodiments, these four types of jackpots may be used as jackpots that can obtain prize balls worth 3R or more.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the launch promotion effect that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning hole 287 (see FIGS. 13(B) and (C)) and the game ball winning the V prize are provided as a condition. After the jackpot game ends without performing either of the V winning notification effects (see FIGS. 13(D) and (E)) that may be performed, the challenge mode (not informing whether or not it is in the "probable variable gaming state") The explanation was given using an example where a performance is performed. On the other hand, in other embodiments, for example, after the jackpot game ends, the production is executed in the challenge mode until the special symbol and the production symbol are displayed 40 times, and the V winning occurs during the jackpot game. If so, the effect is executed from the variable display of the 41st rotation in the effect mode (the fierce battle RUSH exemplified in the above embodiment may be used) that definitively informs that it is a "definitely variable gaming state". You can.

In addition, in the above embodiment, regarding the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, the above-mentioned game control is performed based on FIG. 7, and the case where the above-mentioned performance control is performed based on FIGS. 13 and 14 is taken as an example. explained. On the other hand, in other embodiments, for example, a normal jackpot is provided as a part of the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, and the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is related to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination. The above game control and performance control may be performed in the same way.

Further, in the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a type of pachinko game machine called a so-called V-ST machine, but the present invention is applied to a type of pachinko game machine called a so-called variable loop type. It may also be applied to other gaming machines such as.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized even with other configurations and operation modes. Furthermore, the order of processing, set values, random values, threshold values used for determination, etc. in the above-described flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention may be applied to other orders or values as long as they do not depart from the scope of the present invention. It goes without saying that this can be achieved. The drawings and the like illustrated in the above embodiments are merely examples, and other embodiments may be used.

1 gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), 5 board lamp, 7 image display device, 14 movable decorative member, 21 first starting port, 22 second starting port, 23 opening/closing member, 26 first grand prize opening, 28 second large opening Winning opening, 37 frame lamp, 41 first special symbol display, 42 second special symbol display, 44 first special symbol pending display, 45 second special symbol pending display, 70 display screen, 71 pending icon display area , 72 icon display area, 80 main control board, 81 main CPU, 90 sub-control board, 91 sub-CPU, 100 image-acoustic control board, 101 image-acoustic control CPU, 128 vibration motor, 211 first starting port sensor, 221 first 2 starting port sensor, 510 first board, 511 first light emitting group, 512 second light emitting group, 520 second board, 523 third light emitting group.

Claims (1)

a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, symbol display control means causes a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a symbol and then stop and display a symbol indicating the result of the determination;
a reservation means capable of suspending the right of judgment up to a predetermined number;
prior determination means for making a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made on the rights reserved by the reservation means;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
Based on the result of the determination, a winning notification effect that notifies that the special game will be executed or that the special game is Execute a failure notification effect to notify that it will not be executed,
Before the start of the specific variation, an expectation effect that makes the user expect that the winning notification effect will be executed in the specific variation based on the result of the preliminary judgment regarding the right of judgment corresponding to the specific variation. As such, it is possible to perform the first expected performance or the second expected performance,
When the first expected performance is executed, a first suggestion performance indicating that the possibility of the winning notification performance being executed is a first degree, and a first suggestion performance indicating that the probability is higher than the first degree. executing at least one of the following in the specific variation;
When the second expectation effect is executed, a third suggestion effect indicating that the possibility is a third degree higher than the second degree, and a third suggestion effect indicating that the possibility is higher than the first degree. executing either one of the following in the specific variation;
The second expected performance is a change performance that changes the background image being displayed to another background image,
The performance control means is
When the third suggestion effect is executed in the specific variation, there is a time when the win notification effect is executed and a time when the loss notification effect is executed during the execution of the specific variation. A gaming machine.

Images